Abb acs850-04-firmware-manual

ACS850
Firmware Manual
ACS850 Standard Control Program

ACS850 drive manuals
*The delivery includes a multilingual quick installation guide.
**The delivery includes a multilingual quick start-up guide.
DRIVE HARDWARE MANUAL*
ACS850-04 Drive Modules (1.1 to 45 kW) Hardware Manual – 3AUA0000045496 (English)
ACS850-04 Drive Modules (55 to 160 kW, 75 to 200 hp) Hardware Manual – 3AUA0000045487
(English)
ACS850-04 Drive Modules (200 to 500 kW, 250 to 600 hp) Hardware Manual – 3AUA0000026234
(English)
DRIVE FIRMWARE MANUALS
ACS850 Standard Control Program Firmware Manual** – 3AUA0000045497 (English).
OPTION MANUALS*
FIO-01 Digital I/O Extension User’s Manual – 3AFE68784921 (English)
FIO-11 Analog I/O Extension User’s Manual – 3AFE68784930 (English)
FIO-21 Analog I/O Extension User’s Manual – 3AUA0000031061 (English)
FEN-01 TTL Encoder Interface User’s Manual – 3AFE68784603 (English)
FEN-11 Absolute Encoder Interface User’s Manual – 3AFE68784841 (English)
FEN-21 Resolver Interface User’s Manual – 3AFE68784859 (English)
FEN-31 HTL Encoder Interface User’s Manual – 3AUA0000031044 (English)

Firmware Manual
ACS850 Standard Control Program
3AUA0000045497 Rev C
EN
EFFECTIVE: 2009-07-20 © 2009 ABB Oy. All Rights Reserved.
Table of contents

Table of contents 5
Table of contents
ACS850 drive manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
1. About the manual
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Reader . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
2. The ACS850 control panel
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Mechanical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Electrical installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Status line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Operating instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Basics of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
List of tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Help and panel version – Any mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Basic operations – Any mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Output mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Assistants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Changed Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Fault Logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Time & Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Parameter Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
I/O Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Reference Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Drive Info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Parameter Change Log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
3. Control locations and operating modes
Local control vs. external control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Local control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
External control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Operating modes of the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Speed control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Torque control mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Special control modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Safety

6 Table of contents
4. Program features
Application macros . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Automatic fault resets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Autophasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Critical speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
DC voltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Overvoltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Undervoltage control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Voltage control and trip limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Brake chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Drive-to-drive link . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Emergency stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Encoder support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Energy optimizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Fieldbus control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Jogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Peak value logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Amplitude loggers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Maintenance counters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Mechanical brake control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Sleep function for process PID control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Programmable analog inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Programmable analog outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Programmable digital inputs and outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Programmable relay outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Programmable protection functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Start interlock (parameter 10.20) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
External fault (parameter 30.01) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Local control loss detection (parameter 30.03) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Motor phase loss detection (parameter 30.04) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Earth fault detection (parameter 30.05) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Supply phase loss detection (parameter 30.06) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Safe Torque Off detection (parameter 30.07) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Switched supply and motor cabling (parameter 30.08) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Stall protection (parameters 30.09…30.12) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Scalar motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Signal supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Speed controller tuning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Thermal motor protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Thermal motor protection model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Temperature measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Timers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
User-definable load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
User-definable U/f curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Table of contents 7
5. Application macros
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Factory macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Default control connections for the Factory macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Default control connections for the Hand/Auto macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
PID control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Default control connections for the PID control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Torque control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Default control connections for the Torque control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Sequential control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Default control connections for the Sequential control macro . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
6. Parameters
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Parameter listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
01 Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
02 I/O values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
03 Control values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
04 Appl values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
06 Drive status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
08 Alarms & faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
09 System info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
10 Start/stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
11 Start/stop mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
12 Operating mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
13 Analogue inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
14 Digital I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
15 Analogue outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
16 System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
19 Speed calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
20 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
21 Speed ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
22 Speed ref ramp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
23 Speed ctrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
24 Torque ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
25 Critical speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
26 Constant speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
27 Process PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
30 Fault functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
31 Mot therm prot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
32 Automatic reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
33 Supervision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
34 User load curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
35 Process variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
36 Timed functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
38 Flux ref . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

8 Table of contents
40 Motor control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
42 Mech brake ctrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
44 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
45 Energy optimising . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
47 Voltage ctrl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
48 Brake chopper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
49 Data storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
50 Fieldbus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
51 FBA settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
52 FBA data in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
53 FBA data out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
56 Panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
57 D2D communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
64 Load analyzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
90 Enc module sel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
91 Absol enc conf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
92 Resolver conf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
93 Pulse enc conf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
94 Ext IO conf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
95 Hw configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
97 User motor par . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
99 Start-up data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
7. Additional parameter data
What this chapter contains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Terms and abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Fieldbus addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Pointer parameter format in fieldbus communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
32-bit integer value pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
32-bit integer bit pointers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Parameter groups 1…9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Parameter groups 10…99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
8. Fault tracing
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Alarm and fault indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
How to reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Fault history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Alarm messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Fault messages generated by the drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
9. Fieldbus control
System overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Drive control parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
The fieldbus control interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282

Table of contents 9
The Control Word and the Status Word . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Actual values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
FBA communication profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Fieldbus references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
State diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
10. Control block diagrams
Speed feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Speed reference modification and ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Speed error handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Torque reference modification, operating mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Process PID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Direct torque control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Further information
Product and service inquiries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Product training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Document library on the Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295

About the manual 11
1
About the manual
What this chapter contains
The chapter describes the contents of the manual. It also contains information on the
compatibility, safety and intended audience.
Compatibility
The manual is compatible with ACS850 standard control program.
Safety instructions
Follow all safety instructions delivered with the drive.
• Read the complete safety instructions before you install, commission, or use
the drive. The complete safety instructions are given at the beginning of the
Hardware Manual.
• Read the software function specific warnings and notes before changing the
default settings of the function. For each function, the warnings and notes are
given in this manual in the section describing the related user-adjustable
parameters.
Reader
The reader of the manual is expected to know the standard electrical wiring practices,
electronic components, and electrical schematic symbols.

12 About the manual
Contents
The manual consists of the following chapters:
• The ACS850 control panel provides a description and instructions for use of the
control panel.
• Control locations and operating modes describes the control locations and
operation modes of the drive.
• Program features contains descriptions of the features of the ACS850 standard
control program.
• Application macros contains a short description of each macro together with a
connection diagram.
• Parameters describes the parameters of the drive.
• Additional parameter data contains further information on the parameters.
• Fault tracing lists the alarm (warning) and fault messages with possible causes
and remedies.
• Fieldbus control describes the communication to and from a fieldbus network.
• Control block diagrams contains a graphical representation of the control
program.
Related manuals
The delivery of the drive includes a multilingual Quick Start-up Guide.
A complete list of related manuals is printed on the inside of the front cover.

The ACS850 control panel 13
2
The ACS850 control panel
This chapter describes the features and operation of the ACS850 control panel.
The control panel can be used to control the drive, read status data, and adjust
parameters.
Features
• alphanumeric control panel with an LCD display
• copy function – parameters can be copied to the control panel memory for later
transfer to other drives or for backup of a particular system.
• context sensitive help
• real time clock.

14 The ACS850 control panel
Installation
Mechanical installation
For mounting options, see the Hardware Manual of the drive.
Instructions for mounting the control panel onto a cabinet door are available in
ACS-CP-U Control Panel IP54 Mounting Platform Kit Installation Guide
(3AUA0000049072 [English]).
Electrical installation
Use a CAT5 straight-through network cable with a maximum length of 3 meters.
Suitable cables are available from ABB.
For the control panel connector location on the drive, see the Hardware Manual of the
drive.

Layout
No. Use
1 Status LED – Green for normal operation.
2 LCD display – Divided into three main areas:
Status line – variable, depending on the mode of operation, see section Status line on page 16.
Center – variable; in general, shows signal and parameter values, menus or lists. Shows also faults
and alarms.
Bottom line – shows current functions of the two soft keys and, if enabled, the clock display.
3 Soft key 1 – Function depends on the context. The text in the lower left corner of the LCD display
indicates the function.
4 Soft key 2 – Function depends on the context. The text in the lower right corner of the LCD display
indicates the function.
5 Up –
Scrolls up through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display.
Increments a value if a parameter is selected.
Increments the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.
Holding the key down changes the value faster.
6 Down –
Scrolls down through a menu or list displayed in the center of the LCD display.
Decrements a value if a parameter is selected.
Decrements the reference value if the upper right corner is highlighted.
Holding the key down changes the value faster.
7 LOC/REM – Changes between local and remote control of the drive.
8 Help – Displays context sensitive information when the key is pressed. The information displayed
describes the item currently highlighted in the center of the display.
9 STOP – Stops the drive in local control.
10 START – Starts the drive in local control.
30.10HzLOC
DIR 12:45 MENU
400RPM
1200 RPM
12.4 A
405 dm3/s
3 4
5
67 8
9 10
30.00rpm
50 A
10 Hz
7 %10.
0.
49.
LOC
DIR MENU00:00
1
2a
2b
2c
30.00rpm

Status line
The top line of the LCD display shows the basic status information of the drive.
No. Field Alternatives Significance
1 Control location LOC Drive control is local, that is, from the control panel.
REM Drive control is remote, such as the drive I/O or fieldbus.
2 State Forward shaft direction
Reverse shaft direction
Rotating arrow Drive is running at reference.
Dotted rotating
arrow
Drive is running but not at reference.
Stationary arrow Drive is stopped.
Dotted stationary
arrow
Start command is present, but the motor is not running,
e.g. because start enable signal is missing.
3 Panel operation mode • Name of the current mode
• Name of the list or menu shown
• Name of the operation state, e.g. REF EDIT.
4 Reference value or
number of the
selected item
• Reference value in the Output mode
• Number of the highlighted item, e.g mode, parameter
group or fault.
30.00rpmLOC
1 2 4
LOC MAIN MENU 1
1 2 3 4

Operating instructions
Basics of operation
You operate the control panel with menus and keys. The keys include two context-
sensitive soft keys, whose current function is indicated by the text shown in the
display above each key.
You select an option, e.g. operation mode or parameter, by entering the MENU state
using soft key 2, and then by scrolling the and arrow keys until the
option is highlighted and then pressing the relevant soft key. With the right soft key
you usually enter a mode, accept an option or save the changes. The left soft key is
used to cancel the made changes and return to the previous operation level.
The Control Panel has ten options in the Main menu: Parameters, Assistants,
Changed Par, Fault Logger, Time & Date, Parameter Backup, I/O Settings, Reference
Edit, Drive Info and Parameter Change Log. In addition, the control panel has an
Output mode, which is used as default. Also, when a fault or alarm occurs, the panel
goes automatically to the Fault mode showing the fault or alarm. You can reset the
fault in the Output or Fault mode. The operation in these modes and options is
described in this chapter.
Initially, the panel is in the Output mode, where you
can start, stop, change the direction, switch between
local and remote control, modify the reference value
and monitor up to three actual values. To do other
tasks, go first to the Main menu and select the
appropriate option on the menu. The status line (see
section Status line on page 11) shows the name of
the current menu, mode, item or state. PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC
50 A
10 Hz
7 %10.
0.
49.
LOC
DIR MENU00:00
30.00rpm

List of tasks
The table below lists common tasks, the mode in which you can perform them,
abbreviations of the options in the Main menu and the page number where the steps
to do the task are described in detail.
Task Mode / Main menu
option
Abbreviations of
the Main menu
options *
Page
How to get help Any - 19
How to find out the panel version Any - 19
How to start and stop the drive Output - 20
How to switch between local and remote control Any - 20
How to change the direction of the motor rotation Any - 21
How to set the speed, frequency, torque or position
reference in the Output mode
Output - 21
How to adjust the display contrast Output - 22
How to change the value of a parameter Parameters PARAMETERS 23
How to change the value of value pointer parameters Parameters PARAMETERS 24
How to change the value of bit pointer parameter to
point to the value of a bit in another signal
Parameters PARAMETERS 26
How to change the value of bit pointer parameter to
fixed 0 (FALSE) or 1 (TRUE)
Parameters PARAMETERS 28
How to select the monitored signals Parameters PARAMETERS 29
How to do guided tasks (specification of related
parameter sets) with assistants
Assistants ASSISTANTS 30
How to view and edit changed parameters Changed Parameters CHANGED PAR 32
How to view faults Fault Logger FAULT LOGGER 34
How to reset faults and alarms Fault Logger FAULT LOGGER 35
How to show/hide the clock, change date and time
formats, set the clock and enable/disable automatic
clock transitions according to the daylight saving
changes
Time & Date TIME & DATE 36
How to copy parameters from the drive to the control
panel
Parameter Backup PAR BACKUP 38
How to restore parameters from the control panel to
the drive
Parameter Backup PAR BACKUP 38
How to view backup information Parameter Backup PAR BACKUP 44
How to edit and change parameter settings related to
I/O terminals
I/O Settings I/O SETTINGS 46
How to edit reference value Reference Edit REF EDIT 48
How to view drive info Drive Info DRIVE INFO 49
How to view and edit recently changed parameters Parameter Change
Log
PAR CHG LOG 50
* Main menu options actually shown in the control panel.

Help and panel version – Any mode
How to get help
How to find out the panel version
Step Action Display
1. Press to read the context-sensitive help text for the
item that is highlighted.
If help text exists for the item, it is shown on the display.
2. If the whole text is not visible, scroll the lines with keys
and .
3. After reading the text, return to the previous display by
pressing .
Step Action Display
1. If the power is switched on, switch it off.
- If the panel cable can be disconnected easily, unplug
the panel cable from the control panel, OR
- if the panel cable can not be disconnected easily, switch
off the control board or the drive.
2. Keep key depressed while you switch on the power
and read the information. The display shows the
following panel information:
Panel SW: Panel firmware version
ROM CRC: Panel ROM check sum
Flash Rev: Flash content version
Flash content comment.
When you release the key, the panel goes to the
Output mode.
?
TIME FORMAT
DATE FORMAT
SET TIME
SET DATE
DAYLIGHT SAVING
TIME & DATE 6
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC
EXIT 00:00
Use daylight saving
to enable or disable
automatic clock
adjustment according
to daylight saving
HELPLOC
EXIT 00:00
to enable or disable
automatic clock
adjustment according
to daylight saving
changes
HELPLOC
EXIT
TIME FORMAT
DATE FORMAT
SET TIME
SET DATE
DAYLIGHT SAVING
TIME & DATE 6
EXIT SEL00:00
LOC
?
?
Panel SW: x.xx
ROM CRC: xxxxxxxxxx
Flash Rev: x.xx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
xxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
PANEL VERSION INFO

Basic operations – Any mode
How to start, stop and switch between local and remote control
You can start, stop and switch between local and remote control in any mode. To be
able to start or stop the drive by using the control panel, the drive must be in local
control.
Step Action Display
1. To switch between remote control (REM shown on the
status line) and local control (LOC shown on the status
line), press .
Note: Switching to local control can be prevented with
parameter 16.01 Local lock.
The very first time the drive is powered up, it is in remote
control (REM) and controlled through the drive I/O
terminals. To switch to local control (LOC) and control the
drive using the control panel, press . The result
depends on how long you press the key:
If you release the key immediately (the display flashes
“Switching to the local control mode”), the drive stops.
Set the local control reference as instructed on page 21.
If you press the key until the text “Keep running” appears,
the drive continues running as before. The drive copies
the current remote values for the run/stop status and the
reference, and uses them as the initial local control
settings.
To stop the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the status line
stops rotating.
To start the drive in local control, press . The arrow ( or ) on the status line
starts rotating. It is dotted until the
drive reaches the setpoint.
LOC
REM
00:00
Switching to the
local control mode.
MESSAGELOC
LOC
REM

Output mode
In the Output mode, you can:
• monitor actual values of up to three signals
• change the direction of the motor rotation
• set the speed, frequency, torque or position reference
• adjust the display contrast
• start, stop, change the direction and switch between local and remote control.
You get to the Output mode by pressing repeatedly.
The top right corner of the display shows the
reference value. The center can be configured to
show up to three signal values or bar graphs; see
page 29 for instructions on selecting and modifying
the monitored signals.
How to change the direction of the motor rotation
How to set the speed, frequency, torque or position reference in the Output
mode
See also section Reference Edit on page 48.
Step Action Display
1. If you are not in the Output mode, press repeatedly
until you get there.
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status
line), switch to local control by pressing . The display
briefly shows a message about changing the mode and
then returns to the Output mode.
3. To change the direction from forward ( shown on the
status line) to reverse ( shown on the status line), or
vice versa, press .
Step Action Display
EXIT
50 A
10 Hz
7 %10.
0.
49.
LOC
DIR MENU00:00
30.00rpm
EXIT
50 A
10 Hz
7 %10.
0.
49.
REM
DIR MENU00:00
30.00rpm
LOC
REM
50 A
10 Hz
7 %10.
0.
49.
LOC
DIR MENU00:00
30.00rpm
DIR
EXIT
50 A
10 Hz
7 %10.
0.
49.
REM
DIR MENU00:00
30.00rpm

How to adjust the display contrast
2. If the drive is in remote control (REM shown on the status
line), switch to local control by pressing . The display
briefly shows a message about changing the mode and
then returns to the Output mode.
3. To increase the highlighted reference value shown in the
top right corner of the display, press . The value
changes immediately. It is stored in the permanent
memory of the drive and restored automatically after
power switch-off.
To decrease the value, press .
Step Action Display
2. To increase the contrast, press keys and
simultaneously.
To decrease the contrast, press keys and
simultaneously.
Step Action Display
LOC
REM
50 A
10 Hz
7 %10.
0.
49.
LOC
DIR MENU00:00
30.00rpm
50 A
10 Hz
7 %10.
0.
49.
LOC
DIR MENU00:00
31.00rpm
EXIT
50 A
10 Hz
7 %10.
0.
49.
LOC
DIR MENU00:00
30.00rpm
MENU
MENU
50 A
10 Hz
7 %10.
0.
49.
LOC
DIR MENU00:00
30.00rpm

Parameters
In the Parameters option, you can:
• view and change parameter values
How to select a parameter and change its value
Step Action Display
1. Go to the Main menu by pressing if you are in the
Output mode.
Otherwise press repeatedly until you get to the
Main menu.
2. Go to the Parameters option by selecting PARAMETERS
on the menu with keys and , and pressing
.
3. Select the appropriate parameter group with keys
and .
Press .
4. Select the appropriate parameter with keys and
. The current value of the parameter is shown
below the selected parameter. Here the parameter 99.06
Mot nom current is used as an example.
Press .
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC
ENTER 01 Actual values
02 I/O values
03 Control values
04 Appl values
06 Drive status
EXIT SEL00:00
PAR GROUPS 01LOC
99 Start-up data
01 Actual values
02 I/O values
03 Control values
04 Appl values
EXIT SEL00:00
PAR GROUPS 99LOC
SEL
9901 Language
English
9904 Motor type
9905 Motor ctrl mode
9906 Mot nom current
PARAMETERS
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC
9901 Language
9904 Motor type
0.0 A
PARAMETERS
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC
EDIT
PAR EDIT
0.0 A
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC

How to change the value of value pointer parameters
In addition to the parameters shown above, there are two kinds of pointer
parameters; value pointer parameters and bit pointer parameters. A value pointer
parameter points to the value of another parameter.
5. Specify a new value for the parameter with keys
and .
Pressing an arrow key once increments or decrements
the value. Keeping the key depressed for a while first
quickly changes the current digit until the cursor moves
left one position. This is repeated until the key is
released.
After the key is released, step-by-step adjustment of the
current digit is possible. If neither key is pressed for a
while, the cursor returns to the right one position at a
time.
Pressing both keys simultaneously replaces the
displayed value with the default value.
6. To save the new value, press .
To cancel the new value and keep the original, press
.
Step Action Display
Output mode.
Main menu.
.
and . Here the value pointer parameter 21.01
Speed ref1 sel is used as an example.
Step Action Display
PAR EDIT
3.5 A
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC
SAVE
CANCEL 9906 Mot nom current
3.5 A
9907 Mot nom voltage
9908 Mot nom freq
9909 Mot nom speed
PARAMETERS
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC
02 I/O values
03 Control values
04 Appl values
06 Drive status
EXIT SEL00:00
PAR GROUPS 01LOC
15 Analogue outputs
16 System
19 Signal conditions
20 Limits
21 Speed ref
EXIT SEL00:00
PAR GROUPS 21LOC

4. Press to select the appropriate parameter group.
Select the appropriate parameter with keys and
, current value of each parameter is shown below
it.
5. Press . Current value of the value pointer parameter
is shown, as well as the parameter it points to.
6. Specify a new value with keys and . The
parameter the value pointer parameter points to changes
respectively.
7. Press to accept any of the preselected values and
to return to the parameters list.
The new value is shown in the parameters list.
To freely define an analog signal as the value, choose
Pointer and press . The parameter group and index
will be shown.
Select the parameter group with and . The
text below the cursor displays the currently-selected
parameter group.
8. Press to select the parameter index.
Again, the text below the cursor reflects the current
setting.
9. To save the new value for the pointer parameter, press
.
Step Action Display
SEL
2101 Speed ref1 sel
AI2 scaled
2102 Speed ref2 sel
2103 Speed ref1 func
2104 Speed ref1/2 sel
PARAMETERS
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC
EDIT
2101 Speed ref1 sel
AI1 scaled
PAR EDIT
CANCEL SEL00:00
[P.02.05]
LOC
2101 Speed ref1 sel
FBA ref1
PAR EDIT
CANCEL SEL00:00
[P.02.26]
LOC
SEL
2101 Speed ref1 sel
FBA ref1
2102 Speed ref2 sel
PARAMETERS
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC
NEXT
2101 Speed ref1 sel
P.02.05
PAR EDIT
CANCEL SAVE00:00
02 I/O values
LOC
NEXT
2101 Speed ref1 sel
P.02.07
PAR EDIT
CANCEL SAVE00:00
0207 AI2 scaled
LOC
SAVE
2101 Speed ref1 sel
AI2 scaled
2102 Speed ref2 sel
PARAMETERS
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC

How to change the value of bit pointer parameters
The bit pointer parameter points to the value of a bit in another signal, or can be fixed
to 0 (FALSE) or 1 (TRUE). For the latter option, see page 28. A bit pointer parameter
points to a bit value (0 or 1) of one bit in a 32-bit signal. The first bit from the left is bit
number 31, and the first bit from the right is bit number 0.
Step Action Display
Output mode.
Main menu.
.
and . Here the bit pointer parameter 10.02 Ext1
start in1 is used as an example.
Current value of each parameter is shown below its
name.
Select the parameter 10.02 Ext1 start in1 with keys
and .
5. Press .
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC
02 I/O values
03 Control values
04 Appl values
06 Drive status
EXIT SEL00:00
PAR GROUPS 01LOC
10 Start/stop/dir
11 Start/stop mode
12 Operating mode
13 Analogue inputs
14 Digital I/O
EXIT SEL00:00
PAR GROUPS 10LOC
SEL
1001 Ext1 start func
In1
1002 Ext1 start in1
1003 Ext1 start in2
PARAMETERS
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC
1002 Ext1 start in1
DI1
1003 Ext1 start in2
PARAMETERS
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC
EDIT
1002 Ext1 start in1
DI1
PAR EDIT
CANCEL SEL00:00
[P.02.01.00]
LOC

6. Specify a new value with keys and . The
text below the cursor shows the corresponding
parameter group, index and bit.
7. Press to accept any of the preselected values and
to return to the parameters list.
To freely define a bit of a binary parameter as the value,
choose Pointer and press . The parameter group,
index and bit will be shown.
Select the parameter group with and . The
text below the cursor displays the currently-selected
parameter group.
8. Press to select the parameter index.
setting.
9. Press to select the bit.
setting.
10. To save the new value for the pointer parameter, press
.
Step Action Display
1002 Ext1 start in1
DI6
PAR EDIT
CANCEL SEL00:00
[P.02.01.05]
LOC
SEL
1002 Ext1 start in1
DI6
1003 Ext1 start in2
1005 Ext2 start in1
PARAMETERS
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC
NEXT
1002 Ext1 start in1
P.02.01.00
PAR EDIT
CANCEL SAVE00:00
02 I/O values
LOC
NEXT
1002 Ext1 start in1
P.02.01.00
PAR EDIT
CANCEL SAVE00:00
0201 DI status
LOC
NEXT
1002 Ext1 start in1
P.02.01.01
PAR EDIT
CANCEL SAVE00:00
01 DI2
LOC
SAVE
1002 Ext1 start in1
P.02.01.01
1003 Ext1 start in2
1005 Ext2 start in1
PARAMETERS
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC

How to change the value of bit pointer parameter to fixed 0 (FALSE) or 1 (TRUE)
The bit pointer parameter can be fixed to constant value of 0 (FALSE) or 1 (TRUE).
When adjusting a bit pointer parameter on the control panel, CONST is selected in
order to fix the value to 0 (displayed as C.FALSE) or 1 (C.TRUE).
Step Action Display
Output mode.
Main menu.
.
Select the appropriate parameter group with keys
and . Here the bit pointer parameter 14.07 DIO2
out src is used as an example.
Select the appropriate parameter with keys and
. Current value of each parameter is shown below
its name.
4. Press .
Select CONST with keys and .
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC
02 I/O values
03 Control values
04 Appl values
06 Drive status
EXIT SEL00:00
PAR GROUPS 01LOC
10 Start/stop/dir
11 Start/stop mode
12 Operating mode
13 Analogue inputs
14 Digital I/O
EXIT SEL00:00
PAR GROUPS 14LOC
SEL
1401 DIO1 Ton9901
1405 DIO1 Toff
1406 DIO2 conf
1407 DIO2 out src
P.06.02.03
PARAMETERS
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC
EDIT
1407 DIO2 out src
PAR EDIT
Pointer
CANCEL NEXT00:00
LOC
1407 DIO2 out src
PAR EDIT
Const
CANCEL NEXT00:00
LOC

How to select the monitored signals
5. Press .
6. Specify a new constant value (TRUE or FALSE) for the
bit pointer parameter
with keys and .
7. To continue, press .
.
Step Action Display
1. You can select which signals are monitored in the Output
mode and how they are displayed with group 56 Panel
display parameters. See page 23 for detailed instructions
on changing parameter values.
Note: If you set one of the parameters 56.01…56.03 to
zero, in the output mode you can see names for the two
remaining signals. The names are also shown if you set
one of the mode parameters 56.04…56.06 to Disabled.
Step Action Display
NEXT
C.FALSE
1407 DIO2 out src
PAR EDIT
CANCEL SAVE00:00
[0]
LOC
C.TRUE
1407 DIO2 out src
PAR EDIT
CANCEL SAVE00:00
[1]
LOC
SAVE
CANCEL 1407 DIO2 out src
C.TRUE
1408 DIO2 Ton
1409 DIO2 Toff
1410 DIO3 conf
PARAMETERS
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC
5601 Signal1 param
PAR EDIT
01.03
CANCEL NEXT00:00
LOC
5602 Signal2 param
PAR EDIT
01.04
CANCEL NEXT00:00
LOC
5603 Signal3 param
PAR EDIT
01.06
CANCEL NEXT00:00
LOC

Assistants
Assistants are routines that guide you through the essential parameter settings
related to a specific task, for example application macro selection, entering the motor
data, or reference selection.
In the Assistants mode, you can:
• use assistants to guide you through the specification of a set of basic parameters
How to use an assistant
The table below shows how assistants are invoked. The Motor Set-up Assistant is
used here as an example.
Step Action Display
Output mode.
Main menu.
2. Go to the Assistants mode by selecting ASSISTANTS on
the menu with keys and , and pressing
.
3. The Motor Set-up assistant under Firmware assistants is
used as an example.
Select Firmware assistants with keys and ,
and press .
4. Select Motor Set-up with keys and , and
press .
5. Select the appropriate motor type with keys and
.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC
ENTER Firmware assistants
Application assistant
EXIT SEL00:00
ASSISTANTS 1LOC
SEL
Select assistant
Application Macro
Motor Set-up
EXIT OK00:00
CHOICELOC
OK
9904 Motor type
PAR EDIT
AM
EXIT SAVE00:00
[0]
LOC
9904 Motor type
PAR EDIT
PMSM
EXIT SAVE00:00
[1]
LOC

6. To accept the new value and continue to the setting of the
next parameter, press .
After all the parameters of the assistant are set, the
Assistants menu is displayed. You can then select
another assistant or exit the Assistants mode.
To abort an assistant, press at any point.
Step Action Display
SAVE
EXIT
PAR EDIT
DTC
EXIT SAVE00:00
[0]
LOC

Changed Parameters
In the Changed Parameters mode, you can:
• view a list of all parameters that have been changed from the macro default
values
• change these parameters
How to view and edit changed parameters
Step Action Display
Output mode.
Main menu.
2. Go to the Changed Parameters mode by selecting
CHANGED PAR on the menu with keys and
, and pressing .
If there are no changed parameters in the history,
corresponding text will be shown.
If parameters have been changed, a list of them is
shown. Select the changed parameter on the list with
keys and . The value of the selected
parameter is shown below it.
3. Press to modify the value.
and .
Pressing the key once increments or decrements the
value. Holding the key down changes the value faster.
Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed
value with the default value.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC
ENTER
00:00
No parameters
MESSAGELOC
3.5 A
9908 Mot nom freq
9909 Mot nom speed
CHANGED PAR
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC
EDIT
PAR EDIT
3.5 A
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC
PAR EDIT
3.0 A
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC

5. To accept the new value, press . If the new value is
the default value, the parameter is removed from the list
of changed parameters.
.
Step Action Display
SAVE
CANCEL
3.0 A
9908 Mot nom freq
9909 Mot nom speed
CHANGED PAR
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC

Fault Logger
In the Fault Logger option, you can:
• view the drive fault history
• see the details of the most recent faults
• read the help text for the fault and make corrective actions
How to view faults
Step Action Display
Output mode.
Main menu.
2. Go to the Fault Logger option by selecting FAULT
LOGGER on the menu with keys and , and
pressing .
If there are no faults in the fault history, corresponding
text will be shown.
If there is a fault history, the display shows the fault log
starting with the most recent fault. The number on the
row is the fault code according to which the causes and
corrective actions are listed in chapter Fault tracing (page
259).
3. To see the details of a fault, select it with keys and
, and press .
Scroll the text with keys and .
To return to the previous display, press .
4. If you want help in diagnosing the fault, press .
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC
ENTER No fault history
found
MESSAGELOC
36: LOCAL CTRL LOSS
29.04.08 10:45:58
FAULT LOGGER
EXIT DETAIL00:00
LOC 1
DETAIL
EXIT
TIME
10:45:58
FAULT CODE
36
FAULT CODE EXTENSION
LOCAL CTRL LOSS
EXIT DIAG00:00
LOC
DIAG
Check parameter ‘30.0
3 Local ctrl loss’ se
tting. Check PC tool
or panel connection.
EXIT OK
LOC

How to reset faults
5. Press . The panel allows you to edit necessary
parameters to correct the fault.
and .
To accept the new value, press .
.
Step Action Display
1. When a fault occurs, a text identifying the fault is shown.
To reset the fault, press .
To return to the previous display, press .
Step Action Display
OK
3003 Local ctrl loss
PAR EDIT
Fault
EXIT SAVE00:00
[1]
LOC
SAVE
EXIT
3003 Local ctrl loss
PAR EDIT
Spd ref Safe
EXIT SAVE00:00
[2]
LOC
RESET
EXIT
FAULT 36
LOCAL CTRL LOSS
FAULT
RESET EXIT
LOC

Time & Date
In the Time & Date option, you can:
• show or hide the clock
• change date and time display formats
• set the date and time
• enable or disable automatic clock transitions according to the daylight saving
changes
The Control Panel contains a battery to ensure the function of the clock when the
panel is not powered by the drive.
How to show or hide the clock, change display formats, set the date and time
and enable or disable clock transitions due to daylight saving changes
Step Action Display
Output mode.
Main menu.
2. Go to the Time & Date option by selecting TIME & DATE
.
3. To show (hide) the clock, select CLOCK VISIBILITY on
the menu, press , select Show clock (Hide clock)
with keys and and
press , or, if you want to return to the previous
display without making changes, press .
To specify the time format, select TIME FORMAT on the
menu, press and select a suitable format with keys
and . Press to save or to
cancel your changes.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC
ENTER CLOCK VISIBILITY
TIME FORMAT
DATE FORMAT
SET TIME
SET DATE
EXIT SEL00:00
TIME & DATE 1LOC
SEL
SEL
EXIT
Show clock
Hide clock
EXIT SEL00:00
CLOCK VISIB 1LOC
SEL
SEL CANCEL 24-hour
12-hour
CANCEL SEL00:00
TIME FORMAT 1LOC

To specify the date format, select DATE FORMAT on the
menu, press and select a suitable format.
Press to save or to cancel your changes.
To set the time, select SET TIME on the menu and press
.
Specify the hours with keys and , and press
.
Then specify the minutes. Press to save or
to cancel your changes.
To set the date, select SET DATE on the menu and press
.
Specify the first part of the date (day or month depending
on the selected date format) with keys and
, and press . Repeat for the second part.
After specifying the year, press . To cancel your
changes, press .
To enable or disable the automatic clock transitions
according to the daylight saving changes, select
DAYLIGHT SAVING on the menu and press .
Pressing opens the help that shows the beginning
and end dates of the period during which daylight saving
time is used in each country or area whose daylight
saving changes you can select to be followed. Scroll the
text with keys and . To return to the
previous display, press .
To disable automatic clock transitions according to the
daylight saving changes, select Off and press .
To enable automatic clock transitions, select the country
or area whose daylight saving changes are followed and
press .
To return to the previous display without making
changes, press .
Step Action Display
SEL
OK CANCEL dd.mm.yy
mm/dd/yy
dd.mm.yyyy
mm/dd/yyyy
CANCEL OK00:00
DATE FORMAT 1LOC
SEL
OK
OK CANCEL 15:41
SET TIME
CANCEL OK
LOC
SEL
OK
OK
CANCEL
19.03.2008
SET DATE
CANCEL OK00:00
LOC
SEL
?
EXIT
SEL
SEL
EXIT
Off
EU
US
Australia1:NSW,Vict..
Australia2:Tasmania..
EXIT SEL00:00
DAYLIGHT SAV 1LOC
EXIT 00:00
EU:
On: Mar last Sunday
Off: Oct last Sunday
US:
HELPLOC

Parameter Backup
The Parameter Backup option is used to export parameters from one drive to another
or to make a backup of the drive parameters. Uploading stores all drive parameters,
including up to four user sets, to the Control Panel. Selectable subsets of the backup
file can then be restored/downloaded from the control panel to the same drive or
another drive of the same type.
In the Parameter Backup option, you can:
• Copy all parameters from the drive to the control panel with MAKE BACKUP TO
PANEL. This includes all defined user sets of parameters and internal (not
adjustable by the user) parameters such as those created by the ID Run.
• View the information about the backup stored in the control panel with SHOW
BACKUP INFO. This includes e.g. version information etc. of the current backup
file in the panel. It is useful to check this information when you are going to restore
the parameters to another drive with RESTORE PARS ALL to ensure that the
drives are compatible.
• Restore the full parameter set from the control panel to the drive using the
RESTORE PARS ALL command. This writes all parameters, including the internal
non-user-adjustable motor parameters, to the drive. It does NOT include the user
sets of parameters.
Note: Use this function only to restore the parameters from a backup or to restore
parameters to systems that are compatible.
• Restore all parameters, except motor data, to the drive with RESTORE PARS
NO-IDRUN.
• Restore only motor data parameters to the drive with RESTORE PARS IDRUN.
• Restore all user sets to the drive with RESTORE ALL USER SETS.
• Restore only user set 1…4 to the drive with RESTORE USER SET 1…RESTORE
USER SET 4.
How to backup and restore parameters
For all backup and restore functions available, see page 38.
Step Action Display
Output mode.
Main menu.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC

2. Go to the Parameter Backup option by selecting PAR
BACKUP on the menu with keys and , and
pressing .
To copy all parameters (including user sets and internal
parameters) from the drive to the control panel, select
MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL on the Par Backup with keys
and , and press . Operation starts.
Press if you want to stop the operation.
After the backup is completed, the display shows a
message about the completion. Press to return to
the Par Backup.
To perform restore functions, select the appropriate
operation (here RESTORE PARS ALL is used as an
example) on the Par Backup with keys and
.
Press . Restoring starts.
Backup interface version is checked. Scroll the text with
keys and .
If you want to continue, press . Press if you
want to stop the operation. If the downloading is
continued, the display shows a message about it.
Step Action Display
ENTER MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL
SHOW BACKUP INFO
RESTORE PARS ALL
RESTORE PARS NO-IDRUN
RESTORE PARS IDRUN
EXIT SEL00:00
PAR BACKUP 1LOC
SEL
ABORT
ABORT
PAR BACKUPLOC
Copying file 1/2
00:00
OK
OK
Parameter upload
successful
MESSAGELOC
00:00
MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL
SHOW BACKUP INFO
RESTORE PARS ALL
RESTORE PARS IDRUN
EXIT SEL
PAR BACKUP 3LOC
00:00
SEL
Initializing param.
restore operation
PAR BACKUPLOC
00:00
BACKUP INTERFACE VER
0.2
0.2
OK
FIRMWARE VERSION
CANCEL CONT
VERSION CHECKLOC 1
00:00
CONT CANCEL
Initializing param.
restore operation
PAR BACKUPLOC
00:00

Parameter errors
If you try to backup and restore parameters between different firmware versions, the
panel shows you the following parameter error information:
Downloading continues, drive is being restarted.
The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of
completion.
Downloading finishes.
Step Action Display
1. Restore operation starts normally.
2. Firmware version is checked.
You can see on the panel that the firmware versions are
not the same.
Scroll the text with keys and .
To continue, press . Press to stop the
operation.
Step Action Display
Restarting drive
PAR BACKUPLOC
00:00
PAR BACKUPLOC
50%
Restoring/downloading
all parameters
Finishing restore
operation
PAR BACKUPLOC
Initializing param.
restore operation
PAR BACKUPLOC
00:00
FIRMWARE VERSION
UIFI, 1100, 0,
UIFI, 1010, 0,
OK
PRODUCT VARIANT
CANCEL CONT
VER CHECKLOC 1
00:00
CONT CANCEL
FIRMWARE VERSION
PRODUCT VARIANT
3
3
OK
CANCEL CONT
VER CHECKLOC 2
00:00

3. If the downloading is continued, the display shows a
message about it.
Downloading continues, drive is being restarted.
The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of
completion.
Downloading continues.
Downloading finishes.
4. The panel shows a list of erroneous parameters.
You can scroll the parameters with keys and
. The reason for parameter error is also shown.
Step Action Display
Initializing param.
restore operation
PAR BACKUPLOC
00:00
Restarting drive
PAR BACKUPLOC
00:00
PAR BACKUPLOC
50%
all parameters
Restarting drive
PAR BACKUPLOC
00:00
Finishing restore
operation
PAR BACKUPLOC
6005*POS UNIT
0
?
VALUE MISSING
6008*POS2 INT SCALE
READY EDIT
PAR ERRORSLOC 1
00:00
22114*
1313*AI SUPERVIS ACT
0000 bin
INCORRECT VALUE TYPE
READY EDIT
PAR ERRORSLOC 4
00:00

Trying to restore a user set between different firmware versions
If you try to backup and restore a user set between different firmware versions, the
panel shows you the following alarm information:
5. You can edit parameters by pressing when EDIT
command is visible. Parameter 60.05 Pos unit is used as
an example.
Edit the parameter as shown in section Parameters on
page 23.
6. Press to save the new value.
Press to return to the list of erroneous parameters.
7. The parameter value you chose is visible under the
parameter name.
Press when you have finished editing the
parameters.
Step Action Display
1. Restore operation starts normally.
2. Version check is also OK.
You can see on the panel that the firmware versions are
not the same.
You can scroll the text with keys and .
Step Action Display
EDIT
6005 POS UNIT
PAR EDIT
Revolution
CANCEL SAVE00:00
[0]
LOC
SAVE
CANCEL
6005 POS UNIT
PAR EDIT
Degree
CANCEL SAVE00:00
[1]
LOC
READY
6005*POS UNIT
1
?
VALUE MISSING
6008*POS2 INT SCALE
READY EDIT
PAR ERRORSLOC 1
00:00
Initializing param.
restore operation
PAR BACKUPLOC
00:00
FIRMWARE VERSION
UIFI, 1100, 0,
UMFI, 1010, 0,
OK
PRODUCT VARIANT
CANCEL CONT
VER CHECKLOC 1
00:00
FIRMWARE VERSION
PRODUCT VARIANT
3
3
OK
CANCEL CONT
VER CHECKLOC 2
00:00

3. If the downloading is continued, the display shows a
message about it.
4. Downloading continues, drive is being restarted.
5. The display shows the transfer status as a percentage of
completion.
6. Downloading continues.
7. Downloading continues, drive is being restarted.
8. Downloading finishes.
9. Panel shows a text identifying the alarm and returns to
the Par Backup.
Step Action Display
Initializing param.
restore operation
PAR BACKUPLOC
00:00
Restarting drive
PAR BACKUPLOC
00:00
PAR BACKUPLOC
50%
user set 1
Initializing param.
restore operation
PAR BACKUPLOC
00:00
Restarting drive
PAR BACKUPLOC
00:00
Finishing restore
operation
PAR BACKUPLOC
ALARM 2036
RESTORE
ALARM
EXIT
LOC

Trying to load a user set between different firmware versions
If you try load a user set between different firmware versions, the panel shows you
the following fault information:
How to view information about the backup
Step Action Display
on the main menu as shown in section Parameters on
page 23.
A user set is loaded through parameter 16.09 User set
sel. Select parameter group 16 System with keys
and .
2. Press to select parameter group 16. Select
parameter 16.09 User set sel with keys and
. Current value of each parameter is shown below
its name.
3. Press .
Select the user set you want to load with keys and
.
Press .
4. Panel shows a text identifying the fault.
Step Action Display
Output mode.
Main menu.
EXIT SEL00:00
12 Operating mode
13 Analogue inputs
14 Digital I/O
15 Analogue outputs
16 System
PAR GROUPS 16LOC
SEL
1603 Pass code9901
1604 Param restore
1607 Param save
1609 User set sel
No request
PARAMETERS
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC
EDIT
1609 User set sel
PAR EDIT
No request
CANCEL SAVE00:00
[1]
LOC
SAVE
1609 User set sel
PAR EDIT
Load set 1
CANCEL SAVE00:00
[2]
LOC
FAULT 310
USERSET LOAD
FAULT
RESET EXIT
LOC
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC

2. Go to the Par Backup option by selecting PAR BACKUP
.
Select SHOW BACKUP INFO with keys and
.
3. Press . The display shows the following information
about the drive from where the backup was made:
BACKUP INTERFACE VER: Format version of the
backup file
FIRMWARE VERSION: Information on the firmware
UIFI: Firmware of the ACS850 drive
1100: Firmware version (e.g. 1.100)
0: Firmware patch version
PRODUCT VARIANT:
3: ACS850 (Standard control program)
4: ACS850 FA (Variant for factory applications)
You can scroll the information with keys and
.
4. Press to return to the Par Backup.
Step Action Display
ENTER MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL
SHOW BACKUP INFO
RESTORE PARS ALL
RESTORE PARS IDRUN
EXIT SEL00:00
PAR BACKUP 2LOC
SEL
LOC
EXIT 00:00
BACKUP INTERFACE VER
0.3
0.3
FIRMWARE VERSION
UIFI, 1100, 0,
BACKUP INFO
EXIT 00:00
FIRMWARE VERSION
UIFI, 1100, 0,
UIFI, 1100, 0,
PRODUCT VARIANT
3
BACKUP INFOLOC
EXIT
MAKE BACKUP TO PANEL
SHOW BACKUP INFO
RESTORE PARS ALL
RESTORE PARS IDRUN
EXIT SEL00:00
PAR BACKUP 1LOC

I/O Settings
In the I/O Settings mode, you can:
• check the parameter settings that configure the I/Os of the drive
• check the parameters that have an input or output selected as their source or
target
• edit the parameter setting
How to edit and change parameter settings related to I/O terminals
Step Action Display
Output mode.
Main menu.
2. Go the I/O Settings mode by selecting I/O SETTINGS on
.
Select the I/O group, e.g. Digital inputs, with keys
and .
3. Press . After a brief pause, the display shows the
current settings for the selection.
You can scroll digital inputs and parameters with keys
and .
4. Press . The panel shows information related to I/O
selected (in this case, DI1).
You can scroll information with keys and .
Press to return to the digital inputs.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC
ENTER Analog outputs
Analog inputs
Digital I/Os
Digital inputs
Relay outputs
EXIT SEL00:00
I/O SETTINGS 1LOC
Analog outputs
Analog inputs
Digital I/Os
Digital inputs
Relay outputs
EXIT SEL00:00
I/O SETTINGS 4LOC
SEL
DI1
1002 Ext1 start in1
DI2
DI3
1010 Fault reset sel
I/O SETTINGS 1LOC
EXIT INFO00:00
INFO
EXIT
LOC
EXIT 00:00
NUM OF I/O ITEMS
0
SLOT NUMBER
0
NODE NUMBER
I/O INFO

5. Select the setting (line with a parameter number) with
keys and . You can edit the parameter
(INFO selection turns into EDIT selection).
6. Press .
7. Specify a new value for the setting with keys and
.
Pressing the key once increments or decrements the
value. Holding the key down changes the value faster.
Pressing the keys simultaneously replaces the displayed
value with the default value.
8. To save the new value, press .
.
Step Action Display
DI1
1002 Ext1 start in1
DI2
DI3
I/O SETTINGS 1LOC
EXIT EDIT00:00
EDIT
1002 Ext1 start in1
PAR EDIT
DI1
CANCEL SEL00:00
[P.02.01.00]
LOC
1002 Ext1 start in1
PAR EDIT
DI04
CANCEL SEL00:00
[P.02.03.03]
LOC
SEL
CANCEL DI1
1002 Ext1 start in1
DI2
DI3
I/O SETTINGS 1LOC
EXIT EDIT00:00

Reference Edit
In the Reference Edit option, you can:
• accurately control the local reference value,
Editing is allowed only in the LOC state, the option always edits the local reference
value.
How to edit reference value
Step Action Display
1. If the panel is in the remote control mode (REM shown on
the status line), switch to local control (LOC shown on the
status line) by pressing . Reference editing is not
possible in remote control mode. (See page 20 for more
information on switching between the local and remote
control modes.)
The display shows a message about that if you try to
enter REF EDIT in the remote control mode.
2. Otherwise, go to the Main menu by pressing if you
are in the Output mode.
Main menu.
3. Go to the Reference Edit option by selecting REF EDIT
.
4. Select the correct sign with keys and , and
press . Select the correct numbers with keys
and , and after each number is selected, press
.
5. After the last number is selected, press . Go to the
Output mode by pressing . The selected reference
value is shown in the status line.
LOC
REM
Reference editing
enabled only in
local control mode
MESSAGEREM
00:00
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC
ENTER
0000.00 rpm+
REF EDIT
CANCEL NEXT00:00
LOC
NEXT
NEXT
1250.00 rpm-
REF EDIT
CANCEL SAVE00:00
LOC
SAVE
EXIT
-1250.00rpm
50 A
10 Hz
7 %10.
0.
49.
LOC
DIR MENU00:00

Drive Info
In the Drive Info option, you can:
• view information on the drive,
How to view drive info
Step Action Display
Output mode.
Main menu.
2. Go to the Drive info option by selecting DRIVE INFO on
.
3. The display shows information about the drive. You can
scroll the information with keys and . Note:
The information shown may vary according to the
firmware version of the drive.
DRIVE NAME: Drive name defined as a text in
DriveStudio commissioning and maintenance tool
DRIVE TYPE: e.g. ACS850
DRIVE MODEL: Type code of the drive
FW VERSION: See page 44.
SOLUTION PROGRAM: Version information of the active
solution program
BASE SOLUTION PROGRAM: Version information of
the solution program template
STANDARD LIBRARY: Version information of the
standard library
TECHNOLOGY LIBRARY: Optional. Version information
of the technology library
POWER UNIT SERNO: Serial number of the power
stage (JPU)
MEM UNIT HW SERNO: Serial number in manufacturing
the memory unit (JMU)
MEM UNIT CONFIG SERNO: Serial number in
configuring the memory unit (JMU).
Press to return to the Main menu.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC
ENTER
EXIT 00:00
DRIVE NAME
-
DRIVE TYPE
ACS850
DRIVE MODEL
DRIVE INFOLOC
EXIT
EXIT 00:00
FW VERSION
UIFI, 1010, 0,
SOLUTION PROGRAM
-
BASE SOLUTION PROGRAM
DRIVE INFOLOC

Parameter Change Log
In the Parameter Change Log option, you can:
• view latest parameter changes made via control panel or PC tool,
• edit these parameters,
How to view latest parameter changes and edit parameters
Step Action Display
Output mode.
Main menu.
2. Go to the Parameter Change Log option by selecting
PAR CHG LOG on the menu with keys and
, and pressing .
If there are no parameter changes in the history,
corresponding text will be shown.
If there are parameter changes in the history, the panel
shows a list of the last parameter changes starting from
the most recent change. The order of the changes is also
indicated with a number in the top right corner (1 stands
for most recent change, 2 the second latest change etc.)
If a parameter has been changed twice, it is shown as
one change in the list. The current value of the parameter
and the parameter change date and time are also shown
below the selected parameter. You can scroll the
parameters with keys and .
3. If you want to edit a parameter, select the parameter with
keys and and press .
and .
To save the new value, press .
.
MENU
EXIT
PARAMETERS
ASSISTANTS
CHANGED PAR
EXIT ENTER00:00
MAIN MENU 1LOC
ENTER No parameters
available
MESSAGELOC
00:00
9402 Ext IO2 sel
None
11.09.2008 12:04:55
9401 Ext IO1 sel
9402 Ext IO2 sel
LAST CHANGES
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC 1
EDIT
9402 Ext IO2 sel
PAR EDIT
None
CANCEL SAVE00:00
[0]
LOC
SAVE
CANCEL
9402 Ext IO2 sel
PAR EDIT
FIO-01
CANCEL SAVE00:00
[1]
LOC

5. The parameter change is shown as the first one in the list
of last parameter changes.
Note: You can reset the parameter change log by setting
parameter 16.14 Reset ChgParLog to Reset.
Step Action Display
9402 Ext IO2 sel
FIO-01
12.09.2008 15:09:33
9402 Ext IO2 sel
9401 Ext IO1 sel
LAST CHANGES
EXIT EDIT00:00
LOC 1

Control locations and operating modes 53
3
Control locations and
operating modes
This chapter describes the control locations and operating modes of the drive.

54 Control locations and operating modes
Local control vs. external control
The drive has two main control locations: external and local. The control location is
selected with the LOC/REM key on the control panel or with the PC tool (Take/
Release button).
Local control
The control commands are given from the control panel keypad or from a PC
equipped with DriveStudio when the drive is in local control. Speed and torque control
modes are available for local control.
Local control is mainly used during commissioning and maintenance. The control
panel always overrides the external control signal sources when used in local control.
Changing the control location to local can be disabled by parameter 16.01 Local lock.
The user can select by a parameter (30.03 Local ctrl loss) how the drive reacts to a
control panel or PC tool communication break.
ACS850
Local control
External control
Control panel or PC tool
(DriveStudio)
(optional)
I/O 1) 3)
Drive-to-drive link
Fieldbus adapter
Fxxx in Slot 3
1) Extra inputs/outputs can be added by installing optional I/O extension modules (FIO-xx) in
drive Slot 1/2.
2) Encoder or resolver interface module (FEN-xx) installed in drive Slot 1/2
3) Two encoder/resolver interface modules of the same type are not allowed.
Encoder
MOTOR
PLC
(= Programmable
Logic Controller)
2) 3)
M
3~

Control locations and operating modes 55
External control
When the drive is in external control, control commands are given through the
fieldbus interface (via an optional fieldbus adapter module), the I/O terminals (digital
and analogue inputs), optional I/O extension modules or the drive-to-drive link.
External references are given through the fieldbus interface, analogue inputs, drive to
drive link and encoder inputs.
Two external control locations, EXT1 and EXT2, are available. The user can select
control signals (e.g. start and stop) and control modes for both external control
locations. Depending on the user selection, either EXT1 or EXT2 is active at a time.
Selection between EXT1/EXT2 is done via digital inputs or fieldbus control word.
Operating modes of the drive
The drive can operate in several control modes.
Speed control mode
Motor rotates at a speed proportional to the speed reference given to the drive. This
mode can be used either with estimated speed used as feedback, or with an encoder
or resolver for better speed accuracy.
Speed control mode is available in both local and external control.
Torque control mode
Motor torque is proportional to the torque reference given to the drive. This mode can
be used either with estimated speed used as feedback, or with an encoder or resolver
for more accurate and dynamic motor control.
Torque control mode is available in both local and external control.
Special control modes
In addition to the above-mentioned control modes, the following special control
modes are available:
• Emergency stop modes OFF1 and OFF3: Drive stops along the defined
deceleration ramp and drive modulation stops.
• Jogging mode: Drive starts and accelerates to the defined speed when the
jogging signal is activated.
For more information, see parameter group 10 Start/stop on page 109.

56 Control locations and operating modes

Program features 57
4
Program features
This chapter describes the features of the control program.

58 Program features
Application macros
See chapter Application macros (page 81).
Automatic fault resets
The drive can automatically reset itself after overcurrent, overvoltage, undervoltage,
external and “analog input below minimum” faults. By default, automatic resets are off
and must be separately activated by the user.
Settings
Parameter group 32 Automatic reset (page 182).
Autophasing
Autophasing is an automatic measurement routine to determine the angular position
of the magnetic flux of a permanent magnet synchronous motor. The motor control
requires the absolute position of the rotor flux in order to control motor torque
accurately.
Autophasing is applicable to permanent magnet synchronous motors in these cases:
• One-time measurement of the rotor and encoder position difference when an
absolute encoder or resolver (one pole pair) is used
• Measurement at first start after each power-up when an incremental encoder is
used
• With open-loop motor control, repetitive measurement of the rotor position at
every start.
Several autophasing modes are available (see parameter 11.07 Autophasing mode).
The turning mode is recommended especially with case 1 as it is the most robust and
accurate method. In turning mode, the motor shaft is turned back and forward (±360/
polepairs)° in order to determine the rotor position. In case 3 (open-loop control), the
shaft is turned only in one direction and the angle is smaller.
The standstill modes can be used if the motor cannot be turned (for example, when
the load is connected). As the characteristics of motors and loads differ, testing must
be done to find out the most suitable standstill mode.
A rotor position offset used in motor control can also be given by the user. See
parameter 97.20 PM angle offset.

Program features 59
The drive is capable of determining the rotor position when started to a running motor
in open-loop or closed-loop modes. In this situation, the setting of 11.07 Autophasing
mode has no effect.
Constant speeds
It is possible to predefine up to 7 constant speeds. Constant speeds can be activated,
for example, through digital inputs. Constant speeds override the speed reference.
Settings
Parameter group 26 Constant speeds (page 168).
Critical speeds
A Critical speeds function is available for applications where it is necessary to avoid
certain motor speeds or speed ranges because of, for example, mechanical
resonance problems.
Settings
Parameter group 25 Critical speed (page 167).
DC voltage control
Overvoltage control
Overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link is needed with two-quadrant line-side
converters when the motor operates within the generating quadrant. To prevent the
DC voltage from exceeding the overvoltage control limit, the overvoltage controller
automatically decreases the generating torque when the limit is reached.
Absolute encoder/resolver
Rotor
N
S

60 Program features
Undervoltage control
If the incoming supply voltage is cut off, the drive will continue to operate by utilizing
the kinetic energy of the rotating motor. The drive will be fully operational as long as
the motor rotates and generates energy to the drive. The drive can continue the
operation after the break if the main contactor remained closed.
Note: Units equipped with a main contactor must be equipped with a hold circuit (e.g.
UPS) to keep the contactor control circuit closed during a short supply break.
Voltage control and trip limits
The control and trip limits of the intermediate DC voltage regulator are relative either
to a supply voltage value provided by the user, or to an automatically-determined
supply voltage. The actual voltage used is shown by parameter 01.19 Used supply
volt. The DC voltage (UDC) equals 1.35 times this value.
Automatic identification of the supply voltage is performed every time the drive is
powered on. Automatic identification can be disabled by parameter 47.03
SupplyVoltAutoId; the user can then define the voltage manually at parameter 47.04
Supply voltage.
130
260
390
520
1.6 4.8 8 11.2 14.4
t (s)
UDC
fout
TM
UDC= intermediate circuit voltage of the drive, fout = output frequency of the drive,
TM = motor torque
Loss of supply voltage at nominal load (fout = 40 Hz). The intermediate circuit DC voltage drops to the
minimum limit. The controller keeps the voltage steady as long as the mains is switched off. The drive runs
the motor in generator mode. The motor speed falls but the drive is operational as long as the motor has
enough kinetic energy.
Umains
20
40
60
80
40
80
120
160
UDC
(V DC)
fout
(Hz)
TM
(Nm)

Program features 61
The intermediate DC circuit is charged over an internal resistor which is bypassed
when the correct level (80% of UDC) is reached and voltage is stabilized.
Settings
Parameter group 47 Voltage ctrl (page 212).
Brake chopper
The built-in brake chopper of the drive can be used to handle the energy generated
by a decelerating motor.
When the brake chopper is enabled and a resistor connected, the chopper will start
conducting when the DC link voltage of the drive reaches 780 V. The maximum
braking power is achieved at 840 V.
Settings
Parameter group 48 Brake chopper (page 212).
Drive-to-drive link
The drive-to-drive link is a daisy-chained RS-485 transmission line that allows basic
master/follower communication with one master drive and multiple followers.
The wiring of the drive-to-drive link is presented in the hardware manual of the drive.
Settings
Parameter group 57 D2D communication (page 218).
01.07 Dc-voltage
Undervoltage control level (0.7 × UDC)
Undervoltage trip level (0.65 × UDC)
Overvoltage control level
Overvoltage trip level (1.63 × UDC)
50 V min
UDC (1.35 × 01.19 Used supply volt)
70 V

62 Program features
Emergency stop
Note: The user is responsible for installing the emergency stop devices and all the
additional devices needed for the emergency stop to fulfil the required emergency
stop category classes. For more information, contact your local ABB representative.
The emergency stop signal is to be connected to the digital input which is selected as
the source for the emergency stop activation (par. 10.13 Em stop off3 or 10.15 Em
stop off1). Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus (02.22 FBA main
cw).
Note: When an emergency stop signal is detected, the emergency stop function
cannot be cancelled even though the signal is cancelled.
Encoder support
The program offers support for two encoders (or resolvers), encoder 1 and 2.
Multiturn encoders are supported only as encoder 1. Three optional interface
modules are available:
• TTL Encoder Interface FEN-01: two TTL inputs, TTL output (for encoder
emulation and echo) and two digital inputs for position latching
• Absolute Encoder Interface FEN-11: absolute encoder input, TTL input, TTL
output (for encoder emulation and echo) and two digital inputs for position latching
• Resolver Interface FEN-21: resolver input, TTL input, TTL output (for encoder
emulation echo) and two digital inputs for position latching.
• HTL Encoder Interface FEN-31: HTL encoder input, TTL output (for encoder
emulation and echo) and two digital inputs for position latching.
The interface module is connected to drive option Slot 1 or 2. Note: Two encoder
interface modules of the same type are not allowed.
Settings
Parameter groups 91 Absol enc conf (page 225), 92 Resolver conf (page 228) and 93
Pulse enc conf (page 228).
Energy optimizer
The energy optimizer optimizes the flux so that the total energy consumption and
motor noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the nominal load. The
total efficiency of the drive system can be improved by 1…10% depending on load
torque and speed.
The energy saving tools calculate the energy saved in kWh and in local currency, and
as reduction in CO2 emissions, all compared to the situation where the pump is
directly connected to the supply.

Program features 63
Note: The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is directly dependent on the
accuracy of the reference motor power given in parameter 45.08 Pump ref power.
Settings
Parameter group 45 Energy optimising (page 211).
Fieldbus control
See chapter Fieldbus control (page 277).
Jogging
Two jogging functions (1 or 2) are available. When a jogging function is activated, the
drive starts and accelerates to the defined jogging speed along the defined jogging
acceleration ramp. When the function is deactivated, the drive decelerates to a stop
along the defined jogging deceleration ramp. One push button can be used to start
and stop the drive during jogging. The jogging function is typically used during
servicing or commissioning to control the machinery locally.
Jogging functions 1 and 2 are activated by a parameter or through fieldbus. For
activation through fieldbus, see parameter 02.22 FBA main cw.
The figure and table below describe the operation of the drive during jogging. (Note
that they cannot be directly applied to jogging commands through fieldbus as those
require no enable signal; see parameter 10.09 Jog enable.) They also represent how
the drive shifts to normal operation (= jogging inactive) when the drive start command
is switched on. Jog cmd = State of the jogging input; Jog enable = Jogging enabled
by the source set by parameter 10.09 Jog enable; Start cmd = State of the drive start
command.
Phase
Jog
cmd
Jog
enable
Start
cmd
Description
1-2 1 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration
ramp of the jogging function.
Time
Speed
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Jogging example

64 Program features
Note: Jogging is not operational when the drive start command is on, or if
the drive is in local control.
Note: The ramp shape time is set to zero during jogging.
Load analyzer
Peak value logger
The user can select a signal to be monitored by the peak value logger. The logger
records the peak value of the signal along with the time the peak occurred, as well as
motor current, DC voltage and motor speed at the time of the peak.
Amplitude loggers
The drive has two amplitude loggers.
2-3 1 1 0 Drive runs at the jogging speed.
3-4 0 1 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp
of the jogging function.
4-5 0 1 0 Drive is stopped.
5-6 1 1 0 Drive accelerates to the jogging speed along the acceleration
ramp of the jogging function.
7-8 x 0 1 Jog enable is not active; normal operation continues.
8-9 x 0 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive follows the
speed reference.
9-10 x 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the active deceleration
ramp.
10-11 x 0 0 Drive is stopped.
11-12 x 0 1 Normal operation overrides the jogging. Drive accelerates to
the speed reference along the active acceleration ramp.
12-13 1 1 1 Start command overrides the jog enable signal.
13-14 1 1 0 Drive decelerates to the jogging speed along the
deceleration ramp of the jogging function.
15-16 x 0 0 Drive decelerates to zero speed along the deceleration ramp
of the jogging function.
Phase
Jog
cmd
Jog
enable
Start
cmd
Description

Program features 65
For amplitude logger 2, the user can select a signal to be sampled at 200 ms intervals
when the drive is running, and specify a value that corresponds to 100%. The
collected samples are sorted into 10 read-only parameters according to their
amplitude. Each parameter represents an amplitude range 10 percentage points
wide, and displays the percentage of the collected samples that fall within that range.
Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current, and cannot be reset. With
amplitude logger 1, 100% corresponds to the nominal output current of the drive (I2N).
Settings
Parameter group 64 Load analyzer (page 220).
Maintenance counters
The program has six different maintenance counters that can be configured to
generate an alarm when the counter reaches a pre-defined limit. The counter can be
set to monitor any parameter. This feature is especially useful as a service reminder.
There are three types of counters:
• Ontime counter. Measures the time a digital source (for example, a bit in a status
word) is on.
• Rising edge counter. This counter is incremented whenever the monitored digital
source changes state from 0 to 1.
• Value counter. This counter measures, by integration, the monitored parameter.
An alarm is given when the calculated area below the signal peak exceeds a
user-defined limit.
Percentageofsamples
0…10%
10…20%
20…30%
30…40%
40…50%
50…60%
60…70%
70…80%
80…90%
>90%
Amplitude ranges
(parameters 64.24…64.33)

66 Program features
Settings
Parameter group 44 Maintenance (page 205).
Mechanical brake control
A mechanical brake can be used for holding the motor and driven machinery at zero
speed when the drive is stopped, or not powered.
Parameters 03.15 Brake torq mem and 03.16 Brake command show the torque value
stored when the brake close command is issued and the value of the brake command
respectively.
Settings
Parameter group 42 Mech brake ctrl (page 201).
State (Symbol )
- NN: State name
- W/X/Y/Z: State outputs/operations
W: 1 = Brake open command is active. 0 = Brake close command is active. (Controlled
through selected digital/relay output with signal 03.16 Brake command.)
BSM = Brake State Machine
* Depending on setting of parameter
42.12 Brake fault func
0/0/1/1
0/1/1/1
1/1/1/1
1/1/0/0
0/1/1/0
5)
8)7)
13)
12)
11)
10)
9)
6)
1)
2)
3)
4)
From any state
BSM
STOPPED
BSM
START
OPEN
BRAKE
RELEASE
RAMP
CLOSE
BRAKE
Fault/Alarm*
BRAKE NOT CLOSED
Fault/Alarm*
BRAKE NOT OPEN
Fault/Alarm*
BRAKE NOT CLOSED
Fault/Alarm*
BRAKE START TORQUE
NN
W/X/Y/Z

Program features 67
State change conditions (Symbol )
X: 1 = Forced start (inverter is modulating). The function keeps the internal start command
on until the brake is closed in spite of the status of the external stop command. Effective
only when ramp stop has been selected as the stop mode (11.03 Stop mode). Run enable
and faults override the forced start. 0 = No forced start (normal operation).
Y: 1 = Drive control mode is forced to speed/scalar.
Z: 1 = Ramp generator output is forced to zero. 0 = Ramp generator output is enabled
(normal operation).
1) Brake control is active (42.01 Brake ctrl = With ack or No ack) OR modulation of the drive
is requested to stop. The drive control mode is forced to speed/scalar.
2) External start command is on AND brake open request is on (source selected by 42.10
Brake close req is 0) AND reopen delay (42.07 Reopen delay) has elapsed.
3) Starting torque required at brake release is reached (42.08 Brake open torq) AND brake
hold is not active (42.11 Brake hold open). Note: With scalar control, the defined starting
torque has no effect.
4) Brake is open (acknowledgement source selected by par. 42.02 Brake acknowl is 1)
AND the brake open delay has elapsed (42.03 Open delay). Start = 1.
5) 6) Start = 0 OR brake close command is active AND actual motor speed < brake close
speed (42.05 Close speed) AND close command delay (42.06 Close cmd delay) has
elapsed.
7) Brake is closed (acknowledgement = 0) AND brake close delay (42.04 Close delay) has
elapsed. Start = 0.
8) Start = 1 AND brake open request is on (source selected by 42.10 Brake close req is 0)
AND reopen delay has elapsed.
9) Brake is open (acknowledgement = 1) AND brake close delay has elapsed.
10) Defined starting torque at brake release is not reached.
11) Brake is closed (acknowledgement = 0) AND brake open delay has elapsed.
12) Brake is closed (acknowledgement = 0).
13) Brake is open (acknowledgement = 1) AND brake close delay has elapsed. Fault is
generated after brake close fault delay (42.13 Close flt delay) has elapsed.

68 Program features
Operation time scheme
The simplified time scheme below illustrates the operation of the brake control
function.
Example
The figure below shows a brake control application example.
WARNING! Make sure that the machinery into which the drive with brake
control function is integrated fulfils the personnel safety regulations. Note
that the frequency converter (a Complete Drive Module or a Basic Drive
Module, as defined in IEC 61800-2), is not considered as a safety device
mentioned in the European Machinery Directive and related harmonised
Ts Start torque at brake release (parameter 42.08 Brake open torq)
Tmem Stored torque value at brake close (signal 03.15 Brake torq mem)
tmd Motor magnetising delay
tod Brake open delay (parameter 42.03 Open delay)
ncs Brake close speed (parameter 42.05 Close speed)
tccd Brake close command delay (parameter 42.06 Close cmd delay)
tcd Brake close delay (parameter 42.04 Close delay)
Start cmd
Modulating
Ref_Running
Brake open
cmd
Ramp output
Torque ref
Ramp input
Timetcd
Tmem
ncs
Ts
todtmd
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
tccd

Program features 69
standards. Thus, the personnel safety of the complete machinery must not
be based on a specific frequency converter feature (such as the brake
control function), but it has to be implemented as defined in the application
specific regulations.
Motor
M
230 VAC
JCU unit
Mechanical brake
Brake control
hardware
Emergency
brake
X2
1 RO1
2 RO1
3 RO1
X3
11 DI5
13 +24 V
The brake on/off is controlled via signal 03.16 Brake command. The source for the brake
supervision is selected by parameter 42.02 Brake acknowl.
The brake control hardware and wirings need to be done by the user.
• Brake on/off control through selected relay/digital output.
• Brake supervision through selected digital input.
• Emergency brake switch in the brake control circuit.
• Brake on/off control through relay output (i.e. parameter 14.42 RO1 src setting is
P.03.16.00 = 03.16 Brake command).
• Brake supervision through digital input DI5 (i.e. parameter 42.02 Brake acknowl setting is
P.02.01.04 = 02.01 DI status, bit 4)

70 Program features
Process PID control
There is a built-in PID controller in the drive. The controller can be used to control
process variables such as pressure, flow or fluid level.
In process PID control, a process reference (setpoint) is connected to the drive
instead of a speed reference. An actual value (process feedback) is also brought
back to the drive. The process PID control adjusts the drive speed in order to keep
the measured process quantity (actual value) at the desired level (setpoint).
The simplified block diagram below illustrates the process PID control.
For a more detailed block diagram, see page 292.
Sleep function for process PID control
The following example visualizes the operation of the sleep function.
The drive controls a pressure boost pump. The water consumption falls at night. As a
consequence, the process PID controller decreases the motor speed. However, due
to natural losses in the pipes and the low efficiency of the centrifugal pump at low
speeds, the motor would never stop rotating. The sleep function detects the slow
rotation and stops the unnecessary pumping after the sleep delay has passed. The
drive shifts into sleep mode, still monitoring the pressure. The pumping resumes
when the pressure falls under the predefined minimum level and the wake-up delay
has passed.
Process
PID
AI1
Process
actual
values
AI2
• • •
D2D
FBA
Setpoint

Program features 71
Settings
Parameter group 27 Process PID (page 170).
The PID control macro can be activated from the control panel main menu by
selecting ASSISTANTS – Firmware assistants – Application Macro – PID control. See
also page 86.
Programmable analog inputs
The drive has two programmable analog inputs. Each of the inputs can be
independently set as a voltage (0/2…10 V or -10…10 V) or current (0/4…20 mA)
input by a jumper on the JCU Control Unit. Each input can be filtered, inverted and
scaled. The number of analog inputs can be increased by using FIO-xx I/O
extensions.
t<td td
SLEEP MODE
twd
twd
Motor Speed
td = Sleep delay (27.24)
twd = Wake-up delay (27.26)
Sleep level
(27.23)
STOP START
Actual value
Actual value
Wake-up level
(27.25)
Time
Time
Time
Wake-up level
(27.25)
Non-inverted (source of 27.16 = 0)
Inverted (source of 27.16 = 1)

72 Program features
Settings
Parameter group 13 Analogue inputs (page 119).
Programmable analog outputs
The drive has two current analog outputs. Each output can be filtered, inverted and
scaled. The number of analog outputs can be increased by using FIO-xx I/O
extensions.
Settings
Parameter group 15 Analogue outputs (page 139).
Programmable digital inputs and outputs
The drive has six digital inputs, a digital start interlock input, and two digital input/
outputs.
One digital input (DI6) doubles as a PTC thermistor input. See section Thermal motor
protection on page 76.
One of the digital input/outputs can be used as a frequency input, one as a frequency
output.
The number of digital inputs/outputs can be increased by using FIO-xx I/O
extensions.
Settings
Parameter group 14 Digital I/O (page 126).
Programmable relay outputs
The drive has three relay outputs. The signal to be indicated by the outputs can be
selected by parameters.
Relay outputs can be added by using FIO-xx I/O extensions.
Settings
Parameter group 14 Digital I/O (page 126).
Programmable protection functions
Start interlock (parameter 10.20)
The parameter selects how the drive reacts to loss of start interlock signal (DIIL).

Program features 73
External fault (parameter 30.01)
A source for an external fault signal is selected by this parameter. When the signal is
lost, a fault is generated.
Local control loss detection (parameter 30.03)
The parameter selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool
communication break.
Motor phase loss detection (parameter 30.04)
The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a motor phase loss is detected.
Earth fault detection (parameter 30.05)
The earth fault detection function is based on sum current measurement. Note that
• an earth fault in the supply cable does not activate the protection
• in a grounded supply, the protection activates in 200 milliseconds
• in an ungrounded supply, the supply capacitance should be 1 microfarad or more
• the capacitive currents caused by shielded motor cables up to 300 metres will not
activate the protection
• the protection is deactivated when the drive is stopped.
Supply phase loss detection (parameter 30.06)
The parameter selects how the drive reacts whenever a supply phase loss is
detected.
Safe Torque Off detection (parameter 30.07)
The drive monitors the status of the Safe Torque Off input. For more information on
the Safe Torque Off function, see the Hardware Manual of the drive.
Switched supply and motor cabling (parameter 30.08)
The drive can detect if the supply and motor cables have accidentally been switched
(for example, if the supply is connected to the motor connection of the drive). The
parameter selects if a fault is generated or not.
Stall protection (parameters 30.09…30.12)
The drive protects the motor in a stall situation. It is possible to adjust the supervision
limits (torque, frequency and time) and choose how the drive reacts to a motor stall
condition.

74 Program features
Scalar motor control
It is possible to select scalar control as the motor control method instead of Direct
Torque Control (DTC). In scalar control mode, the drive is controlled with a frequency
reference. However, the outstanding performance of DTC is not achieved in scalar
control.
It is recommended to activate the scalar motor control mode in the following
situations:
• In multimotor drives: 1) if the load is not equally shared between the motors, 2) if
the motors are of different sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after
motor identification (ID run)
• If the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the nominal output current of
the drive
• If the drive is used without a motor connected (for example, for test purposes)
• If the drive runs a medium-voltage motor through a step-up transformer.
In scalar control, some standard features are not available.
IR compensation for a scalar controlled drive
IR compensation is active only when
the motor control mode is scalar. When
IR compensation is activated, the drive
gives an extra voltage boost to the
motor at low speeds. IR compensation
is useful in applications that require a
high break-away torque.
In Direct Torque Control (DTC), no IR
compensation is possible or needed.
Signal supervision
Three signals can be selected to be supervised by this function. Whenever the signal
exceeds (or falls below) a predefined limit, a bit of 06.13 Superv status is activated.
Absolute values can be used.
Settings
Parameter group 33 Supervision (page 183).
Speed controller tuning
The speed controller of the drive can be automatically adjusted using the autotune
function (parameter 23.20 PI tune mode). Autotuning is based on the load and inertia
of the motor and the machine. It is, however, also possible to manually adjust the
controller gain, integration time and derivation time.
f (Hz)
Motor Voltage
No compensation
IR Compensation

Program features 75
The figure below shows speed responses at a speed reference step (typically
1…20%).
The figure below is a simplified block diagram of the speed controller. The controller
output is the reference for the torque controller.
Settings
Parameter group 23 Speed ctrl (page 158).
A: Undercompensated
B: Normally tuned (autotuning)
C: Normally tuned (manually). Better dynamic performance than with B
D: Overcompensated speed controller
%
t
n
CB D
nN
A
Derivative
Proportional,
integral
Derivative
acceleration
compensation
Torque
reference
Speed
reference
Actual speed
Error
value-
+
+
+
+

76 Program features
Thermal motor protection
The motor can be protected against overheating by
• the motor thermal protection model
• measuring the motor temperature with temperature sensors. This will result in a
more accurate motor model.
Thermal motor protection model
The drive calculates the temperature of the motor on the basis of the following
assumptions:
1) When power is applied to the drive for the first time, the motor is at ambient
temperature (defined by parameter 31.09 Mot ambient temp). After this, when power
is applied to the drive, the motor is assumed to be at the estimated temperature.
2) Motor temperature is calculated using the user-adjustable motor thermal time and
motor load curve. The load curve should be adjusted in case the ambient
temperature exceeds 30 °C.
It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the
drive reacts when overtemperature is detected.
Note: The motor thermal model can be used when only one motor is connected to
the inverter.
Temperature measurement
It is possible to detect motor overtemperature by connecting a motor temperature
sensor between +24 V and digital input DI6 of the drive, or to optional encoder
interface module FEN-xx.
Constant current is fed through the sensor. The resistance of the sensor increases as
the motor temperature rises over the sensor reference temperature Tref, as does the
voltage over the resistor. The temperature measurement function reads the voltage
and converts it into ohms.

Program features 77
The figure below shows typical PTC sensor resistance values as a function of the
motor operating temperature.
It is possible to adjust the motor temperature supervision limits and select how the
drive reacts when overtemperature is detected.
For the wiring of the temperature sensor, refer to the Hardware Manual of the drive.
For encoder interface module FEN-xx connection, see the User’s Manual of the
encoder interface module.
Settings
Parameter group 31 Mot therm prot (page 177).
Timers
It is possible to define four different daily or weekly time periods. The time periods can
be used to control four different timers. The on/off statuses of the four timers are
indicated by bits 0…3 of parameter 06.14 Timed func stat, from where the signal can
be connected to any parameter with a bit pointer setting (see page 93). In addition, bit
4 of parameter 06.14 is on if any one of the four timers is on.
Each time period can be assigned to multiple timers; likewise, a timer can be
controlled by multiple time periods.
100
550
1330
4000
Ohm
T
Temperature PTC resistance
Normal 0…1.5 kohm
Excessive > 4 kohm

78 Program features
The figure below presents how different time periods are active in daily and weekly
modes.
A “boost” function is also available for the activation of the timers: a signal source can
be selected to extend the activation time for a parameter-adjustable time period.
Settings
Parameter group 36 Timed functions (page 194).
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Time period 1: Start time 00:00:00; Stop time 00:00:00 or 24:00:00; Start on Tuesday; Stop
day Sunday
Time period 2: Start time 03:00:00; Stop time 23:00:00; Start day Wednesday; Stop day
Wednesday
Time period 3: Start time 21:00:00; Stop time 03:00:00; Start day Tuesday; Stop day Saturday
Time period 4: Start time 12:00:00; Stop time 00:00:00 or 24:00:00; Start day Thursday; Stop
day Tuesday
Thursday
Time period 1
(weekly)
Time period 4
(daily)
Time period 4
(weekly)
Time period 1
(daily)
Time period 2
(weekly)
Time period 2
(daily)
Time period 3
(weekly)
Time period 3
(daily)
Timer active
Timer enable signal
Boost signal
Boost time

Program features 79
User-definable load curve
The drive output can be limited by defining a user-definable load curve. In practice,
the user load curve consists of an overload and an underload curve, even though
neither is compulsory. Each curve is formed by five points that represent output
current or torque as a function of frequency.
An alarm or fault can be set up to occur when the curve is exceeded. The upper
boundary (overload curve) can also be used as a torque or current limiter.
Settings
Parameter group 34 User load curve (page 186).
User-definable U/f curve
The user can define a custom U/f curve (output voltage as a function of frequency).
The curve can be used in special applications where linear and quadratic U/f ratios
are not adequate (e.g. when motor break-away torque needs to be boosted).
Note: Each user-defined point must have a higher frequency and higher voltage than
the previous point.
WARNING! High voltage at low frequencies may result in poor performance
or motor damage due to overheating.
Settings
Parameter group 38 Flux ref (page 199).

Application macros 81
5
Application macros
This chapter describes the intended use, operation and default control connections of
the application macros.
More information on the connectivity of the JCU control unit is given in the Hardware
Manual of the drive.
General
Application macros are pre-defined parameter sets. When starting up the drive, the
user typically selects one of the macros as a basis, makes the essential changes and
saves the result as a user parameter set.
Application macros are activated through the control panel main menu by selecting
ASSISTANTS – Firmware assistants – Application Macro. User parameter sets are
managed by the parameters in group 16 System (page 145).

82 Application macros
Factory macro
The Factory macro is suited to relatively straightforward speed control applications
such as conveyors, pumps and fans, and test benches.
In external control, the control location is EXT1. The drive is speed-controlled; the
reference signal is connected to analog input AI1. The sign of the reference
determines the running direction. The start/stop commands are given through digital
input DI1. Faults are reset through DI3.
The default parameter settings for the Factory macro are listed in chapter Additional
parameter data (page 237).

Default control connections for the Factory macro
External power input
24 V DC, 1.6 A
XPOW
+24VI 1
GND 2
Relay output RO1 [Ready]
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO1
NO 1
COM 2
NC 3
Relay output RO2 [Modulating]
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO2
NO 4
COM 5
NC 6
Relay output RO3 [Fault (-1)]
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO3
NO 7
COM 8
NC 9
+24 V DC*
XD24
+24VD 1
Digital input ground DIGND 2
+24 V DC* +24VD 3
Digital input/output ground DIOGND 4
DI/DIO grounding selection jumpers
Digital input DI1 [Stop/Start]
XDI
DI1 1
Digital input DI2 DI2 2
Digital input DI3 [Reset] DI3 3
Digital input DI6 or thermistor input DI6 6
Start interlock (0 = Stop) DIIL A
Digital input/output DIO1 [Output: Ready]
XDIO
DIO1 1
Digital input/output DIO2 [Output: Running] DIO2 2
Reference voltage (+)
XAI
+VREF 1
Reference voltage (–) -VREF 2
Ground AGND 3
Analog input AI1 [Speed reference 1]
(Current or voltage, selectable by jumper AI1)
AI1+ 4
AI1- 5
Analog input AI2 (Current or voltage, selectable by jumper AI2)
AI2+ 6
AI2- 7
AI1 current/voltage selection jumper AI1
Analog output AO1 [Current %]
XAO
AO1+ 1
AO1- 2
Analog output AO2 [Speed %]
AO2+ 3
AO2- 4
Drive-to-drive link termination jumper T
Drive-to-drive link.
XD2D
B 1
A 2
BGND 3
Safe Torque Off. Both circuits must be closed for the drive to start.
XSTO
OUT1 1
OUT2 2
IN1 3
IN2 4
Control panel connection
Memory unit connection

Hand/Auto macro
The Hand/Auto macro is suited for speed control applications where two external
control devices are used.
The drive is speed-controlled from the external control locations EXT1 and EXT2.
The selection between the control locations is done through digital input DI3.
The start/stop signal for EXT1 is connected to DI1 while running direction is
determined by DI2. For EXT2, start/stop commands are given through DI6, the
direction through DI5.
The reference signals for EXT1 and EXT2 are connected to analog inputs AI1 and
AI2 respectively.
A constant speed (300 rpm) can be activated through DI4.
Default parameter settings for Hand/Auto macro
Below is a listing of default parameter values that differ from those listed in chapter
Additional parameter data (page 237).
Parameter Hand/Auto macro
defaultNo. Name
10.01 Ext1 start func In1St In2Dir
10.03 Ext1 start in2 DI2
10.10 Fault reset sel C.FALSE
12.01 Ext1/Ext2 sel DI3
13.05 AI1 min scale 0.000
13.09 AI2 max scale 1500.000
21.02 Speed ref2 sel AI2 scaled
21.04 Speed ref1/2 sel DI3
26.02 Const speed sel1 DI4
26.06 Const speed1 300 rpm

Default control connections for the Hand/Auto macro
24 V DC, 1.6 A
XPOW
+24VI 1
GND 2
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO1
NO 1
COM 2
NC 3
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO2
NO 4
COM 5
NC 6
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO3
NO 7
COM 8
NC 9
+24 V DC*
XD24
+24VD 1
+24 V DC* +24VD 3
Digital input DI1 [EXT1 Stop/Start]
XDI
DI1 1
Digital input DI2 [EXT1 Direction] DI2 2
Digital input DI3 [EXT1/EXT2 selection] DI3 3
Digital input DI4 [Constant speed 1] DI4 4
Digital input DI5 [EXT2 Direction] DI5 5
Digital input DI6 or thermistor input [EXT2 Stop/Start] DI6 6
XDIO
DIO1 1
XAI
+VREF 1
Ground AGND 3
Analog input AI1 [EXT1 Reference (Speed ref1)]
AI1+ 4
AI1- 5
Analog input AI2 [EXT2 Reference (Speed ref2]
AI2+ 6
AI2- 7
XAO
AO1+ 1
AO1- 2
AO2+ 3
AO2- 4
XD2D
B 1
A 2
BGND 3
XSTO
OUT1 1
OUT2 2
IN1 3
IN2 4

PID control macro
The PID control macro is suitable for process control applications, for example
closed-loop pressure, level or flow control systems such as
• pressure boost pumps of municipal water supply systems
• level-controlling pumps of water reservoirs
• pressure boost pumps of district heating systems
• material flow control on a conveyor line.
The process reference signal is connected to analog input AI1 and the process
feedback signal to AI2. Alternatively, a direct speed reference can be given to the
drive through AI1. Then the PID controller is bypassed and the drive no longer
controls the process variable.
Selection between direct speed control (control location EXT1) and process variable
control (EXT2) is done through digital input DI3.
The stop/start signals for EXT1 and EXT2 are connected to DI1 and DI6 respectively.
Default parameter settings for PID control macro
Parameter PID control macro
defaultNo. Name
10.04 Ext2 start func In1
13.09 AI2 max scale 1500.000
21.02 Speed ref2 sel PID out
21.04 Speed ref1/2 sel DI3

Default control connections for the PID control macro
24 V DC, 1.6 A
XPOW
+24VI 1
GND 2
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO1
NO 1
COM 2
NC 3
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO2
NO 4
COM 5
NC 6
Relay output RO3 [Fault (-)]
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO3
NO 7
COM 8
NC 9
+24 V DC*
XD24
+24VD 1
+24 V DC* +24VD 3
Digital input DI1 [EXT1 Stop/Start]
XDI
DI1 1
Digital input DI3 [Speed or Process control] DI3 3
Digital input DI6 or thermistor input [EXT2 Stop/Start] DI6 6
XDIO
DIO1 1
XAI
+VREF 1
Ground AGND 3
Analog input AI1 [Process or Speed reference]
AI1+ 4
AI1- 5
Analog input AI2 [Process feedback]
AI2+ 6
AI2- 7
XAO
AO1+ 1
AO1- 2
AO2+ 3
AO2- 4
XD2D
B 1
A 2
BGND 3
XSTO
OUT1 1
OUT2 2
IN1 3
IN2 4
PT

Torque control macro
This macro is used in applications in which torque control of the motor is required.
Torque reference is given through analog input AI2, typically as a current signal in the
range of 0…20 mA (corresponding to 0…100% of rated motor torque).
The start/stop signal is connected to digital input DI1, direction signal to DI2. Through
DI3, it is possible to select speed control instead of torque control.
Default parameter settings for Torque control macro
Parameter Torque control
macro defaultNo. Name
12.05 Ext2 ctrl mode Torque
22.01 Acc/Dec sel DI5

Default control connections for the Torque control macro
24 V DC, 1.6 A
XPOW
+24VI 1
GND 2
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO1
NO 1
COM 2
NC 3
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO2
NO 4
COM 5
NC 6
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO3
NO 7
COM 8
NC 9
+24 V DC*
XD24
+24VD 1
+24 V DC* +24VD 3
Digital input DI1 [Stop/Start]
XDI
DI1 1
Digital input DI2 [Direction] DI2 2
Digital input DI3 [Speed/Torque control selection] DI3 3
Digital input DI5 [Acc/Dec ramp 1/2 selection] DI5 5
Digital input DI6 or thermistor input DI6 6
XDIO
DIO1 1
XAI
+VREF 1
Ground AGND 3
AI1+ 4
AI1- 5
Analog input AI2 [EXT2 Reference (Torq ref1]
AI2+ 6
AI2- 7
XAO
AO1+ 1
AO1- 2
AO2+ 3
AO2- 4
XD2D
B 1
A 2
BGND 3
XSTO
OUT1 1
OUT2 2
IN1 3
IN2 4

Sequential control macro
The Sequential control macro is suited for speed control applications in which speed
reference, multiple constant speeds, and two acceleration and deceleration ramps
can be used.
The macro offers seven preset constant speeds which can be activated by digital
inputs DI4…DI6 (see parameter 26.01 Const speed func). Two acceleration/
deceleration ramps are selectable through DI3.
An external speed reference can be given through analog input AI1. The reference is
active only when no constant speed is activated (all of the digital inputs DI4…DI6 are
off). Operational commands can also be given from the control panel.
Operation diagram
The figure below shows an example of the use of the macro.
Stop along
deceleration ramp
Speed
Time
Accel1 Accel1 Accel2 Decel2
Start/Stop
Accel1/Decel1
Speed 1
Speed 2
Accel2/Decel2
Speed 3
Speed 1
Speed 2
Speed 3

Default parameter settings for Sequential control macro
Parameter Sequential control
macro defaultNo. Name
11.03 Stop mode Ramp
22.01 Acc/Dec sel DI3
26.01 Const speed func 0b01

Default control connections for the Sequential control macro
24 V DC, 1.6 A
XPOW
+24VI 1
GND 2
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO1
NO 1
COM 2
NC 3
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO2
NO 4
COM 5
NC 6
250 V AC / 30 V DC
2 A
XRO3
NO 7
COM 8
NC 9
+24 V DC*
XD24
+24VD 1
+24 V DC* +24VD 3
Digital input DI1 [Stop/Start] XDI DI1 1
Digital input DI2 [Direction] DI2 2
Digital input DI3 [Acc/Dec ramp 1/2 selection] DI3 3
Digital input DI4 [Constant speed sel1] DI4 4
Digital input DI5 [Constant speed sel2] DI5 5
Digital input DI6 or thermistor input [Constant speed sel3] DI6 6
XDIO
DIO1 1
XAI
+VREF 1
Ground AGND 3
AI1+ 4
AI1- 5
Analog input AI2 (Current or voltage, selectable by jumper AI2)
AI2+ 6
AI2- 7
XAO
AO1+ 1
AO1- 2
AO2+ 3
AO2- 4
XD2D
B 1
A 2
BGND 3
XSTO
OUT1 1
OUT2 2
IN1 3
IN2 4

Parameters 93
6
Parameters
The chapter describes the parameters, including actual signals, of the control
program.
Note: By default, a selective list of parameters is shown by the drive panel or
DriveStudio. All parameters can be displayed by setting parameter 16.15 Menu set
sel to Load long.
Terms and abbreviations
Term Definition
Actual signal Type of parameter that is the result of a measurement or calculation by
the drive. Actual signals can be monitored, but not adjusted, by the user.
Parameter groups 1…9 typically contain actual signals.
Bit pointer setting A parameter setting that points to the value of a bit in another parameter
(usually an actual signal), or that can be fixed to 0 (FALSE) or 1 (TRUE).
When adjusting a bit pointer setting on the optional control panel, “Const”
is selected in order to fix the value to 0 (displayed as “C.False”) or 1
(“C.True”). “Pointer” is selected to define a source from another
parameter.
A pointer value is given in the format P.xx.yy.zz, where xx = parameter
group, yy = parameter index, zz = bit number.
Pointing to a nonexisting bit will be interpreted as 0 (FALSE).
In addition to the “Const” and “Pointer” selections, bit pointer settings may
also have other pre-selected settings.
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent. The scaling between the value shown on the panel
and the integer used in serial communication.
p.u. Per unit
Value pointer setting A parameter value that points to the value of another actual signal or
parameter.
A pointer value is given in the format P.xx.yy, where xx = parameter
group, yy = parameter index.

94 Parameters
Parameter listing
No. Name/Value Description FbEq
01
01 Actual values Basic signals for monitoring of the drive.
01.01 Motor speed rpm Filtered actual speed in rpm. The used speed feedback is
defined by parameter 19.02 Speed fb sel. The filter time
constant can be adjusted using parameter 19.03 MotorSpeed
filt.
100 = 1 rpm
01.02 Motor speed % Actual speed in percent of the motor synchronous speed. 100 = 1%
01.03 Output frequency Estimated drive output frequency in Hz. 100 = 1 Hz
01.04 Motor current Measured motor current in A. 100 = 1 A
01.05 Motor current % Motor current in percent of the nominal motor current. 10 = 1%
01.06 Motor torque Motor torque in percent of the nominal motor torque. See also
parameter 01.29 Torq nom scale.
10 = 1%
01.07 Dc-voltage Measured intermediate circuit voltage. 100 = 1 V
01.08 Encoder1 speed Encoder 1 speed in rpm. 100 = 1 rpm
01.09 Encoder1 pos Actual position of encoder 1 within one revolution. 100000000 =
1 rev
01.10 Encoder2 speed Encoder 2 speed in rpm. 100 = 1 rpm
01.11 Encoder2 pos Actual position of encoder 2 within one revolution. 100000000 =
1 rev
01.12 Pos act Actual position of encoder 1 in revolutions. 1000 = 1 rev
01.13 Pos 2nd enc Scaled actual position of encoder 2 in revolutions. 1000 = 1 rev
01.14 Motor speed est Estimated motor speed in rpm. 100 = 1 rpm
01.15 Temp inverter Estimated temperature of drive heatsink in percent of fault
limit.
10 = 1%
01.16 Temp brk chopper Brake chopper IGBT temperature in percent of fault limit. 10 = 1%
01.17 Motor temp1 Measured temperature of motor 1 in degrees Celsius. 10 = 1 °C
01.18 Motor temp2 Measured temperature of motor 2 in degrees Celsius. 10 = 1 °C
01.19 Used supply volt Either the nominal supply voltage defined by parameter 47.04
Supply voltage, or, if auto-identification is enabled by
parameter 47.03 SupplyVoltAutoId, the automatically
determined supply voltage.
10 = 1 V
01.20 Brake res load Estimated temperature of the braking resistor. The value is
given in percent of the temperature the resistor reaches when
loaded with the power defined by parameter 48.04 Br power
max cnt.
1 = 1%
01.21 Cpu usage Microprocessor load in percent. 1 = 1%
01.22 Power inu out Drive output power in kW or hp, depending on setting of
parameter 16.17 Power unit.
100 = 1 kW
or hp
01.23 Motor power Measured motor power in kW or hp, depending on setting of
parameter 16.17 Power unit.
100 = 1 kW
or hp
01.24 kWh inverter Amount of energy that has passed through the drive (in either
direction) in kilowatt-hours.
1 = 1 kWh
01.25 kWh supply Amount of energy that the drive has taken from the AC supply
in kilowatt-hours.
1 = 1 kWh
01.26 On-time counter On-time counter. The counter runs when the drive is
powered. Can be reset using the DriveStudio PC tool.
1 = 1 h

Parameters 95
01.27 Run-time counter Motor run-time counter. The counter runs when the inverter
modulates. Can be reset using the DriveStudio PC tool.
1 = 1 h
01.28 Fan on-time Running time of the drive cooling fan. Can be reset by
entering 0.
1 = 1 h
01.29 Torq nom scale Nominal torque which corresponds to 100%.
Note: This value is copied from parameter 99.12 Mot nom
torque if entered. Otherwise the value is calculated.
1000 =
1 N•m
01.30 Polepairs Calculated number of pole pairs in the motor. 1 = 1
01.31 Mech time const Mechanical time constant of the drive and the machinery as
determined by the speed controller autotune function.
See parameter 23.20 PI tune mode on page 165.
1000 = 1 s
01.32 Temp phase A Measured temperature of phase U power stage in percent of
fault limit.
10 = 1%
01.33 Temp phase B Measured temperature of phase V power stage in percent of
fault limit.
10 = 1%
01.34 Temp phase C Measured temperature of phase W power stage in percent
below fault limit.
10 = 1%
01.35 Saved energy Energy saved in kWh compared to direct-on-line motor
connection.
See parameter group 45 Energy optimising on page 211.
1 = 1 kWh
01.36 Saved amount Monetary savings compared to direct-on-line motor
connection. This value is a multiplication of parameters 01.35
Saved energy and 45.02 Energy tariff1.
1 = 1
01.37 Saved CO2 Reduction in CO2 emissions in metric tons compared to
direct-on-line motor connection. This value is calculated by
multiplying saved energy in megawatt-hours by 0.5 metric
tons/MWh.
1 = 1 metric
ton
02
02 I/O values Input and output signals.
02.01 DI status Status of digital inputs DI8…DI1. The 7th digit reflects the
start interlock input (DIIL). Example: 01000001 = DI1 and
DIIL are on, DI2…DI6 and DI8 are off.
-
02.02 RO status Status of relay outputs RO7…RO1. Example: 0000001 =
RO1 is energized, RO2…RO7 are de-energized.
-
02.03 DIO status Status of digital input/outputs DIO10…DIO1. Example:
0000001001 = DIO1 and DIO4 are on, remainder are off.
-
02.04 AI1 Value of analogue input AI1 in V or mA. Input type is selected
with jumper J1 on the JCU Control Unit.
1000 = 1 unit
02.05 AI1 scaled Scaled value of analogue input AI1. See parameters 13.04
AI1 max scale and 13.05 AI1 min scale.
1000 = 1 unit
02.06 AI2 Value of analogue input AI2 in V or mA. Input type is selected
with jumper J2 on the JCU Control Unit.
1000 = 1 unit
1000 = 1 unit
02.08 AI3 Value of analogue input AI3 in V or mA. For input type
information, see the extension module manual.
1000 = 1 unit
1000 = 1 unit

96 Parameters
1000 = 1 unit
1000 = 1 unit
1000 = 1 unit
1000 = 1 unit
1000 = 1 unit
1000 = 1 unit
02.16 AO1 Value of analogue output AO1 in mA. 1000 = 1 mA
02.20 Freq in Frequency input value of DIO2 when it is used as a frequency
input (parameter 14.06 is set to Freq input).
1000 = 1 Hz
02.21 Freq out Frequency output value of DIO3 when it is used as a
frequency output (parameter 14.10 is set to Freq output).
1000 = 1 Hz

Parameters 97
02.22 FBA main cw Control Word for fieldbus communication. See also chapter
Fieldbus control, page 277.
Log. = Logical combination (i.e. Bit AND/OR Selection
parameter); Par. = Selection parameter.
-
Bit Name Value Information Log. Par.
0* Stop 1 Stop according to the stop mode selected by par.
11.03 Stop mode or according to the requested stop
mode (bits 2…6). Note: Simultaneous stop and start
commands result in a stop command.
OR
10.01,
10.04
0 No action.
1 Start 1 Start. Note: Simultaneous stop and start commands
result in a stop command. OR
10.01,
10.04
0 No action.
2* StpMode
em off
1 Emergency OFF2 (bit 0 must be 1). Drive is stopped
by cutting off motor power supply (the motor coasts to
stop). The drive will restart only with the next rising
edge of the start signal when the run enable signal is
on.
AND –
0 No action.
3* StpMode
em stop
1 Emergency stop OFF3 (bit 0 must be 1). Stop within
time defined by 22.12 Em stop time. AND 10.13
0 No action.
4* StpMode
off1
1 Emergency stop OFF1 (bit 0 must be 1). Stop along
the currently active deceleration ramp. AND 10.15
0 No action.
5* StpMode
ramp
1 Stop along the currently active deceleration ramp.
– 11.03
0 No action.
6* StpMode
coast
1 Coast to stop.
– 11.03
0 No action.
7 Run enable 1 Activate run enable.
AND 10.11
0 Activate run disable.
8 Reset 0 -> 1 Fault reset if an active fault exists.
OR 10.10
other No action.
(continued)
* If all stop mode bits (2…6) are 0, stop mode is selected by parameter 11.03 Stop mode. Coast
stop (bit 6) overrides the emergency stop (bits 2/3/4). Emergency stop overrides normal ramp stop
(bit 5).

98 Parameters
Bit Name Value Information Log. Par.
(continued)
9 Jogging 1 1 Activate Jogging 1. See section Jogging on page 63.
OR 10.07
0 Jogging 1 disabled.
10 Jogging 2 1 Activate Jogging 2. See section Jogging on page 63.
OR 10.08
0 Jogging 2 disabled.
11 Remote
cmd
1 Fieldbus control enabled.
– –
0 Fieldbus control disabled.
12 Ramp out 0 1 Force output of Ramp Function Generator to zero. The
drive ramps to a stop (current and DC voltage limits
are in force). – –
0 No action.
13 Ramp hold 1 Halt ramping (Ramp Function Generator output held).
– –
0 No action.
14 Ramp in 0 1 Force input of Ramp Function Generator to zero.
– –
0 No action.
15 Ext1 / Ext2 1 Switch to external control location EXT2.
OR 12.01
0 Switch to external control location EXT1.
16 Req startinh 1 Activate start inhibit.
– –
0 No start inhibit.
17 Local ctl 1 Request local control for Control Word. Used when the
drive is controlled from a PC tool or panel or local
fieldbus.
• Local fieldbus: Transfer to fieldbus local control
(control through fieldbus Control Word or
reference). Fieldbus steals the control.
• Panel or PC tool: Transfer to local control.
– –
0 Request external control.
18 FbLocal ref 1 Request fieldbus local control.
– –
0 No fieldbus local control.
19…27 Reserved
28 CW B28 Freely programmable control bits. See parameters
50.08…50.11 and the user manual of the fieldbus adapter.
– –
29 CW B29
30 CW B30
31 CW B31

Parameters 99
02.24 FBA main sw Status Word for fieldbus communication. See also chapter
Fieldbus control, page 277.
-
Bit Name Value Information
0 Ready 1 Drive is ready to receive start command.
0 Drive is not ready.
1 Enabled 1 External run enable signal is received.
0 No external run enable signal is received.
2 Running 1 Drive is modulating.
0 Drive is not modulating.
3 Ref running 1 Normal operation is enabled. Drive is running and following given
reference.
0 Normal operation is disabled. Drive is not following given reference
(for example, it is modulating during magnetization).
4 Em off
(OFF2)
1 Emergency OFF2 is active.
0 Emergency OFF2 is inactive.
5 Em stop
(OFF3)
1 Emergency stop OFF3 (ramp stop) is active.
0 Emergency stop OFF3 is inactive.
6 Ack startinh 1 Start inhibit is active.
0 Start inhibit is inactive.
7 Alarm 1 An alarm is active. See chapter Fault tracing.
0 No alarm is active.
8 At setpoint 1 Drive is at setpoint. Actual value equals reference value (i.e. the
difference between the actual speed and speed reference is within
the speed window defined by parameter 19.10 Speed window).
0 Drive has not reached setpoint.
(continued)

100 Parameters
02.26 FBA main ref1 Scaled fieldbus reference 1. See parameter 50.04 Fba ref1
modesel.
1 = 1
02.27 FBA main ref2 Scaled fieldbus reference 2. See parameter 50.05 Fba ref2
modesel.
1 = 1
02.30 D2D main cw Drive-to-drive control word received from the master. See
also actual signal 02.31 D2D follower cw.
-
Bit Name Value Information
(continued)
9 Limit 1 Operation is limited by any of the torque limits.
0 Operation is within the torque limits.
10 Above limit 1 Actual speed exceeds limit defined by parameter 19.08 Above speed
lim.
0 Actual speed is within the defined limits.
11 Ext2 act 1 External control location EXT2 is active.
0 External control location EXT1 is active.
12 Local fb 1 Fieldbus local control is active.
0 Fieldbus local control is inactive.
13 Zero speed 1 Drive speed is below limit defined by parameter 19.06 Zero speed
limit.
0 Drive has not reached zero speed limit.
14 Rev act 1 Drive is running in reverse direction.
0 Drive is running in forward direction.
15 Reserved
16 Fault 1 A fault is active. See chapter Fault tracing.
0 No fault is active.
17 Local panel 1 Local control is active, i.e. the drive is controlled from PC tool or
control panel.
0 Local control is inactive.
18…26 Reserved
27 Request ctl 1 Control Word is requested from fieldbus.
0 Control Word is not requested from fieldbus.
28 SW B28 Programmable control bits (unless fixed by the used profile). See parameters
50.08…50.11 and the user manual of the fieldbus adapter.29 SW B29
30 SW B30
31 SW B31
Bit Information
0 Stop.
1 Start.
2 … 6 Reserved.
7 Run enable. By default, not connected in a follower drive.
8 Reset. By default, not connected in a follower drive.
9 … 14 Freely assignable through bit pointer settings.
15 EXT1/EXT2 selection. 0 = EXT1 active, 1 = EXT2 active. By default, not connected in a
follower drive.

Parameters 101
02.31 D2D follower cw Drive-to-drive control word sent to the followers by default.
See also parameter group 57 D2D communication.
-
02.32 D2D ref1 Drive-to-drive reference 1 received from the master. 1 = 1
02.33 D2D ref2 Drive-to-drive reference 2 received from the master. 1 = 1
02.34 Panel ref Reference given from the control panel. 100 = 1 rpm
02.35 FEN DI status Status of the digital inputs of FEN-xx encoder interfaces in
drive option slots 1 and 2. Examples:
000001 (01h) = DI1 of FEN-xx in slot 1 is ON, all others are
OFF.
OFF.
OFF.
100000 (20h) = DI2 of FEN-xx in slot 2 is on, all others are
OFF.
-
03
03 Control values Speed control, torque control, and other values.
03.03 SpeedRef unramp Used speed reference before ramping and shaping in rpm. 100 = 1 rpm
03.05 SpeedRef ramped Ramped and shaped speed reference in rpm. 100 = 1 rpm
03.06 SpeedRef used Used speed reference in rpm (reference before speed error
calculation).
100 = 1 rpm
03.07 Speed error filt Filtered speed error value in rpm. 100 = 1 rpm
03.08 Acc comp torq Output of the acceleration compensation (torque in percent). 10 = 1%
03.09 Torq ref sp ctrl Limited speed controller output torque in percent. 10 = 1%
03.11 Torq ref ramped Ramped torque reference in percent. 10 = 1%
03.12 Torq ref sp lim Torque reference limited by the rush control (value in
percent). Torque is limited to ensure that the speed is
between the minimum and maximum speed limits defined by
parameters 20.01 Maximum speed and 20.02 Minimum
speed.
10 = 1%
03.13 Torq ref to TC Torque reference in percent for the torque control. 10 = 1%
03.14 Torq ref used Torque reference after frequency, voltage and torque limiters.
100% corresponds to the motor nominal torque.
10 = 1%
03.15 Brake torq mem Torque value (in percent) stored when the mechanical brake
close command is issued.
10 = 1%
03.16 Brake command Brake on/off command; 0 = close, 1 = open. For brake on/off
control, connect this signal to a relay output (or digital output).
See section Mechanical brake control on page 66.
1 = 1
03.17 Flux ref used Used flux reference in percent. 1 = 1%
03.18 Speed ref pot Output of the motor potentiometer function. (The motor
potentiometer is configured using parameters 21.10…21.12.)
100 = 1 rpm
Bit Information
0 Stop.
1 Start.
2 … 6 Reserved.
7 Run enable.
8 Reset.
9 … 14 Freely assignable through bit pointer settings.
15 EXT1/EXT2 selection. 0 = EXT1 active, 1 = EXT2 active.

102 Parameters
04
04 Appl values Process and counter values.
04.01 Process act1 Process feedback 1 for the process PID controller. 100 = 1 unit
04.02 Process act2 Process feedback 2 for the process PID controller. 100 = 1 unit
04.03 Process act Final process feedback after process feedback selection and
modification.
100 = 1 unit
04.04 Process PID err Process PID error, i.e. difference between PID setpoint and
feedback.
10 = 1 unit
04.05 Process PID out Output of the process PID controller. 10 = 1 unit
04.06 Process var1 Process variable 1. See parameter group 35 Process
variable.
1000 = 1
variable.
1000 = 1
variable.
1000 = 1
04.09 Counter ontime1 Reading of on-time counter 1. See parameter 44.01 Ontime1
func.
1 = 1 s
04.10 Counter ontime2 Reading of on-time counter 2. See parameter group 44.05
Ontime2 func.
1 = 1 s
04.11 Counter edge1 Reading of rising edge counter 1. See parameter group 44.09
Edge count1 func.
1 = 1
04.12 Counter edge2 Reading of rising edge counter 2. See parameter group 44.14
Edge count2 func.
1 = 1
04.13 Counter value1 Reading of value counter 1. See parameter group 44.19 Val
count1 func.
1 = 1
04.14 Counter value2 Reading of value counter 2. See parameter group 44.24 Val
count2 func.
1 = 1

Parameters 103
06
06 Drive status Drive status words.
06.01 Status word1 Status word 1 sent to the master. -
Bit Name Information
0 Ready 1 = Drive is ready to receive start command.
0 = Drive is not ready.
1 Enabled 1 = External run enable signal is received.
0 = No external run enable signal is received.
2 Started 1 = Drive has received start command.
0 = Drive has not received start command.
3 Running 1 = Drive is modulating.
0 = Drive is not modulating.
4 Em off
(off2)
1 = Emergency OFF2 is active.
0 = Emergency OFF2 is inactive.
5 Em stop
(off3)
1 = Emergency OFF3 (ramp stop) is active.
0 = Emergency OFF3 is inactive.
6 Ack startinh 1 = Start inhibit is active.
0 = Start inhibit is inactive.
7 Alarm 1 = Alarm is active. See chapter Fault tracing.
0 = No alarm is active.
8 Ext2 act 1 = External control EXT2 is active.
0 = External control EXT1 is active.
9 Local fb 1 = Fieldbus local control is active.
0 = Fieldbus local control is inactive.
10 Fault 1 = Fault is active. See chapter Fault tracing.
0 = No fault is active.
11 Local panel 1 = Local control is active, ie. drive is controlled from PC tool or control
panel.
0 = Local control is inactive.
12 Fault(-1) 1 = No fault is active.
0 = Fault is active. See chapter Fault tracing.
13…31 Reserved

104 Parameters
06.02 Status word2 Status word 2 sent to the master. -
0 Start act 1 = Drive start command is active.
0 = Drive start command is inactive.
1 Stop act 1 = Drive stop command is active.
0 = Drive stop command is inactive.
2 Ready relay 1 = Ready to function: run enable signal on, no fault, emergency stop signal
off, no ID run inhibition. Connected by default to DIO1 by par. 14.03 DIO1
out src.
0 = Not ready to function.
3 Modulating 1 = Modulating: IGBTs are controlled, ie. the drive is RUNNING.
0 = No modulation: IGBTs are not controlled.
4 Ref running 1 = Normal operation is enabled. Running. Drive follows the given
reference.
0 = Normal operation is disabled. Drive is not following the given reference
(eg. in magnetization phase drive is modulating).
5 Jogging 1 = Jogging function 1 or 2 is active.
0 = Jogging function is inactive.
6 Off1 1 = Emergency stop OFF1 is active.
0 = Emergency stop OFF1 is inactive.
7 Start inh
mask
1 = Maskable (by par. 12.01 Start inhibit) start inhibit is active.
0 = No maskable start inhibit is active.
8 Start inh
nomask
1 = Non-maskable start inhibit is active.
0 = No non-maskable start inhibit is active.
9 Chrg rel
closed
1 = Charging relay is closed.
0 = Charging relay is open.
10 Sto act 1 = Safe Torque Off function is active. See parameter 30.07 Sto diagnostic.
0 = Safe Torque Off function is inactive.
11 Reserved
12 Ramp in 0 1 = Ramp Function Generator input is forced to zero.
0 = Normal operation.
13 Ramp hold 1 = Ramp Function Generator output is held.
14 Ramp out 0 1 = Ramp Function Generator output is forced to zero.
15…31 Reserved

Parameters 105
06.03 Speed ctrl stat Speed control status word. -
06.05 Limit word1 Limit word 1. -
0 Speed act
neg
1 = Actual speed is negative.
1 Zero speed 1 = Actual speed has reached the zero speed limit (parameters 19.06 Zero
speed limit and 19.07 Zero speed delay).
2 Above limit 1 = Actual speed has exceeded the supervision limit (parameter 19.08
Above speed lim).
3 At setpoint 1 = The difference between the actual speed and the unramped speed
reference is within the speed window (parameter 19.10 Speed window).
4 Reserved
5 PI tune
active
1 = Speed controller autotune is active.
6 PI tune
request
1 = Speed controller autotune has been requested by parameter 23.20 PI
tune mode.
7 PI tune
done
1 = Speed controller autotune has been completed successfully.
8…15 Reserved
0 Torq lim 1 = Drive torque is being limited by the motor control (undervoltage control,
current control, load angle control or pull-out control), or by the torque limit
parameters in group 20 Limits.
1 Spd ctl tlim
min
1 = Speed controller output minimum torque limit is active. The limit is
defined by parameter 23.10 Min torq sp ctrl.
2 Spd ctl tlim
max
1 = Speed controller output maximum torque limit is active. The limit is
defined by parameter 23.09 Max torq sp ctrl.
3 Torq ref
max
1 = Torque reference (03.11 Torq ref ramped) maximum limit is active. The
limit is defined by parameter 24.03 Maximum torq ref.
4 Torq ref min 1 = Torque reference (03.11 Torq ref ramped) minimum limit is active. The
limit is defined by parameter 24.04 Minimum torq ref.
5 Tlim max
speed
1 = Torque reference maximum value is limited by the rush control, because
of maximum speed limit 20.01 Maximum speed.
6 Tlim min
speed
1 = Torque reference minimum value is limited by the rush control, because
of minimum speed limit 20.02 Minimum speed.
7 Reserved

106 Parameters
06.07 Torq lim status Torque controller limitation status word. -
06.12 Op mode ack Operation mode acknowledge: 0 = Stopped, 1 = Speed,
2 = Torque, 3 = Min, 4 = Max, 5 = Add, 10 = Scalar,
11 = Forced Magn (i.e. DC Hold)
1 = 1
06.13 Superv status Supervision status word. Bits 0…2 reflect the status of
supervisory functions 1…3 respectively. The functions are
configured in parameter group 33 Supervision (page 183).
-
06.14 Timed func stat Bits 0…3 show the on/off status of the four timers (1…4
respectively) configured in parameter group 36 Timed
functions. Bit 4 is on if any one of the four timers is on.
-
06.15 Counter status Counter status word. Shows whether the maintenance
counters configured in parameter group 44 Maintenance
have exceeded their limits.
-
08
08 Alarms & faults Alarm and fault information.
08.01 Active fault Fault code of the latest fault. 1 = 1
08.02 Last fault Fault code of the 2nd latest fault. 1 = 1
0 Undervolt-
age
1 = Intermediate circuit DC undervoltage. *
1 Overvoltage 1 = Intermediate circuit DC overvoltage. *
2 Minimum
torque
1 = Torque reference minimum limit is active. The limit is defined by
parameter 24.04 Minimum torq ref. *
3 Maximum
torque
1 = Torque reference maximum limit is active. The limit is defined by
parameter 24.03 Maximum torq ref. *
4 Internal cur-
rent
1 = An inverter current limit is active. The limit is identified by bits 8…11.
5 Load angle 1 = For permanent magnet motor only: Load angle limit is active, i.e. the
motor cannot produce more torque.
6 Motor pull-
out
1 = For asynchronous motor only: Motor pull-out limit is active, i.e. the motor
cannot produce more torque.
7 Reserved
8 Thermal 1 = Input current is limited by main circuit thermal limit.
9 Max current 1 = Inverter maximum output current limit is active (limits the drive output
current IMAX). **
10 User cur-
rent
1 = Maximum inverter output current limit is active. The limit is defined by
parameter 20.05 Maximum current. **
11 Thermal
IGBT
1 = Calculated thermal current value limits the inverter output current. **
* One of bits 0…3 can be on simultaneously. The bit typically indicates the limit that is exceeded
first.
** Only one of bits 9…11 can be on simultaneously. The bit typically indicates the limit that is
exceeded first.
0 Ontime1 1 = On-time counter 1 has reached its preset limit.
1 Ontime2 1 = On-time counter 2 has reached its preset limit.
2 Edge1 1 = Rising edge counter 1 has reached its preset limit.
3 Edge2 1 = Rising edge counter 2 has reached its preset limit.
4 Value1 1 = Value counter 1 has reached its preset limit.
5 Value2 1 = Value counter 2 has reached its preset limit.

Parameters 107
08.03 Fault time hi Time (real time or power-on time) at which the active fault
occurred in format dd.mm.yy (day, month and year).
1 = 1 d
08.04 Fault time lo Time (real time or power-on time) at which the active fault
occurred in format hh.mm.ss (hours, minutes and seconds).
1 = 1
08.05 Alarm word1 Alarm word 1. For possible causes and remedies, see
chapter Fault tracing.
-
-
Bit Name
0 Brake start torq
1 Brake not closed
2 Brake not open
3 Safe torq off
4 Sto mode
5 Motor temp1
6 Em off
7 Run enable
8 Id run
9 Em stop
10 Position scaling
11 Br overtemp
12 BC igbt overtemp
13 Device overtemp
14 Int board ovtemp
15 BC mod overtemp
Bit Name
0 Inu overtemp
1 FBA comm
2 Panel loss
3 AI supervision
4 FBA par conf
5 No motor data
6 Encoder1
7 Encoder2
8 Latch pos1
9 Latch pos2
10 Enc emul
11 FEN temp meas
12 Emul max freq
13 Emul pos ref
14 Resolver atune
15 Enc1 cable

108 Parameters
-
-
09
09 System info Drive type, program revision and option slot occupation
information.
09.01 Drive type Displays the drive type (for example, ACS850). -
09.02 Drive rating ID Displays the inverter type (ACS850-xx-…) of the drive.
0 = Unconfigured, 101 = 03A0, 102 = 03A6, 103 = 04A8,
104 = 06A0, 105 = 08A0, 106 = 010A, 107 = 014A,
108 = 018A, 109 = 025A, 110 = 030A, 111 = 035A,
112 = 044A, 113 = 050A, 114 = 061A, 115 = 078A,
116 = 094A, 117 = 103A, 118 = 144A, 119 = 166A,
120 = 202A, 121 = 225A, 122 = 260A, 123 = 290A,
124 = 430A, 125 = 521A, 126 = 602A, 127 = 693A,
128 = 720A
1 = 1
09.03 Firmware ID Displays the firmware name. E.g. UIFI. -
09.04 Firmware ver Displays the version of the firmware package in the drive, e.g.
E00F hex.
-
09.05 Firmware patch Displays the version of the firmware patch in the drive. 1 = 1
09.10 Int logic ver Displays the version of the logic on the main circuit board of
the drive.
-
Bit Name
0 Enc2 cable
1 D2D comm
2 D2D buffer ol
3 PS comm
4 Restore
5 Curr meas calib
6 Autophasing
7 Earthfault
8 Autoreset
9 Motor nom value
10 D2D config
11 Stall
12 Load curve
13 Load curve conf
14 U/f curve conf
15 Speed meas
Bit Name
0 Option comm loss
1 Solution prog
2 Motor temp2

Parameters 109
09.20 Option slot1 Displays the type of the optional module in option slot 1.
0 = No option, 1 = No comm, 2 = Unknown, 3 = FEN-01,
4 = FEN-11, 5 = FEN-21, 6 = FIO-01, 7 = FIO-11,
8 = FPBA-01, 9 = FPBA-02, 10 = FCAN-01, 11 = FDNA-01,
12 = FENA-01, 13 = FENA-02, 14 = FLON-01,
15 = FRSA-00, 16 = FMBA-01, 17 = FFOA-01,
18 = FFOA-02, 19 = FSEN-01, 20 = FEN-31, 21 = FIO-21,
22 = FSCA-01, 23 = FSEA-21
1 = 1
09.21 Option slot2 Displays the type of the optional module in option slot 2. See
signal 09.20 Option slot1.
1 = 1
09.22 Option slot3 Displays the type of the optional module in option slot 3. See
signal 09.20 Option slot1.
1 = 1
10
10 Start/stop Start/stop/direction etc. signal source selections.
10.01 Ext1 start func Selects the source of start and stop commands for external
control location 1 (EXT1).
Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Not sel No start or stop command sources selected. 0
In1 The source of the start and stop commands is selected by
parameter 10.02 Ext1 start in1. The state transitions of the
source bit are interpreted as follows:
1
3-wire The sources of the start and stop commands is selected by
parameters 10.02 Ext1 start in1 and 10.03 Ext1 start in2. The
state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
2
FBA The start and stop commands are taken from the fieldbus. 3
D2D The start and stop commands are taken from another drive
through the D2D (Drive-to-drive) Control Word.
4
In1F In2R The source selected by 10.02 Ext1 start in1 is the forward
start signal, the source selected by 10.03 Ext1 start in2 is the
reverse start signal.
5
In1St In2Dir The source selected by 10.02 Ext1 start in1 is the start signal
(0 = stop, 1 = start), the source selected by 10.03 Ext1 start
in2 is the direction signal (0 = forward, 1 = reverse).
6
State of source
(via par 10.02)
Command
0 -> 1 Start
1 -> 0 Stop
State of source 1
(via par. 10.02)
State of source 2
(via par. 10.03)
Command
0 -> 1 1 Start
Any 1 -> 0 Stop
Any 0 Stop
State of source 1
(via par. 10.02)
State of source 2
(via par. 10.03)
Command
0 0 Stop
1 0 Start forward
0 1 Start reverse
1 1 Stop

110 Parameters
10.02 Ext1 start in1 Selects source 1 of start and stop commands for external
control location EXT1. See parameter 10.01 Ext1 start func,
selections In1 and 3-wire.
running.
DI1 Digital input DI1 (as indicated by 02.01 DI status, bit 0). 1073742337
DIO4 Digital input/output DIO4 (as indicated by 02.03 DIO status,
bit 3).
1073938947
Timed func Bit 4 of parameter 06.14 Timed func stat. The bit is on when
at least one of the four timers configured in parameter group
36 Timed functions is on.
1074005518
Const Constant and bit pointer settings (see Terms and
abbreviations on page 93).
-
Pointer
selection 3-wire.
running.
bit 4).
1074004483
Const Bit pointer setting (see Terms and abbreviations on page 93). -
Pointer
10.04 Ext2 start func Selects the source of start and stop commands for external
control location 2 (EXT2).
running.
Not sel No start or stop command sources selected. 0
In1 The source of the start and stop commands is selected by
parameter 10.05 Ext2 start in1. The state transitions of the
source bit are interpreted as follows:
1
3-wire The sources of the start and stop commands is selected by
parameters 10.05 Ext2 start in1 and 10.06 Ext2 start in2. The
state transitions of the source bits are interpreted as follows:
2
FBA The start and stop commands are taken from the fieldbus. 3
State of source
(via par 10.05)
Command
0 -> 1 Start
1 -> 0 Stop
State of source 1
(via par. 10.05)
State of source 2
(via par. 10.06)
Command
0 -> 1 1 Start
Any 1 -> 0 Stop
Any 0 Stop

Parameters 111
D2D The start and stop commands are taken from another drive
through the D2D (Drive-to-drive) Control Word.
4
In1F In2R The source selected by 10.05 Ext2 start in1 is the forward
start signal, the source selected by 10.06 Ext2 start in2 is the
reverse start signal.
5
In1St In2Dir The source selected by 10.05 Ext2 start in1 is the start signal
(0 = stop, 1 = start), the source selected by 10.06 Ext2 start
in2 is the direction signal (0 = forward, 1 = reverse).
6
selections In1 and 3-wire.
running.
bit 3).
1073938947
Timed func Bit 4 of parameter 06.14 Timed func stat. The bit is on when
any one of the four timers configured in parameter group 36
Timed functions is on.
1074005518
Pointer
selection 3-wire.
running.
bit 4).
1074004483
Pointer
State of source 1
(via par. 10.05)
State of source 2
(via par. 10.06)
Command
0 0 Stop
1 0 Start forward
0 1 Start reverse
1 1 Stop

112 Parameters
10.07 Jog1 start If enabled by parameter 10.09 Jog enable, selects the source
for the activation of jogging function 1. (Jogging function 1
can also be activated through fieldbus regardless of
parameter 10.09.)
1 = Active.
See also other jogging function parameters: 10.08 Jog2 start,
10.09 Jog enable, 21.07 Speed ref jog1, 21.08 Speed ref
jog2, 22.10 Acc time jogging, 22.11 Dec time jogging and
19.07 Zero speed delay.
running.
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
Pointer
10.08 Jog2 start If enabled by parameter 10.09 Jog enable, selects the source
for the activation of jogging function 2. (Jogging function 2
can also be activated through fieldbus regardless of
parameter 10.09.)
1 = Active.
See also parameter 10.07 Jog1 start.
running.
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
Pointer
10.09 Jog enable Selects the source for enabling parameters 10.07 Jog1 start
and 10.08 Jog2 start.
Note: Jogging can be enabled using this parameter only
when no start command from an external control location is
active. On the other hand, if jogging is already enabled, the
drive cannot be started from an external control location apart
from jog commands through fieldbus.

Parameters 113
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
bit 5).
1074070019
Pointer
10.10 Fault reset sel Selects the source of the external fault reset signal. The
signal resets the drive after a fault trip if the cause of the fault
no longer exists.
0 -> 1 = Fault reset.
Note: A fault reset from the fieldbus is always observed
regardless of this setting.
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
bit 5).
1074070019
Pointer
10.11 Run enable Selects the source of the external run enable signal. If the run
enable signal is switched off, the drive will not start, or coasts
to stop if running.
1 = Run enable.
running.
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
bit 5).
1074070019

114 Parameters
Pointer
10.13 Em stop off3 Selects the source of the emergency stop OFF3 signal. The
drive is stopped along the emergency stop ramp time defined
by parameter 22.12 Em stop time.
0 = OFF3 active.
running.
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
bit 5).
1074070019
Pointer
10.15 Em stop off1 Selects the source of the emergency stop OFF1 signal. The
drive is stopped using the active deceleration time.
Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus
(02.22 FBA main cw).
0 = OFF1 active.
running.
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
bit 5).
1074070019
Pointer

Parameters 115
10.17 Start enable Selects the source for the start enable signal.
1 = Start enable.
If the signal is switched off, the drive will not start or coasts to
stop if running.
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
bit 5).
1074070019
Pointer
10.19 Start inhibit Enables the start inhibit function. The function prevents drive
restart (i.e. protects against unexpected start) if
• the drive trips on a fault and the fault is reset,
• the run enable signal is activated while the start command is
active (see parameter 10.11 Run enable),
• control changes from local to remote, or
• external control switches from EXT1 to EXT2 or vice versa.
An active start inhibit can be reset with a stop command.
Note that in certain applications it is necessary to allow the
drive to restart.
Disabled The start inhibit function is disabled. 0
Enabled The start inhibit function is enabled. 1
10.20 Start interl func Defines how the start interlock input (DIIL) on the JCU control
unit affects the drive operation.
Off2 stop With the drive running:
• 1 = Normal operation.
• 0 = Stop by coasting. The drive can be restarted by
restoring the start interlock signal and switching the start
signal from 0 to 1.
With the drive stopped:
• 1 = Starting allowed.
• 0 = Starting not allowed.
0
Off3 stop With the drive running:
• 1 = Normal operation.
• 0 = Stop by ramping. The deceleration time is defined by
parameter 22.12 Em stop time. The drive can be restarted
by restoring the start interlock signal and switching the
start signal from 0 to 1.
With the drive stopped:
• 1 = Starting allowed.
• 0 = Starting not allowed.
1

116 Parameters
11
11 Start/stop mode Start, stop, magnetization etc. settings.
11.01 Start mode Selects the motor start function.
Notes:
• Selections Fast and Const time are ignored if parameter
99.05 is set to Scalar.
• Starting to a rotating machine is not possible when DC
magnetizing is selected (Fast or Const time).
• With permanent magnet motors, Automatic start must be
used.
Fast The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The pre-
magnetizing time is determined automatically, being typically
200 ms to 2 s depending on motor size. This mode should be
selected if a high break-away torque is required.
running.
0
Const time The drive pre-magnetizes the motor before start. The pre-
magnetizing time is defined by parameter 11.02 Dc-magn
time. This mode should be selected if constant pre-
magnetizing time is required (e.g. if the motor start must be
synchronized with the release of a mechanical brake). This
setting also guarantees the highest possible break-away
torque when the pre-magnetizing time is set long enough.
WARNING! The drive will start after the set
magnetizing time has passed even if motor
magnetization is not completed. In applications
where a full break-away torque is essential,
ensure that the constant magnetizing time is long enough to
allow generation of full magnetization and torque.
1
Automatic Automatic start guarantees optimal motor start in most cases.
It includes the flying start function (starting to a rotating
machine) and the automatic restart function (a stopped motor
can be restarted immediately without waiting the motor flux to
die away). The drive motor control program identifies the flux
as well as the mechanical state of the motor and starts the
motor instantly under all conditions.
Note: If parameter 99.05 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar, no
flying start or automatic restart is possible by default.
2
11.02 Dc-magn time Defines the constant DC magnetizing time. See parameter
11.01 Start mode. After the start command, the drive
automatically premagnetizes the motor the set time.
To ensure full magnetizing, set this value to the same value
as or higher than the rotor time constant. If not known, use
the rule-of-thumb value given in the table below:
running.
0 … 10000 ms Constant DC magnetizing time. 1 = 1 ms
Motor rated power Constant magnetizing time
< 1 kW > 50 to 100 ms
1 to 10 kW > 100 to 200 ms
10 to 200 kW > 200 to 1000 ms
200 to 1000 kW > 1000 to 2000 ms

Parameters 117
11.03 Stop mode Selects the motor stop function.
Coast Stop by cutting of the motor power supply. The motor coasts
to a stop.
WARNING! If the mechanical brake is used,
ensure it is safe to stop the drive by coasting.
1
Ramp Stop along ramp. See parameter group 22 Speed ref ramp on
page 155.
2
11.04 Dc hold speed Defines the DC hold speed. See parameter 11.06 Dc hold.
0.0 … 1000.0 rpm DC hold speed. 10 = 1 rpm
11.05 Dc hold curr ref Defines the DC hold current in percent of the motor nominal
current. See parameter 11.06 Dc hold.
0 … 100% DC hold current. 1 = 1%
11.06 Dc hold Enables the DC hold function. The function makes it possible
to lock the rotor at zero speed.
When both the reference and the speed drop below the value
of parameter 11.04 Dc hold speed, the drive will stop
generating sinusoidal current and start to inject DC into the
motor. The current is set by parameter 11.05 Dc hold curr ref.
When the reference speed exceeds parameter 11.04 Dc hold
speed, normal drive operation continues.
Notes:
• The DC hold function has no effect if the start signal is
switched off.
• The DC hold function can only be activated in speed
control mode.
• The DC hold function cannot be activated if parameter
99.05 Motor ctrl mode is set to Scalar.
• Injecting DC current into the motor causes the motor to
heat up. In applications where long DC hold times are
required, externally ventilated motors should be used. If
the DC hold period is long, the DC hold cannot prevent the
motor shaft from rotating if a constant load is applied to the
motor.
Disabled The DC hold function is disabled. 0
Enabled The DC hold function is enabled. 1
11.07 Autophasing mode Selects the way autophasing is performed during the ID run.
See section Autophasing on page 58.
Reference
Motor speed
DC hold
11.04 Dc hold
speed
t
t

118 Parameters
Turning This mode gives the most accurate autophasing result. This
mode can be used, and is recommended, if it is allowed for
the motor to rotate during the ID run and the start-up is not
time-critical.
Note: This mode will cause the motor to rotate during the ID
run.
0
Standstill 1 Faster than the Turning mode, but not as accurate. The motor
will not rotate.
1
Standstill 2 An alternative standstill autophasing mode that can be used if
the Turning mode cannot be used, and the Standstill 1 mode
gives erratic results. However, this mode is considerably
slower than Standstill 1.
2
12
12 Operating mode Operating mode and external reference source selection.
12.01 Ext1/Ext2 sel Selects the source for external control location EXT1/EXT2
selection.
0 = EXT1
1 = EXT2
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
bit 5).
1074070019
Pointer
12.03 Ext1 ctrl mode Selects the operating mode for external control location
EXT1.
Speed Speed control. Torque reference is 03.09 Torq ref sp ctrl. 1
Torque Torque control. Torque reference is 03.12 Torq ref sp lim. 2
Min Combination of selections Speed and Torque: Torque selector
compares the torque reference and the speed controller
output and the smaller of the two is used.
3
Max Combination of selections Speed and Torque: Torque selector
output and the greater of the two is used.
4
Add Combination of selections Speed and Torque: Torque selector
adds the speed controller output to the torque reference.
5
12.05 Ext2 ctrl mode Selects the operating mode for external control location
EXT2.
Speed Speed control. Torque reference is 03.09 Torq ref sp ctrl. 1
Torque Torque control. Torque reference is 03.12 Torq ref sp lim. 2

Parameters 119
Min Combination of selections Speed and Torque: Torque selector
output and the smaller of the two is used.
3
Max Combination of selections Speed and Torque: Torque selector
output and the greater of the two is used.
4
Add Combination of selections Speed and Torque: Torque selector
adds the speed controller output to the torque reference.
5
13
13 Analogue inputs Analog input signal processing.
13.01 AI1 filt time Defines the filter time constant for analogue input AI1.
Note: The signal is also filtered due to the signal interface
hardware (approximately 0.25 ms time constant). This cannot
be changed by any parameter.
0.000 … 30.000 s Filter time constant. 1000 = 1 s
13.02 AI1 max Defines the maximum value for analogue input AI1. The input
type is selected with jumper J1 on the JCU Control Unit.
-22.000 … 22.000
mA or
-11.000 … 11.000 V
Maximum AI1 value. 1000 = 1 unit
13.03 AI1 min Defines the minimum value for analogue input AI1. The input
-22.000 … 22.000
mA or
-11.000 … 11.000 V
Minimum AI1 value. 1000 = 1 unit
63
%
100
T
t
O = I × (1 - e-t/T
)
I = filter input (step)
O = filter output
t = time
T = filter time constant
Unfiltered signal
Filtered signal

120 Parameters
13.04 AI1 max scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum
analogue input AI1 value defined by parameter 13.02 AI1
max.
-32768.000 …
32768.000
Real value corresponding to maximum AI1 value. 1000 = 1
13.05 AI1 min scale Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum
min. See the drawing at parameter 13.04 AI1 max scale.
-32768.000
…32768.000
Real value corresponding to minimum AI1 value. 1000 = 1
13.06 AI2 filt time Defines the filter time constant for analogue input AI2. See
parameter 13.01 AI1 filt time.
-22.000 … 22.000
mA or
-11.000 … 11.000 V
AI2 maximum value. 1000 = 1 unit
-22.000 … 22.000
mA or
-11.000 … 11.000 V
AI2 minimum value. 1000 = 1 unit
AI (scaled)
AI (mA/V)
13.04
13.02
13.03
13.05

Parameters 121
max.
-32768.000 …
32768.000
-32768.000 …
32768.000
type depends on the type and/or settings of the I/O extension
module installed. See the user documentation of the
extension module.
-22.000 … 22.000
mA or
-11.000 … 11.000 V
extension module.
-22.000 … 22.000
mA or
-11.000 … 11.000 V
AI (scaled)
AI (mA/V)
13.09
13.07
13.08
13.10

122 Parameters
max.
-32768.000 …
32768.000
-32768.000 …
32768.000
extension module.
-22.000 … 22.000
mA or
-11.000 … 11.000 V
extension module.
-22.000 … 22.000
mA or
-11.000 … 11.000 V
AI (scaled)
AI (mA/V)
13.14
13.12
13.13
13.15

Parameters 123
max.
-32768.000 …
32768.000
-32768.000 …
32768.000
extension module.
-22.000 … 22.000
mA or
-11.000 … 11.000 V
extension module.
-22.000 … 22.000
mA or
-11.000 … 11.000 V
AI (scaled)
AI (mA/V)
13.19
13.17
13.18
13.20

124 Parameters
max.
-32768.000 …
32768.000
-32768.000 …
32768.000
extension module.
-22.000 … 22.000
mA or
-11.000 … 11.000 V
extension module.
-22.000 … 22.000
mA or
-11.000 … 11.000 V
AI (scaled)
AI (mA/V)
13.24
13.22
13.23
13.25

Parameters 125
max.
-32768.000 …
32768.000
-32768.000 …
32768.000
13.31 AI tune Triggers the AI tuning function.
Connect the signal to the input and select the appropriate
tuning function.
No action AI tune is not activated. 0
AI1 min tune Current analogue input AI1 signal value is set as minimum
value of AI1 into parameter 13.03 AI1 min. The value reverts
back to No action automatically.
1
AI1 max tune Current analogue input AI1 signal value is set as maximum
value of AI1 into parameter 13.02 AI1 max. The value reverts
2
AI2 min tune Current analogue input AI2 signal value is set as minimum
value of AI2 into parameter 13.08 AI2 min. The value reverts
3
AI2 max tune Current analogue input AI2 signal value is set as maximum
value of AI2 into parameter 13.07 AI2 max. The value reverts
4
13.32 AI superv func Selects how the drive reacts when analogue input signal limit
is reached. The limit is selected by parameter 13.33 AI superv
cw.
No No action taken. 0
Fault The drive trips on an AI SUPERVISION fault. 1
AI (scaled)
AI (mA/V)
13.29
13.27
13.28
13.30

126 Parameters
Spd ref Safe The drive generates an AI SUPERVISION alarm and sets the
speed to the speed defined by parameter 30.02 Speed ref
safe.
WARNING! Make sure that it is safe to continue
operation in case of a communication break.
2
Last speed The drive generates an AI SUPERVISION alarm and freezes
the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed
is determined by the average speed over the previous 10
seconds.
3
13.33 AI superv cw Selects the analogue input signal supervision limit.
Example: If parameter value is set to 0b0010, bit 1 AI1>max
is selected.
14
14 Digital I/O Configuration of digital input/outputs and relay outputs.
14.01 DI invert mask Inverts status of digital inputs as reported by 02.01 DI status.
14.02 DIO1 conf Selects whether DIO1 is used as a digital output or input.
Output DIO1 is used as a digital output. 0
Input DIO1 is used as a digital input. 1
14.03 DIO1 out src Selects a drive signal to be connected to digital output DIO1
(when 14.02 DIO1 conf is set to Output).
Brake cmd 03.16 Brake command (see page 101). 1073742608
Ready Bit 0 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 103). 1073743361
Enabled Bit 1 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 103). 1073808897
Started Bit 2 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 103). 1073874433
Bit Supervision Action selected by parameter 13.32 AI superv func is taken if
0 AI1<min AI1 signal value falls below the value defined by equation: par. 13.03
AI1 min - 0.5 mA or V
1 AI1>max AI1 signal value exceeds the value defined by equation: par. 13.02
AI1 max + 0.5 mA or V
2 AI2<min AI2 signal value falls below the value defined by equation: par. 13.08
AI2 min - 0.5 mA or V
3 AI2>max AI2 signal value exceeds the value defined by equation: par. 13.07
AI2 max + 0.5 mA or V
Bit Name
0 1 = Invert DI1
1 1 = Invert DI2
2 1 = Invert DI3
3 1 = Invert DI4
4 1 = Invert DI5
5 1 = Invert DI6
6 Reserved
7 1 = Invert DI8 (on optional FIO-21 I/O Extension)

Parameters 127
Running Bit 3 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 103). 1073939969
Alarm Bit 7 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 103). 1074202113
Ext2 active Bit 8 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 103). 1074267649
Fault Bit 10 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 103). 1074398721
Fault(-1) Bit 12 of 06.01 Status word1 (see page 103). 1074529793
Ready relay Bit 2 of 06.02 Status word2 (see page 104). 1073874434
RunningRelay Bit 3 of 06.02 Status word2 (see page 104). 1073939970
Ref running Bit 4 of 06.02 Status word2 (see page 104). 1074005506
Charge ready Bit 9 of 06.02 Status word2 (see page 104). 1074333186
Neg speed Bit 0 of 06.03 Speed ctrl stat (see page 105). 1073743363
Zero speed Bit 1 of 06.03 Speed ctrl stat (see page 105). 1073808899
Above limit Bit 2 of 06.03 Speed ctrl stat (see page 105). 1073874435
At setpoint Bit 3 of 06.03 Speed ctrl stat (see page 105). 1073939971
Supervision1 Bit 0 of 06.13 Superv status (see page 106). 1073743373
Pointer
14.04 DIO1 Ton Defines the on (activation) delay for digital input/output DIO1
when 14.02 DIO1 conf is set to Output.
0.0 … 3000.0 s On (activation) delay for DIO1 when set as an output. 10 = 1 s
14.05 DIO1 Toff Defines the off (deactivation) delay for digital input/output
DIO1 when 14.02 DIO1 conf is set to Output. See parameter
14.04 DIO1 Ton.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Off (deactivation) delay for DIO1 when set as an output. 10 = 1 s
14.06 DIO2 conf Selects whether DIO2 is used as a digital output, digital input
or frequency input.
Freq input DIO2 is used as a frequency input. 2
1
0
1
0
tOn tOff tOn tOff
tOn 14.04 DIO1 Ton
tOff 14.05 DIO1 Toff
Drive status
DIO1 status
Time

128 Parameters
Pointer
14.08 DIO2 Ton Defines the on (activation) delay for digital input/output DIO2
when 14.06 DIO2 conf is set to Output.
0.0 … 3000.0 s On (activation) delay for DIO2 when set as an output. 10 = 1 s
1
0
1
0
tOn tOff tOn tOff
tOn 14.08 DIO2 Ton
tOff 14.09 DIO2 Toff
Drive status
DIO2 status
Time

Parameters 129
14.09 DIO2 Toff Defines the off (deactivation) delay for digital input/output
DIO2 when 14.06 DIO2 conf is set to Output. See parameter
14.08 DIO2 Ton.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Off (deactivation) delay for DIO2 when set as an output. 10 = 1 s
14.10 DIO3 conf Selects whether DIO3 is used as a digital output, digital input
or frequency output.
Freq output DIO3 is used as a frequency output. 3
Pointer

130 Parameters
Pointer

Parameters 131
Pointer
Pointer

132 Parameters
Pointer

Parameters 133
Pointer
Pointer

134 Parameters
Pointer
14.42 RO1 src Selects a drive signal to be connected to relay output RO1.
Pointer

Parameters 135
14.43 RO1 Ton Defines the on (activation) delay for relay output RO1.
0.0 … 3000.0 s On (activation) delay for RO1. 10 = 1 s
14.44 RO1 Toff Defines the off (deactivation) delay for relay output RO1. See
parameter 14.43 RO1 Ton.
0.0 … 3000.0 s Off (deactivation) delay for RO1. 10 = 1 s
Pointer
1
0
1
0
tOn tOff tOn tOff
tOn 14.43 RO1 Ton
tOff 14.44 RO1 Toff
Drive status
RO1 status
Time

136 Parameters
Pointer
Pointer
Pointer

Parameters 137
14.57 Freq in max Defines the maximum input frequency for DIO2 when
parameter 14.06 DIO2 conf is set to Freq input.
3 … 32768 Hz DIO2 maximum frequency. 1 = 1 Hz
14.58 Freq in min Defines the minimum input frequency for DIO2 when
parameter 14.06 DIO2 conf is set to Freq input. (See diagram
at parameter 14.57 Freq in max.)
3 … 32768 Hz DIO2 minimum frequency. 1 = 1 Hz
14.59 Freq in max scal Defines the real value that corresponds to the maximum input
frequency defined by parameter 14.57 Freq in max. (See
diagram at parameter 14.57 Freq in max.)
-32768 … 32768 Real value corresponding to DIO2 maximum frequency. 1 = 1
14.60 Freq in min scal Defines the real value that corresponds to the minimum input
frequency defined by 14.58 Freq in min. (See diagram at
parameter 14.57 Freq in max.)
-32768 … 32768 Real value corresponding to DIO2 minimum frequency. 1 = 1
14.61 Freq out src Selects a drive signal to be connected to frequency output
DIO3 (when 14.10 DIO3 conf is set to Freq output).
Value pointer setting (see Terms and abbreviations on page
93).
-
fDIO2 (Hz)
14.57
14.59 Signal (real)14.60
14.58

138 Parameters
14.62 Freq out max src When 14.10 DIO3 conf is set to Freq output, defines the real
value of the signal (selected by parameter 14.61 Freq out src)
that corresponds to the maximum DIO3 frequency output
value (defined by parameter 14.64 Freq out max sca).
0 … 32768 Real signal value corresponding to maximum DIO3 output
frequency.
1 = 1
14.63 Freq out min src When 14.10 DIO3 conf is set to Freq output, defines the real
value of the signal (selected by parameter 14.61 Freq out src)
that corresponds to the minimum DIO3 frequency output
value (defined by parameter 14.65 Freq out min sca).
0 … 32768 Real signal value corresponding to minimum DIO3 output
frequency.
1 = 1
14.64 Freq out max sca When 14.10 DIO3 conf is set to Freq output, defines the
maximum DIO3 output frequency.
3 … 32768 Hz Maximum DIO3 output frequency. 1 = 1 Hz
14.65 Freq out min sca When 14.10 DIO3 conf is set to Freq output, defines the
minimum DIO3 output frequency.
3 … 32768 Hz Minimum DIO3 output frequency. 1 = 1 Hz
Pointer
Pointer
fDIO3 (Hz)
14.64
14.65
14.62 14.63
14.6214.63
14.64
14.65
Signal (real)
selected by
par. 14.61
fDIO3 (Hz)
Signal (real)
selected by
par. 14.61

Parameters 139
15
15 Analogue outputs Selection and processing of actual signals to be indicated
through the analogue outputs. See section Programmable
analog outputs on page 72.
15.01 AO1 src Selects a drive signal to be connected to analogue output
AO1.
Speed rpm 01.01 Motor speed rpm (see page 94). 1073742081
Speed % 01.02 Motor speed % (see page 94). 1073742082
Frequency 01.03 Output frequency (see page 94). 1073742083
Current 01.04 Motor current (see page 94). 1073742084
Current % 01.05 Motor current % (see page 94). 1073742085
Torque 01.06 Motor torque (see page 94). 1073742086
Dc-voltage 01.07 Dc-voltage (see page 94). 1073742087
Power inu 01.22 Power inu out (see page 94). 1073742102
Power motor 01.23 Motor power (see page 94). 1073742103
SpRef unramp 03.03 SpeedRef unramp (see page 101). 1073742595
SpRef ramped 03.05 SpeedRef ramped (see page 101). 1073742597
SpRef used 03.06 SpeedRef used (see page 101). 1073742598
TorqRef used 03.14 Torq ref used (see page 101). 1073742606
Process act 04.03 Process act (see page 102). 1073742851
Proc PID out 04.05 Process PID out (see page 102). 1073742853
Pointer Value pointer setting (see Terms and abbreviations on page
93).
-
15.02 AO1 filt time Defines the filtering time constant for analogue output AO1.
15.03 AO1 out max Defines the maximum output value for analogue output AO1.
0.000 … 22.700 mA Maximum AO1 output value. 1000 = 1 mA
15.04 AO1 out min Defines the minimum output value for analogue output AO1.
0.000 … 22.700 mA Minimum AO1 output value. 1000 = 1 mA
63
%
100
T
t
O = I × (1 - e-t/T
)
O = filter output
t = time
Unfiltered signal
Filtered signal

140 Parameters
15.05 AO1 src max Defines the real value of the signal (selected by parameter
15.01 AO1 src) that corresponds to the maximum AO1 output
value (defined by parameter 15.03 AO1 out max).
-32768.000 …
32768.000
Real signal value corresponding to maximum AO1 output
value.
1000 = 1
15.06 AO1 src min Defines the real value of the signal (selected by parameter
15.01 AO1 src) that corresponds to the minimum AO1 output
value (defined by parameter 15.04 AO1 out min). See
parameter 15.05 AO1 src max.
-32768.000 …
32768.000
Real signal value corresponding to minimum AO1 output
value.
1000 = 1
AO2.
IAO1 (mA)
15.03
15.04
15.05 15.06
15.0515.06
15.03
15.04
Signal (real)
selected bypar.
15.01
IAO1 (mA)
Signal (real)
selected bypar.
15.01

Parameters 141
93).
-
See parameter 15.02 AO1 filt time.
-32768.000 …
32768.000
value.
1000 = 1
IAO2 (mA)
15.09
15.10
15.11 15.12
15.1115.12
15.09
15.10
Signal (real)
selected by par.
15.07
IAO2 (mA)
Signal (real)
selected by par.
15.07

142 Parameters
-32768.000 …
32768.000
value.
1000 = 1
AO3.
93).
-

Parameters 143
-32768.000 …
32768.000
value.
1000 = 1
-32768.000 …
32768.000
value.
1000 = 1
AO4.
IAO3 (mA)
15.15
15.16
15.17 15.18
15.1715.18
15.15
15.16
Signal (real)
selected by
par. 15.13
IAO3 (mA)
Signal (real)
selected by
par. 15.13

144 Parameters
93).
-
-32768.000 …
32768.000
value.
1000 = 1
IAO4 (mA)
15.21
15.22
15.23 15.24
15.2315.24
15.21
15.22
Signal (real)
selected by
par. 15.19
IAO4 (mA)
Signal (real)
selected bypar.
15.19

Parameters 145
-32768.000 …
32768.000
value.
1000 = 1
15.25 AO ctrl word Defines how a signed source is processed before output.
16
16 System Parameter lock, parameter restore, user parameter sets etc.
16.01 Local lock Selects the source for disabling local control (Take/Release
button in the PC tool, LOC/REM key of the panel).
0 = Local control enabled.
1 = Local control disabled.
WARNING! Before activating, ensure that the
control panel is not needed for stopping the drive!
Pointer
16.02 Parameter lock Selects the state of the parameter lock. The lock prevents
parameter changing.
Locked Locked. Parameter values cannot be changed from the
control panel. The lock can be opened by entering the valid
code into parameter 16.03 Pass code.
0
Open The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed. 1
Not saved The lock is open. Parameter values can be changed, but the
changes will not be stored at power switch-off.
2
16.03 Pass code Selects the pass code for the parameter lock (see parameter
16.02 Parameter lock).
After entering 358 at this parameter, parameter 16.02
Parameter lock can be adjusted. The value reverts back to 0
automatically.
0 … 2147483647 Pass code for parameter lock. 1 = 1
16.04 Param restore Restores the original settings of the application, i.e.
parameter factory default values.
running.
Done Restoring is completed. 0
Restore defs All parameter values are restored to default values, except
motor data, ID run results, and fieldbus, drive-to-drive link and
encoder configuration data.
1
Clear all All parameter values are restored to default values, including
motor data, ID run results and fieldbus and encoder
configuration data. PC tool communication is interrupted
during the restoring. Drive CPU is re-booted after the
restoring is completed.
2
0 AO1 func 1 = AO1 is bipolar
0 = AO1 is absolute value of source
1 AO2 func 1 = AO2 is bipolar
0 = AO2 is absolute value of source

146 Parameters
16.07 Param save Saves the valid parameter values to the permanent memory.
Note: A new parameter value is saved automatically when
changed from the PC tool or panel but not when altered
through a fieldbus connection.
Done Save completed. 0
Save Save in progress. 1
16.09 User set sel Enables the saving and restoring of up to four custom sets of
parameter settings.
The set that was in use before powering down the drive is in
use after the next power-up.
Notes:
• Fieldbus and encoder parameters (groups 50-53 and 90-
93 respectively) are not part of the user parameter sets.
• Any parameter changes made after loading a set are not
automatically stored – they must be saved using this
parameter.
No request Load or save operation complete; normal operation. 1
Load set 1 Load user parameter set 1. 2
Save set 1 Save user parameter set 1. 6
IO mode Load user parameter set using parameters 16.11 User IO sel
lo and 16.12 User IO sel hi.
10
16.10 User set log Shows the status of the user parameter sets (see parameter
16.09 User set sel). Read-only.
N/A No user sets have been saved. 0
Loading A user set is being loaded. 1
Saving A user set is being saved. 2
Faulted Invalid or empty parameter set. 4
Set1 IO act User parameter set 1 has been selected by parameters 16.11
User IO sel lo and 16.12 User IO sel hi.
8
16
32
64
Set1 par act User parameter set 1 has been loaded using parameter 16.09
User set sel.
128
User set sel.
256
User set sel.
512

Parameters 147
User set sel.
1024
16.11 User IO sel lo When parameter 16.09 User set sel is set to IO mode, selects
the user parameter set together with parameter 16.12 User IO
sel hi. The status of the source defined by this parameter and
parameter 16.12 select the user parameter set as follows:
Pointer
16.12 User IO sel hi See parameter 16.11 User IO sel lo.
Pointer
16.14 Reset ChgParLog Resets the log of latest parameter changes.
Done Reset not requested (normal operation). 0
Reset Reset log of latest parameter changes. The value reverts
automatically to Done.
1
16.15 Menu set sel Loads a short, long or custom parameter list. By default, short
parameter list is displayed by drive.
No request No change has been requested. 0
Load short Load short parameter list. Only a selective list of parameters
will be displayed.
1
Load long Load long parameter list. All parameters will be displayed. 2
16.16 Menu set active Shows which parameter list is active. See parameter 16.15
Menu set sel.
None No parameter list is active. 0
Short menu Short parameter list is active. 1
Long menu Long parameter list is active. All parameters are displayed. 2
16.17 Power unit Selects the unit of power for parameters such as 01.22 Power
inu out, 01.23 Motor power and 99.10 Mot nom power.
kW Kilowatt. 0
hp Horsepower. 1
19
19 Speed calculation Speed feedback, speed window, etc. settings.
19.01 Speed scaling Defines the terminal speed value used in acceleration and the
initial speed value used in deceleration (see parameter group
22 Speed ref ramp). Also defines the rpm value that
corresponds to 20000 for fieldbus communication with ABB
Drives communication profile.
0 … 30000 rpm Acceleration/deceleration terminal/initial speed. 1 = 1 rpm
Status of source
defined by par.
16.11
Status of source
defined by par.
16.12
User parameter
set selected
FALSE FALSE Set 1
TRUE FALSE Set 2
FALSE TRUE Set 3
TRUE TRUE Set 4

148 Parameters
19.02 Speed fb sel Selects the speed feedback value used in control.
Estimated A calculated speed estimate is used. 0
Enc1 speed Actual speed measured with encoder 1. The encoder is
selected by parameter 90.01 Encoder 1 sel.
1
Enc2 speed Actual speed measured with encoder 2. The encoder is
selected by parameter 90.02 Encoder 2 sel.
2
19.03 MotorSpeed filt Defines the time constant of the actual speed filter, i.e. time
within the actual speed has reached 63% of the nominal
speed (filtered speed = 01.01 Motor speed rpm).
If the used speed reference remains constant, the possible
interferences in the speed measurement can be filtered with
the actual speed filter. Reducing the ripple with filter may
cause speed controller tuning problems. A long filter time
constant and fast acceleration time contradict one another. A
very long filter time results in unstable control.
If there are substantial interferences in the speed
measurement, the filter time constant should be proportional
to the total inertia of the load and motor, in this case 10…30%
of the mechanical time constant
tmech = (nnom / Tnom) × Jtot × 2π / 60, where
Jtot = total inertia of the load and motor (the gear ratio
between the load and motor must be taken into account)
nnom = motor nominal speed
Tnom = motor nominal torque
See also parameter 23.07 Speed err Ftime.
0.000 … 10000.000
ms
Time constant of the actual speed filter. 1000 = 1 ms
19.06 Zero speed limit Defines the zero speed limit. The motor is stopped along
a speed ramp until the defined zero speed limit is reached.
After the limit, the motor coasts to stop.
0.00 … 30000.00
rpm
Zero speed limit. 100 = 1 rpm

Parameters 149
19.07 Zero speed delay Defines the delay for the zero speed delay function. The
function is useful in applications where a smooth and quick
restarting is essential. During the delay, the drive knows
accurately the rotor position.
Without Zero Speed Delay:
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along
a ramp. When the motor actual speed falls below an internal
limit (called Zero Speed Limit), the speed controller is
switched off. The inverter modulation is stopped and the
motor coasts to standstill.
With Zero Speed Delay:
The drive receives a stop command and decelerates along a
ramp. When the actual motor speed falls below an internal
limit (called Zero Speed Limit), the zero speed delay function
activates. During the delay the function keeps the speed
controller live: the inverter modulates, motor is magnetised
and the drive is ready for a quick restart. Zero speed delay
can be used e.g. with the jogging function.
0 … 30000 ms Zero speed delay. 1 = 1 ms
19.08 Above speed lim Defines the supervision limit for the actual speed.
0 … 30000 rpm Actual speed supervision limit. 1 = 1 rpm
Speed controller switched off:
Motor coasts to stop.
19.06 Zero speed limit
Speed
Time
Speed controller remains
active. Motor is decelerated to
true zero speed.
19.06 Zero speed limit
Speed
TimeDelay

150 Parameters
19.09 Speed TripMargin Defines, together with 20.01 Maximum speed and 20.02
Minimum speed, the maximum allowed speed of the motor
(overspeed protection). If actual speed (01.01 Motor speed
rpm) exceeds the speed limit defined by parameter 20.01 or
20.02 by more than the value of this parameter, the drive trips
on the OVERSPEED fault.
Example: If the maximum speed is 1420 rpm and speed trip
margin is 300 rpm, the drive trips at 1720 rpm.
0.0 … 10000.0 rpm Overspeed trip margin. 10 = 1 rpm
19.10 Speed window Defines the absolute value for the motor speed window
supervision, i.e. the absolute value for the difference between
the actual speed and the unramped speed reference (01.01
Motor speed rpm - 03.03 SpeedRef unramp). When the motor
speed is within the limits defined by this parameter, signal
02.24 FBA main sw bit 8 (AT_SETPOINT) is 1. If the motor
speed is not within the defined limits, bit 8 is 0.
0 … 30000 rpm Absolute value for motor speed window supervision. 1 = 1 rpm
20
20 Limits Drive operation limits. See also section Speed controller
tuning on page 74.
20.01 Maximum speed Defines the allowed maximum speed.
0 … 30000 rpm Maximum speed. 1 = 1 rpm
20.02 Minimum speed Defines the allowed minimum speed.
-30000 … 0 rpm Minimum speed. 1 = 1 rpm
Speed trip margin
Speed trip margin
Speed
Time
20.01
20.02

Parameters 151
20.03 Pos speed ena Selects the source of the positive speed reference enable
command.
1 = Positive speed reference is enabled.
0 = Positive speed reference is interpreted as zero speed
reference (In the figure below 03.03 SpeedRef unramp is set
to zero after the positive speed enable signal has cleared).
Actions in different control modes:
Speed control: Speed reference is set to zero and the motor is
stopped along the currently active deceleration ramp.
Torque control: Torque limit is set to zero and the rush
controller stops the motor.
Example: The motor is rotating in the forward direction. To
stop the motor, the positive speed enable signal is
deactivated by a hardware limit switch (e.g. via digital input).
If the positive speed enable signal remains deactivated and
the negative speed enable signal is active, only reverse
rotation of the motor is allowed.
Pointer
20.04 Neg speed ena Selects the source of the negative speed reference enable
command. See parameter 20.03 Pos speed ena.
Pointer
20.05 Maximum current Defines the maximum allowed motor current.
0.00 … 30000.00 A Maximum motor current. 100 = 1 A
20.06 Torq lim sel Defines a source that selects between the two sets of torque
limits defined by parameters 20.07…20.10.
0 = The torque limits defined by parameters 20.07 Maximum
torque1 and 20.08 Minimum torque1 are in force.
1 = The torque limits defined by parameters 20.09 Maximum
torque2 and 20.10 Minimum torque2 are in force.
Pointer
20.07 Maximum torque1 Defines maximum torque limit 1 for the drive (in percent of the
motor nominal torque). See parameter 20.06 Torq lim sel.
0.0 … 1600.0% Maximum torque 1. 10 = 1%
20.03 Pos speed ena
20.04 Neg speed ena
03.03 SpeedRef unramp
01.08 Encoder1 speed

152 Parameters
20.08 Minimum torque1 Defines minimum torque limit 1 for the drive (in percent of the
-1600.0 … 0.0% Minimum torque 1. 10 = 1%
20.09 Maximum torque2 Defines maximum torque limit 2 for the drive (in percent of the
AI1 scaled 02.05 AI1 scaled (see page 95). 1073742341
FBA ref1 02.26 FBA main ref1 (see page 100). 1073742362
D2D ref1 02.32 D2D ref1 (see page 101). 1073742368
PID out 04.05 Process PID out (see page 102). 1073742853
Max torque1 20.07 Maximum torque1 (see page 151). 1073746951
93).
-
20.10 Minimum torque2 Defines minimum torque limit 2 for the drive (in percent of the
Min torque1 20.08 Minimum torque1 (see page 152). 1073746952
93).
-
20.12 P motoring lim Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the inverter to the
motor in percent of the motor nominal power.
0.0 … 1600.0% Maximum motoring power. 10 = 1%
20.13 P generating lim Defines the maximum allowed power fed by the motor to the
inverter in percent of the motor nominal power.
0.0 … 1600.0% Maximum generating power. 10 = 1%
21
21 Speed ref Speed reference source and scaling settings; motor
potentiometer settings.
21.01 Speed ref1 sel Selects the source for speed reference 1. See also parameter
21.03 Speed ref1 func.
Zero Zero speed reference. 0
Freq in 02.20 Freq in (see page 96). 1073742356

Parameters 153
Panel 02.34 Panel ref (see page 101). 1073742370
Mot pot 03.18 Speed ref pot (see page 101). 1073742610
93).
-
21.02 Speed ref2 sel Selects the source for speed reference 2.
Freq in 02.20 Freq in (see page 96). 1073742356
Panel 02.34 Panel ref (see page 101). 1073742370
Mot pot 03.18 Speed ref pot (see page 101). 1073742610
93).
-
21.03 Speed ref1 func Selects a mathematical function between the reference
sources selected by parameters 21.01 Speed ref1 sel and
21.02 Speed ref2 sel to be used as speed reference 1.
Ref1 Signal selected by 21.01 Speed ref1 sel is used as speed
reference 1 as such.
0
Add The sum of the reference sources is used as speed reference
1.
1
Sub The subtraction ([21.01 Speed ref1 sel] - [21.02 Speed ref2
sel]) of the reference sources is used as speed reference 1.
2
Mul The multiplication of the reference sources is used as speed
reference 1.
3
Min The smaller of the reference sources is used as speed
reference 1.
4
Max The greater of the reference sources is used as speed
reference 1.
5
21.04 Speed ref1/2 sel Configures the selection between speed references 1 and 2.
(The sources for the references are defined by parameters
21.01 Speed ref1 sel and 21.02 Speed ref2 sel respectively.)
0 = Speed reference 1
1 = Speed reference 2

154 Parameters
Pointer
21.05 Speed share Defines the scaling factor for speed reference 1/2 (speed
reference 1 or 2 is multiplied by the defined value). Speed
reference 1 or 2 is selected by parameter 21.04 Speed ref1/2
sel.
-8.000 …8.000 Speed reference scaling factor. 1000 = 1
21.07 Speed ref jog1 Defines the speed reference for jogging function 1. For more
information on jogging, see page 63.
-30000 … 30000
rpm
Speed reference for jogging function 1. 1 = 1 rpm
21.08 Speed ref jog2 Defines the speed reference for jogging function 2. For more
information on jogging, see page 63.
-30000 … 30000
rpm
Speed reference for jogging function 2. 1 = 1 rpm
21.09 SpeedRef min abs Defines the absolute minimum limit for the speed reference.
0 … 30000 rpm Absolute minimum limit for speed reference. 1 = 1 rpm
21.10 Mot pot func Selects whether the value of the motor potentiometer is
retained upon drive power-off.
Reset Drive power-off resets the value of the motor potentiometer. 0
Store The value of the motor potentiometer is retained over drive
power-off.
1
21.11 Mot pot up Selects the source of motor potentiometer up signal.
Pointer
20.01
Maximum speed
21.09
SpeedRef min abs
-(21.09
SpeedRef min abs)
20.02
Minimum speed
Speed reference
Limited speed reference

Parameters 155
21.12 Mot pot down Selects the source of motor potentiometer down signal.
Pointer
22
22 Speed ref ramp Speed reference ramp settings.
22.01 Acc/Dec sel Selects the source that switches between the two sets of
acceleration/deceleration times defined by parameters
22.02…22.05.
0 = Acceleration time 1 and deceleration time 1 are in force
1 = Acceleration time 2 and deceleration time 2 are in force.
Pointer
22.02 Acc time1 Defines acceleration time 1 as the time required for the speed
to change from zero to the speed value defined by parameter
19.01 Speed scaling.
If the speed reference increases faster than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the acceleration
rate.
If the speed reference increases slower than the set
acceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference
signal.
If the acceleration time is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the acceleration in order not to exceed
the drive torque limits.
0.000 … 1800.000
s
Acceleration time 1. 1000 = 1 s

156 Parameters
22.03 Dec time1 Defines deceleration time 1 as the time required for the speed
to change from the speed value defined by parameter 19.01
Speed scaling to zero.
If the speed reference decreases slower than the set
deceleration rate, the motor speed will follow the reference
signal.
If the reference changes faster than the set deceleration rate,
the motor speed will follow the deceleration rate.
If the deceleration time is set too short, the drive will
automatically prolong the deceleration in order not to exceed
drive torque limits. If there is any doubt about the deceleration
time being too short, ensure that the DC overvoltage control
is on (parameter 47.01 Overvolt ctrl).
Note: If a short deceleration time is needed for a high inertia
application, the drive should be equipped with an electric
braking option e.g. with a brake chopper (built-in) and a brake
resistor.
0.000 … 1800.000
s
Deceleration time 1. 1000 = 1 s
22.04 Acc time2 Defines acceleration time 2. See parameter 22.02 Acc time1.
0.000 … 1800.000
s
Acceleration time 2. 1000 = 1 s
22.05 Dec time2 Defines deceleration time 2. See parameter 22.03 Dec time1.
0.000 … 1800.000
s
Deceleration time 2. 1000 = 1 s

Parameters 157
22.06 Shape time acc1 Defines the shape of the acceleration ramp at the beginning
of the acceleration.
0.000 s: Linear ramp. Suitable for steady acceleration or
deceleration and for slow ramps.
0.001…1000.000 s: S-curve ramp. S-curve ramps are ideal
for lifting applications. The S-curve consists of symmetrical
curves at both ends of the ramp and a linear part in between.
Acceleration:
Deceleration:
0.000 … 1800.000
s
Ramp shape at start of acceleration. 1000 = 1 s
22.07 Shape time acc2 Defines the shape of the acceleration ramp at the end of the
acceleration. See parameter 22.06 Shape time acc1.
0.000 … 1800.000
s
Ramp shape at end of acceleration. 1000 = 1 s
22.08 Shape time dec1 Defines the shape of the deceleration ramp at the beginning
of the deceleration. See parameter 22.06 Shape time acc1.
0.000 … 1800.000
s
Ramp shape at start of deceleration. 1000 = 1 s
S-curve ramp:
Par. 22.07 > 0 s
Linear ramp:
Par. 22.06 = 0 s
Linear ramp:
Par. 22.07 = 0 s
S-curve ramp:
Par. 22.06 > 0 s
Speed
Time
S-curve ramp:
Par. 22.08 > 0 s
Linear ramp:
Par. 22.09 = 0 s
Linear ramp:
Par. 22.08 = 0 s
S-curve ramp:
Par. 22.09 > 0 s
Speed
Time

158 Parameters
22.09 Shape time dec2 Defines the shape of the deceleration ramp at the end of the
deceleration. See parameter 22.06 Shape time acc1.
0.000 … 1800.000
s
Ramp shape at end of deceleration. 1000 = 1 s
22.10 Acc time jogging Defines the acceleration time for the jogging function i.e. the
time required for the speed to change from zero to the speed
value defined by parameter 19.01 Speed scaling.
0.000 … 1800.000
s
Acceleration time for jogging. 1000 = 1 s
22.11 Dec time jogging Defines the deceleration time for the jogging function i.e. the
time required for the speed to change from the speed value
defined by parameter 19.01 Speed scaling to zero.
0.000 … 1800.000
s
Deceleration time for jogging. 1000 = 1 s
22.12 Em stop time Defines the time inside which the drive is stopped if an
emergency stop OFF3 is activated (i.e. the time required for
the speed to change from the speed value defined by
parameter 19.01 Speed scaling to zero). Emergency stop
activation source is selected by parameter 10.13 Em stop
off3. Emergency stop can also be activated through fieldbus
(02.22 FBA main cw).
Note: Emergency stop OFF1 uses the active ramp time.
0.000 … 1800.000
s
Emergency stop OFF3 deceleration time. 1000 = 1 s
23
23 Speed ctrl Speed controller settings. For an autotune function, see
parameter 23.20 PI tune mode.
23.01 Proport gain Defines the proportional gain (Kp) of the speed controller. Too
great a gain may cause speed oscillation. The figure below
shows the speed controller output after an error step when
the error remains constant.
If gain is set to 1, a 10% change in error value (reference -
actual value) causes the speed controller output to change by
10%.
Note: This parameter is automatically set by the speed
controller autotune function. See parameter 23.20 PI tune
mode.
0.00 … 200.00 Proportional gain for speed controller. 100 = 1
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time = 0
TD= Derivation time = 0
%
Controller
output = Kp × e
Time
e = Error value
Controller output
Error value

Parameters 159
23.02 Integration time Defines the integration time of the speed controller. The
integration time defines the rate at which the controller output
changes when the error value is constant and the
proportional gain of the speed controller is 1. The shorter the
integration time, the faster the continuous error value is
corrected. Too short an integration time makes the control
unstable.
If parameter value is set to zero, the I-part of the controller is
disabled.
Anti-windup stops the integrator if the controller output is
limited. See 06.05 Limit word1.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an
error step when the error remains constant.
controller autotune function. See parameter 23.20 PI tune
mode.
0.00 … 600.00 s Integration time for speed controller. 100 = 1 s
Kp × e
Kp × e
%
e = Error value
Time
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time = 0
Controller output
TI

160 Parameters
23.03 Derivation time Defines the derivation time of the speed controller. Derivative
action boosts the controller output if the error value changes.
The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller
output is boosted during the change. If the derivation time is
set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise
as a PID controller. The derivation makes the control more
responsive for disturbances.
The speed error derivative must be filtered with a low pass
filter to eliminate disturbances.
The figure below shows the speed controller output after an
error step when the error remains constant.
Note: Changing this parameter value is recommended only if
a pulse encoder is used.
0.000 … 10.000 s Derivation time for speed controller. 1000 = 1 s
23.04 Deriv filt time Defines the derivation filter time constant. See parameter
23.03 Derivation time.
0.0 … 1000.0 ms Derivation filter time constant. 10 = 1 ms
Gain = Kp = 1
TI = Integration time > 0
TD= Derivation time > 0
Ts= Sample time period = 250 µs
Δe = Error value change between two samples
Kp × TD ×
Δe
Ts
Controller output
e = Error value
Error value
TimeTI
Kp × e
Kp × e
%

Parameters 161
23.05 Acc comp DerTime Defines the derivation time for acceleration/(deceleration)
compensation. In order to compensate inertia during
acceleration, a derivative of the reference is added to the
output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative
action is described for parameter 23.03 Derivation time.
Note: As a general rule, set this parameter to the value
between 50 and 100% of the sum of the mechanical time
constants of the motor and the driven machine.
The figure below shows the speed responses when a high
inertia load is accelerated along a ramp.
No acceleration compensation:
Acceleration compensation:
0.00 … 600.00 s Acceleration compensation derivation time. 100 = 1 s
23.06 Acc comp Ftime Defines the derivation filter time constant for the
acceleration(/deceleration) compensation. See parameters
23.03 Derivation time and 23.05 Acc comp DerTime.
controller autotune function (when performed in User mode).
See parameter 23.20 PI tune mode.
0.0 … 1000.0 ms Derivation filter time constant for acceleration compensation. 10 = 1 ms
Time
%
Speed reference
Actual speed
Time
%
Speed reference
Actual speed

162 Parameters
23.07 Speed err Ftime Defines the time constant of the speed error low pass filter.
If the used speed reference changes rapidly (like in a servo
application), the possible interferences in the speed
measurement can be filtered with the speed error filter.
Reducing the ripple with filter may cause speed controller
tuning problems. A long filter time constant and fast
acceleration time contradict one another. A very long filter
time results in unstable control.
0.0 … 1000.0 ms Speed error filtering time constant. 0 = filtering disabled. 10 = 1 ms
23.08 Speed additive Defines a speed reference to be added after ramping.
Note: For safety reasons, the additive is not applied when
stop functions are active.
Zero Zero speed additive. 0
93).
-
23.09 Max torq sp ctrl Defines the maximum speed controller output torque.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Maximum speed controller output torque. 10 = 1%
23.10 Min torq sp ctrl Defines the minimum speed controller output torque.
-1600.0 … 1600.0% Minimum speed controller output torque. 10 = 1%
23.11 SpeedErr winFunc Enables or disables speed error window control.
Speed error window control forms a speed supervision
function for a torque-controlled drive. It supervises the speed
error value (speed reference – actual speed). In the normal
operating range, window control keeps the speed controller
input at zero. The speed controller is evoked only if
• the speed error exceeds the upper boundary of the window
(parameter 23.12 SpeedErr win hi), or
• the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds the
lower boundary of the window (23.13 SpeedErr win lo).
When the speed error moves outside the window, the
exceeding part of the error value is connected to the speed
controller. The speed controller produces a reference term
relative to the input and gain of the speed controller
(parameter 23.01 Proport gain) which the torque selector
adds to the torque reference. The result is used as the
internal torque reference for the drive.
Example: In a load loss condition, the internal torque
reference of the drive is decreased to prevent an excessive
rise of the motor speed. If window control were inactive, the
motor speed would rise until a speed limit of the drive were
reached.
Disabled Speed error window control inactive. 0

Parameters 163
Absolute Speed error window control active. The boundaries defined
by parameters 23.12 SpeedErr win hi and 23.13 SpeedErr
win lo are absolute.
1
Relative Speed error window control active. The boundaries defined
by parameters 23.12 SpeedErr win hi and 23.13 SpeedErr
win lo are relative to speed reference.
2
23.12 SpeedErr win hi Defines the upper boundary of the speed error window.
Depending on setting of parameter 23.11 SpeedErr winFunc,
this is either an absolute value or relative to speed reference.
0 … 3000 rpm Upper boundary of speed error window. 1 = 1 rpm
23.13 SpeedErr win lo Defines the lower boundary of the speed error window.
Depending on setting of parameter 23.11 SpeedErr winFunc,
this is either an absolute value or relative to speed reference.
0 … 3000 rpm Lower boundary of speed error window. 1 = 1 rpm
23.14 Drooping rate Defines the droop rate (in percent of the motor nominal
speed). The drooping slightly decreases the drive speed as
the drive load increases. The actual speed decrease at a
certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and
the drive load (= torque reference / speed controller output).
At 100% speed controller output, drooping is at its nominal
level, i.e. equal to the value of this parameter. The drooping
effect decreases linearly to zero along with the decreasing
load.
Droop rate can be used e.g. to adjust the load sharing in a
Master/Follower application run by several drives. In a
Master/Follower application the motor shafts are coupled to
each other.
The correct droop rate for a process must be found out case
by case in practice.
0.00 … 100.00% Droop rate. 100 = 1%
Motor speed in
% of nominal
100%
Speed decrease = Speed controller output × Drooping × Max. speed
Example: Speed controller output is 50%, droop rate is 1%, maximum speed of the drive is
1500 rpm.
Speed decrease = 0.50 × 0.01 × 1500 rpm = 7.5 rpm.
100%
23.14 Drooping rate
No drooping
Drooping
Speed controller
output / %
Drive load

164 Parameters
23.15 PI adapt max sp Maximum actual speed for speed controller adaptation.
Speed controller gain and integration time can be adapted
according to actual speed. This is done by multiplying the
gain (23.01 Proport gain) and integration time (23.02
Integration time) by coefficients at certain speeds. The
coefficients are defined individually for both gain and
integration time.
When the actual speed is below or equal to 23.16 PI adapt
min sp, 23.01 Proport gain and 23.02 Integration time are
multiplied by 23.17 Pcoef at min sp and 23.18 Icoef at min sp
respectively.
When the actual speed is equal to or exceeds 23.15 PI adapt
max sp, no adaptation takes place; in other words, 23.01
Proport gain and 23.02 Integration time are used as such.
Between 23.16 PI adapt min sp and 23.15 PI adapt max sp,
the coefficients are calculated linearly on the basis of the
breakpoints.
0 … 30000 rpm Maximum actual speed for speed controller adaptation. 1 = 1 rpm
23.16 PI adapt min sp Minimum actual speed for speed controller adaptation. See
parameter 23.15 PI adapt max sp.
0 … 30000 rpm Minimum actual speed for speed controller adaptation. 1 = 1 rpm
23.17 Pcoef at min sp Proportional gain coefficient at minimum actual speed. See
0.000 … 10.000 Proportional gain coefficient at minimum actual speed. 1000 = 1
23.18 Icoef at min sp Integration time coefficient at minimum actual speed. See
0.000 … 10.000 Integration time coefficient at minimum actual speed. 1000 = 1
Coefficient for Kp or TI
Kp = Proportional gain
TI = Integration time
Actual speed
(rpm)
23.17 Pcoef at min sp or
23.18 Icoef at min sp
23.16 PI adapt
min sp
23.15 PI adapt
max sp
1.000
0

Parameters 165
23.20 PI tune mode Activates the speed controller autotune function.
The autotune will automatically set parameters 23.01 Proport
gain and 23.02 Integration time, as well as 01.31 Mech time
const. If the User autotune mode is chosen, also 23.07 Speed
err Ftime is automatically set.
The status of the autotune routine is shown by parameter
06.03 Speed ctrl stat.
WARNING! The motor will reach the torque and
current limits during the autotune routine. ENSURE
THAT IT IS SAFE TO RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE
PERFORMING THE AUTOTUNE ROUTINE!
Notes:
• Before using the autotune function, the following
parameters should be set:
• All parameters adjusted during the start-up as described
in the ACS850 (Standard Control Program) Quick Start-
up Guide
• 19.01 Speed scaling
• 19.03 MotorSpeed filt
• 19.06 Zero speed limit
• Speed reference ramp settings in group 22 Speed ref
ramp
• 23.07 Speed err Ftime.
• The drive must be in local control mode and stopped
before an autotune is requested.
• After requesting an autotune with this parameter, start the
drive within 20 seconds.
• Wait until the autotune routine is completed (this parameter
has reverted to the value Done). The routine can be
aborted by stopping the drive.
See also section Speed controller tuning (page 74).
Done No tuning has been requested (normal operation).
The parameter also reverts to this value after an autotune is
completed.
0
Smooth Request speed controller autotune with preset settings for
smooth operation.
1
Middle Request speed controller autotune with preset settings for
medium-tight operation.
2
Tight Request speed controller autotune with preset settings for
tight operation.
3
User Request speed controller autotune with the settings defined
by parameters 23.21 Tune bandwidth and 23.22 Tune
damping.
4
23.21 Tune bandwidth Speed controller bandwidth for autotune procedure, User
mode (see parameter 23.20 PI tune mode).
A larger bandwidth results in more restricted speed controller
settings.
00.00 … 2000.00
Hz
Tune bandwidth for User autotune mode. 100 = 1 Hz
23.22 Tune damping Speed controller damping for autotune procedure, User mode
(see parameter 23.20 PI tune mode).
Higher damping results in safer and smoother operation.
0.0 … 200.0 Speed controller damping for User autotune mode. 10 = 1

166 Parameters
24
24 Torque ref Torque reference selection, limitation and modification
settings.
24.01 Torq ref1 sel Selects the source for torque reference 1.
Zero No torque reference selected. 0
93).
-
24.02 Torq ref add sel Selects the source for the torque reference addition. Because
the reference is added after the torque reference selection,
this parameter can be used in speed and torque control
modes.
Note: For safety reasons, this reference addition is not
applied when stop functions are active.
Zero No torque reference addition selected. 0
93).
-
24.03 Maximum torq ref Defines the maximum torque reference.
0.0 … 1000.0% Maximum torque reference. 10 = 1%
24.04 Minimum torq ref Defines the minimum torque reference.
-1000.0 … 0.0% Minimum torque reference. 10 = 1%
24.05 Load share Scales the torque reference to a required level (torque
reference is multiplied by the selected value).
-8.000 … 8.000 Torque reference scaling. 1000 = 1
24.06 Torq ramp up Defines the torque reference ramp-up time, i.e. the time for
the reference to increase from zero to the nominal motor
torque.
0.000 … 60.000 s Torque reference ramp-up time. 1000 = 1 s
24.07 Torq ramp down Defines the torque reference ramp-down time, i.e. the time for
the reference to decrease from the nominal motor torque to
zero.
0.000 … 60.000 s Torque reference ramp-down time. 1000 = 1 s

Parameters 167
25
25 Critical speed Sets up critical speeds, or ranges of speeds, that are avoided
due to, for example, mechanical resonance problems.
25.01 Crit speed sel Enables/disables the critical speeds function.
Example: A fan has vibrations in the range of 540 to 690 rpm
and 1380 to 1560 rpm. To make the drive to jump over the
vibration speed ranges:
• activate the critical speeds function,
• set the critical speed ranges as in the figure below.
Disable Critical speeds are disabled. 0
Enable Critical speeds are enabled. 1
25.02 Crit speed1 lo Defines the low limit for critical speed range 1.
Note: This value must be less than or equal to the value of
25.03 Crit speed1 hi.
-30000 … 30000
rpm
Low limit for critical speed 1. 1 = 1 rpm
25.03 Crit speed1 hi Defines the high limit for critical speed range 1.
Note: This value must be greater than or equal to the value of
25.02 Crit speed1 lo.
-30000 … 30000
rpm
High limit for critical speed 1. 1 = 1 rpm
-30000 … 30000
rpm
540
690
1380
1560
1 Par. 25.02 = 540 rpm
2 Par. 25.03 = 690 rpm
3 Par. 25.04 = 1380 rpm
4 Par. 25.05 = 1590 rpm
1 2 3 4
Motor speed
(rpm)
Drive speed
(rpm)
Drive speed
(rpm)

168 Parameters
-30000 … 30000
rpm
-30000 … 30000
rpm
-30000 … 30000
rpm
26
26 Constant speeds Constant speed selection and values. An active constant
speed overrides the drive speed reference. See section
Constant speeds on page 59.
26.01 Const speed func Determines how constant speeds are selected, and whether
the rotation direction signal is considered or not when
applying a constant speed.
26.02 Const speed sel1 When bit 0 of parameter 26.01 Const speed func is 0
(Separate), selects a source that activates constant speed 1.
When bit 0 of parameter 26.01 Const speed func is 1
(Packed), this parameter and parameters 26.03 Const speed
sel2 and 26.04 Const speed sel3 select three sources whose
states activate constant speeds as follows:
0 Const speed
mode
1 = Packed: 7 constant speeds are selectable using the three sources
defined by parameters 26.02, 26.03 and 26.04.
0 = Separate: Constant speeds 1, 2 and 3 are separately activated by
the sources defined by parameters 26.02, 26.03 and 26.04 respectively.
In case of conflict, the constant speed with the smaller number takes
priority.
1 Dir ena 1 = Start dir: To determine running direction for a constant speed, the
sign of the constant speed setting (parameters 26.06…26.12) is
multiplied by the direction signal (forward: +1, reverse: -1). For example,
if the direction signal is reverse and the active constant speed is
negative, the drive will run in the forward direction.
0 = Accord Par: The running direction for the constant speed is
determined by the sign of the constant speed setting (parameters
26.06…26.12).
Source defined
by par. 26.02
Source defined
by par. 26.03
Source defined
by par. 26.04
Constant speed active
0 0 0 None
1 0 0 Constant speed 1

Parameters 169
Pointer
sel1 and 26.04 Const speed sel3 select three sources that
are used to activate constant speeds. See table at parameter
26.02 Const speed sel1.
Pointer
sel1 and 26.03 Const speed sel2 select three sources that
are used to activate constant speeds. See table at parameter
26.02 Const speed sel1.
Pointer
26.06 Const speed1 Defines constant speed 1.
-30000 … 30000
rpm
Constant speed 1. 1 = 1 rpm
-30000 … 30000
rpm
-30000 … 30000
rpm

170 Parameters
-30000 … 30000
rpm
-30000 … 30000
rpm
-30000 … 30000
rpm
-30000 … 30000
rpm
27
27 Process PID Configuration of process PID control. See also section
Process PID control on page 70.
27.01 PID setpoint sel Selects the source of setpoint (reference) for the PID
controller.
Zero Zero reference. 0
93).
-
27.02 PID fbk func Defines how the final process feedback is calculated from the
two sources selected by parameters 27.03 PID fbk1 src and
27.04 PID fbk2 src.
Act1 Process feedback 1 used. 0
Add Sum of feedback 1 and feedback 2. 1
Sub Feedback 2 subtracted from feedback 1. 2
Mul Feedback 1 multiplied by feedback 2. 3
div Feedback 1 divided by feedback 2. 4
Max Greater of the two feedback sources used. 5
Min Smaller of the two feedbacks sources used. 6
Sqrt sub Square root of (feedback 1 – feedback 2). 7
Sqrt add Square root of feedback 1 + square root of feedback 2. 8
27.03 PID fbk1 src Selects the source of process feedback 1.
Zero Zero feedback. 0

Parameters 171
93).
-
27.04 PID fbk2 src Selects the source of process feedback 2.
Zero Zero feedback. 0
93).
-
27.05 PID fbk1 max Maximum value for process feedback 1.
-32768.00 …
32768.00
Maximum value for process feedback 1. 100 = 1
27.06 PID fbk1 min Minimum value for process feedback 1.
-32768.00 …
32768.00
Minimum value for process feedback 1. 100 = 1
27.07 PID fbk2 max Maximum value for process feedback 2.
-32768.00 …
32768.00
Maximum value for process feedback 2. 100 = 1
27.08 PID fbk2 min Minimum value for process feedback 2.
-32768.00 …
32768.00
Minimum value for process feedback 2. 100 = 1
27.09 PID fbk gain Multiplier for scaling the final feedback value for process PID
controller.
-32.768 … 32.767 PID feedback gain. 1000 = 1

172 Parameters
27.10 PID fbk ftime Defines the time constant for the filter through which the
process feedback is connected to the PID controller.
27.12 PID gain Defines the gain for the process PID controller. See
parameter 27.13 PID integ time.
0.00 … 100.00 Gain for PID controller. 100 = 1
27.13 PID integ time Defines the integration time for the process PID controller.
Note: Setting this value to 0 disables the “I” part, turning the
PID controller into a PD controller.
0.00 … 320.00 s Integration time. 100 = 1 s
27.14 PID deriv time Defines the derivation time of the process PID controller. The
derivative component at the controller output is calculated on
basis of two consecutive error values (EK-1 and EK) according
to the following formula:
PID DERIV TIME × (EK - EK-1)/TS, in which
TS = 12 ms sample time
E = Error = Process reference - process feedback.
0.00 … 10.00 s Derivation time. 100 = 1 s
63
%
100
T
t
O = I × (1 - e-t/T
)
O = filter output
t = time
Unfiltered signal
Filtered signal
Ti
O
I
G × I
G × I
I = controller input (error)
O = controller output
G = gain
Ti = integration time
Time
Error/Controller output

Parameters 173
27.15 PID deriv filter Defines the time constant of the 1-pole filter used to smooth
the derivative component of the process PID controller.
27.16 PID error inv PID error inversion. When the source selected by this
parameter is on, the error (process setpoint – process
feedback) at the PID controller input is inverted.
Pointer
27.17 PID mode Activates the PID controller output trimming function. Using
the trim it is possible to apply a correction factor to the drive
reference.
Direct Trimming not used. 0
Prop speed PID controller output is trimmed in proportion to speed. 1
Prop torque PID controller output is trimmed in proportion to torque. 2
27.18 PID maximum Defines the maximum limit for the PID controller output. Using
the minimum and maximum limits, it is possible to restrict the
operation range.
-32768.0 …
32768.0
Maximum limit for PID controller output. 10 = 1
27.19 PID minimum Defines the minimum limit for the PID controller output. See
parameter 27.18 PID maximum.
-32768.0 …
32768.0
Minimum limit for PID controller output. 10 = 1
27.22 Sleep mode Activates the sleep function.
No Sleep function inactive. 0
Internal The sleep function is activated and deactivated automatically
as defined by parameters 27.23 Sleep level and 27.24 Sleep
delay. The sleep and wake-up delays (27.24 Sleep delay and
27.26 Wake up delay) are effective.
1
External The sleep function is activated by the source selected by
parameter 27.27 Sleep ena. The sleep and wake-up delays
(27.24 Sleep delay and 27.26 Wake up delay) are effective.
2
63
%
100
T
t
O = I × (1 - e-t/T)
O = filter output
t = time
Unfiltered signal
Filtered signal

174 Parameters
27.23 Sleep level Defines the start limit for the sleep function. If the motor
speed is below this value longer than the sleep delay (27.24
Sleep delay), the drive shifts to sleep mode.
-32768.0 …
32768.0
Sleep start level. 10 = 1
27.24 Sleep delay Defines the delay for the sleep start function. See parameter
27.23 Sleep level. When the motor speed falls below the
sleep level, the counter starts. When the motor speed
exceeds the sleep level, the counter resets.
0.0 … 360.0 s Sleep start delay. 10 = 1 s
27.25 Wake up level Defines the wake-up limit for the sleep function. The drive
wakes up if the process actual value is below a set level
(27.23 Sleep level) longer than the wake-up delay (27.24
Sleep delay).
0.0 … 32768.0 Wake-up level. 10 = 1
27.26 Wake up delay Defines the wake-up delay for the sleep function. See
parameter 27.25 Wake up level. When the process actual
value falls below the wake-up level, the wake-up counter
starts. When the process actual value exceeds the wake-up
level, the counter resets.
0.0 … 360.0 s Wake-up delay. 10 = 1 s
27.27 Sleep ena Defines a source that can be used to activate sleep mode
when parameter 27.22 Sleep mode is set to External.
Pointer
30
30 Fault functions Selects the behavior of the drive upon various fault situations.
30.01 External fault Selects an source for an external fault signal.
0 = External fault trip
1 = No external fault
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
bit 5).
1074070019

Parameters 175
Pointer
30.02 Speed ref safe Defines the safe speed reference that is used with the Spd ref
Safe setting of supervision parameters 13.32 AI superv func,
30.03 Local ctrl loss or 50.02 Comm loss func upon an alarm.
This speed is used when the parameter is set to Spd ref Safe.
-30000 … 30000
rpm
Safe speed reference. 1 = 1 rpm
30.03 Local ctrl loss Selects how the drive reacts to a control panel or PC tool
Fault Drive trips on fault LOCAL CTRL LOSS. 1
Spd ref Safe The drive generates alarm LOCAL CTRL LOSS and sets the
speed to the speed defined by parameter 30.02 Speed ref
safe.
2
Last speed The drive generates alarm LOCAL CTRL LOSS and freezes
the speed to the level the drive was operating at. The speed
is determined by the average speed over the previous 10
seconds.
3
30.04 Mot phase loss Selects how the drive reacts when a motor phase loss is
detected.
Fault The drive trips on fault MOTOR PHASE. 1
30.05 Earth fault Selects how the drive reacts when an earth fault or current
unbalance is detected in the motor or the motor cable.
Warning The drive generates alarm EARTH FAULT. 1
Fault The drive trips on fault EARTH FAULT. 2
30.06 Suppl phs loss Selects how the drive reacts when a supply phase loss is
detected.
Fault The drive trips on fault SUPPLY PHASE. 1

176 Parameters
30.07 Sto diagnostic Selects how the drive reacts when the drive detects that the
Safe Torque Off function is active while the drive is stopped.
The Safe Torque Off function disables the control voltage of
the power semiconductors of the drive output stage, thus
preventing the inverter from generating the voltage required
to rotate the motor. For the wiring of the Safe Torque Off
circuit, see the appropriate hardware manual.
Notes:
• This parameter is for supervision only. The Safe Torque Off
function can activate even when this parameter is set to
No.
• Fault STO 1 LOST / STO 2 LOST is activated if safety
circuit signal 1/2 is lost when the drive is in stopped state
and this parameter is set to Alarm or No.
Fault The drive trips on fault SAFE TORQUE OFF. 1
Alarm The drive generates alarm SAFE TORQUE OFF. 2
30.08 Cross connection Selects how the drive reacts to incorrect input power and
motor cable connection (i.e. input power cable is connected
to drive motor connection).
Fault The drive trips on fault CABLE CROSS CON. 1
30.09 Stall function Selects how the drive reacts to a motor stall condition. The
protection wakes up if
• the drive is at stall current limit (defined by parameter
30.10 Stall curr lim) or 06.05 Limit word1 differs from 0
• the output frequency is below the level set by parameter
30.11 Stall freq hi, and
• the conditions above have been valid longer than the time
set by parameter 30.12 Stall time.
See section Stall protection (parameters 30.09…30.12) on
page 73.
30.10 Stall curr lim Stall current limit in percent of the nominal current of the
motor. See parameter 30.09 Stall function.
0.0 … 1600.0% Stall current limit. 10 = 1%
30.11 Stall freq hi Stall frequency limit. See parameter 30.09 Stall function.
0.5 … 1000.0 Hz Stall frequency limit. 10 = 1 Hz
30.12 Stall time Stall time. See parameter 30.09 Stall function.
0 … 3600 s Stall time. 1 = 1 s
Bit Function
0 Ena sup (Enable supervision)
0 = Disabled: Supervision disabled.
1 = Enabled: Supervision enabled.
1 Ena warn (Enable warning)
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled: Drive generates an alarm upon a stall condition.
2 Ena fault (Enable fault)
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled: Drive trips on a fault upon a stall condition.

Parameters 177
31
31 Mot therm prot Motor temperature measurement and thermal protection
settings.
31.01 Mot temp1 prot Selects how the drive reacts when motor overtemperature is
detected by motor thermal protection 1.
No Motor thermal protection 1 inactive. 0
Alarm The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMPERATURE when
the temperature exceeds the alarm level defined by
parameter 31.03 Mot temp1 almLim.
1
Fault The drive generates alarm MOTOR TEMPERATURE or trips
on fault MOTOR OVERTEMP when the temperature exceeds
the alarm/fault level defined by parameter 31.03 Mot temp1
almLim / 31.04 Mot temp1 fltLim (whichever is lower).
2
31.02 Mot temp1 src Selects the means of temperature measurement for motor
thermal protection 1. When overtemperature is detected the
drive reacts as defined by parameter 31.01 Mot temp1 prot.
Note: If one FEN-xx module is used, parameter setting must
be either KTY 1st FEN or PTC 1st FEN. The FEN-xx module
can be in either Slot 1 or Slot 2.
Estimated The temperature is supervised based on the motor thermal
protection model, which uses the motor thermal time constant
(parameter 31.14 Mot therm time) and the motor load curve
(parameters 31.10…31.12). User tuning is typically needed
only if the ambient temperature differs from the normal
operating temperature specified for the motor.
The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region
above the motor load curve. The motor temperature
decreases if it operates in the region below the motor load
curve (if the motor is overheated).
WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if
it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt.
0
KTY 1st FEN The temperature is supervised using a KTY84 sensor
connected to encoder interface module FEN-xx installed in
drive Slot 1/2. If two encoder interface modules are used,
encoder module connected to Slot 1 is used for the
temperature supervision.
Note: This selection does not apply to FEN-01.
2
KTY 2nd FEN The temperature is supervised using a KTY84 sensor
3
PTC JCU The temperature is supervised using 1…3 PTC sensors
connected to drive thermistor input TH.
4
PTC 1st FEN The temperature is supervised using a PTC sensor
5

178 Parameters
PTC 2nd FEN The temperature is supervised using a PTC sensor
6
Pt100 JCU x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor
connected to analog input AI1 and analog output AO1 on the
JCU Control Unit of the drive.
7
Pt100 JCU x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors
8
Pt100 JCU x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors
connected to analog input AI1 and analog output AI1 on the
9
Pt100 Ext x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor
connected to the first available analog input and analog
output on I/O extensions installed on the drive.
10
Pt100 Ext x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors
11
Pt100 Ext x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors
12
31.03 Mot temp1 almLim Defines the alarm limit for motor thermal protection 1 (when
parameter 31.01 Mot temp1 prot is set to either Alarm or
Fault).
0 … 200 °C Motor overtemperature alarm limit. 1 = 1 °C
31.04 Mot temp1 fltLim Defines the fault limit for the motor thermal protection 1 (when
parameter 31.01 Mot temp1 prot is set to Fault).
0 … 200 °C Motor overtemperature fault limit. 1 = 1 °C
31.05 Mot temp2 prot Selects how the drive reacts when motor overtemperature is
detected by motor temperature protection 2.
No Motor temperature protection 2 inactive. 0
Alarm The drive generates alarm MOTTEMPAL2 when the
temperature exceeds the alarm level defined by parameter
31.07 Mot temp2 almLim.
1
Fault The drive generates alarm MOTTEMPAL2 or trips on fault
MOTTEMP2 when the temperature exceeds the alarm/fault
level defined by parameter 31.07 Mot temp2 almLim / 31.08
Mot temp2 fltLim (whichever is lower).
2

Parameters 179
31.06 Mot temp2 src Selects the means of temperature measurement for motor
thermal protection 2. When overtemperature is detected the
drive reacts as defined by parameter 31.05 Mot temp2 prot.
Note: If one FEN-xx module is used, parameter setting must
be either KTY 1st FEN or PTC 1st FEN. The FEN-xx module
can be in either Slot 1 or Slot 2.
Estimated The temperature is supervised based on the motor thermal
protection model, which uses the motor thermal time constant
(parameter 31.14 Mot therm time) and the motor load curve
(parameters 31.10…31.12). User tuning is typically needed
only if the ambient temperature differs from the normal
operating temperature specified for the motor.
The motor temperature increases if it operates in the region
above the motor load curve. The motor temperature
decreases if it operates in the region below the motor load
curve (if the motor is overheated).
WARNING! The model does not protect the motor if
it does not cool properly due to dust and dirt.
0
KTY 1st FEN The temperature is supervised using a KTY84 sensor
2
KTY 2nd FEN The temperature is supervised using a KTY84 sensor
3
PTC JCU The temperature is supervised using 1…3 PTC sensors
connected to drive thermistor input TH.
4
PTC 1st FEN The temperature is supervised using a PTC sensor
5
PTC 2nd FEN The temperature is supervised using a PTC sensor
6
Pt100 JCU x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor
7
Pt100 JCU x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors
8
Pt100 JCU x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors
connected to analog input AI1 and analog output AI1 on the
9

180 Parameters
Pt100 Ext x1 The temperature is supervised using a Pt100 sensor
10
Pt100 Ext x2 The temperature is supervised using two Pt100 sensors
11
Pt100 Ext x3 The temperature is supervised using three Pt100 sensors
12
31.07 Mot temp2 almLim Defines the alarm limit for the motor thermal protection 2
(when parameter 31.05 Mot temp2 prot is set to either Alarm
or Fault).
0 … 200 °C Motor overtemperature alarm limit. 1 = 1 °C
31.08 Mot temp2 fltLim Defines the fault limit for the motor thermal protection 2 (when
parameter 31.05 Mot temp2 prot is set to Fault).
0 … 200 °C Motor overtemperature fault limit. 1 = 1 °C
31.09 Mot ambient temp Defines the ambient temperature for the thermal protection
mode.
-60 … 100 °C Ambient temperature. 1 = 1 °C
31.10 Mot load curve Defines the load curve together with parameters 31.11 Zero
speed load and 31.12 Break point
When the parameter is set to 100%, the maximum load is
equal to the value of parameter 99.06 Mot nom current
(higher loads heat up the motor). The load curve level should
be adjusted if the ambient temperature differs from the
nominal value.
The load curve is used by the motor thermal protection model
when parameter 31.02 Mot temp1 src is set to Estimated.
50 … 150% Maximum load for the motor load curve. 1 = 1%
50
100
150
31.10
31.12
31.11
I/IN
(%) I = Motor current
IN = Nominal motor current
Drive output
frequency

Parameters 181
31.11 Zero speed load Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 31.10
Mot load curve and 31.12 Break point. Defines the maximum
motor load at zero speed of the load curve. A higher value
can be used if the motor has an external motor fan to boost
the cooling. See the motor manufacturer's recommendations.
See parameter 31.10 Mot load curve.
50 … 150% Zero speed load for the motor load curve. 1 = 1%
31.12 Break point Defines the motor load curve together with parameters 31.10
Mot load curve and 31.11 Zero speed load. Defines the break
point frequency of the load curve i.e. the point at which the
motor load curve begins to decrease from the value of
parameter 31.10 Mot load curve towards the value of
parameter 31.11 Zero speed load.
See parameter 31.10 Mot load curve.
0.01 … 500.00 Hz Break point for the motor load curve. 100 = 1 Hz
31.13 Mot nom tempRise Defines the temperature rise of the motor when the motor is
loaded with nominal current. See the motor manufacturer's
recommendations.
The temperature rise value is used by the motor thermal
protection model when parameter 31.02 Mot temp1 src is set
to Estimated.
0 … 300 °C Temperature rise. 1 = 1 °C
Motor nominal
temperature rise
Temperature
Time
Ambient temperature

182 Parameters
31.14 Mot therm time Defines the thermal time constant for the motor thermal
protection model (i.e. time inside which the temperature has
reached 63% of the nominal temperature). See the motor
manufacturer's recommendations.
The motor thermal protection model is used when parameter
31.02 Mot temp1 src is set to Estimated.
100 … 10000 s Motor thermal time constant. 1 = 1 s
32
32 Automatic reset Defines conditions for automatic fault resets.
32.01 Autoreset sel Selects faults that are automatically reset. The parameter is a
16-bit word with each bit corresponding to a fault type.
Whenever a bit is set to 1, the corresponding fault is
automatically reset.
The bits of the binary number correspond to the following
faults:
32.02 Number of trials Defines the number of automatic fault resets the drive
performs within the time defined by parameter 32.03 Trial
time.
0 … 5 Number of automatic resets. 1 = 1
32.03 Trial time Defines the time for the automatic fault reset function. See
parameter 32.02 Number of trials.
1.0 … 600.0 s Time for automatic resets. 10 = 1 s
100%
63%
100%
Time
Time
Motor thermal time
Motor load
Temperature rise
Bit Fault
0 Overcurrent
1 Overvoltage
2 Undervoltage
3 AI min
4 Line converter
5 External fault

Parameters 183
32.04 Delay time Defines the time that the drive will wait after a fault before
attempting an automatic reset. See parameter 32.01
Autoreset sel.
0.0 … 120.0 s Resetting delay. 10 = 1 s
33
33 Supervision Configuration of signal supervision.
33.01 Superv1 func Selects the mode of supervision 1.
Disabled Supervision 1 not in use. 0
Low When the signal selected by parameter 33.02 Superv1 act
falls below the value of parameter 33.04 Superv1 lo, bit 0 of
06.13 Superv status is activated. To clear the bit, the signal
must exceed the value of parameter 33.03 Superv1 hi.
1
High When the signal selected by parameter 33.02 Superv1 act
exceeds the value of parameter 33.03 Superv1 hi, bit 0 of
must fall below the value of parameter 33.04 Superv1 lo.
2
Abs Low When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter
33.02 Superv1 act falls below the value of parameter 33.04
Superv1 lo, bit 0 of 06.13 Superv status is activated. To clear
the bit, the absolute value of the signal must exceed the value
of parameter 33.03 Superv1 hi.
3
Abs High When the absolute value of the signal selected by parameter
33.02 Superv1 act exceeds the value of parameter 33.03
Superv1 hi, bit 0 of 06.13 Superv status is activated. To clear
the bit, the absolute value of the signal must fall below the
value of parameter 33.04 Superv1 lo.
4
33.02 Superv1 act Selects the signal to be monitored by supervision 1. See
parameter 33.01 Superv1 func.
93).
-

184 Parameters
33.03 Superv1 hi Selects the upper limit for supervision 1. See parameter 33.01
Superv1 func.
-32768.00 …
32768.00
Upper limit for supervision 1. 100 = 1
33.04 Superv1 lo Selects the lower limit for supervision 1. See parameter 33.01
Superv1 func.
-32768.00 …
32768.00
Lower limit for supervision 1. 100 = 1
1
2
3
4
93).
-

Parameters 185
Superv2 func.
-32768.00 …
32768.00
Superv2 func.
-32768.00 …
32768.00
1
2
3
4
93).
-

186 Parameters
Superv3 func.
-32768.00 …
32768.00
Superv3 func.
-32768.00 …
32768.00
34
34 User load curve Definition of user load curve. See also section User-definable
load curve on page 79.
34.01 Overload func Configures the supervision of the upper boundary of the user
load curve.
Bit Function
1 Input value sel (Input value selection)
0 = Current: Current is supervised.
1 = Torque: Torque is supervised.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled: Drive generates an alarm when the curve is exceeded.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled: Drive trips on a fault when the curve is exceeded.
4 Ena lim integ (Enable limit integration)
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled: Integration time defined by parameter 34.18 Load integ time is used. After
the supervision is evoked, the current or torque is limited by the upper boundary of the
load curve.
5 Ena lim always (Enable limit always)
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled: The current or torque is always limited by the upper boundary of the load
curve.

Parameters 187
34.02 Underload func Configures the supervision of the lower boundary of the user
load curve.
34.03 Load freq1 Drive output frequency at point 1 of user load curve.
1 … 500 Hz Frequency at point 1. 1 = 1 Hz
34.08 Load low lim1 Minimum load (current or torque) at point 1 of user load
curve.
0 … 1600% Minimum load at point 1. 1 = 1%
curve.
curve.
curve.
curve.
34.13 Load high lim1 Maximum load (current or torque) at point 1 of user load
curve.
0 … 1600% Maximum load at point 1. 1 = 1%
Bit Function
1 Input value sel (Input value selection)
0 = Current: Current is supervised.
1 = Torque: Torque is supervised.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled: Drive generates an alarm when the load remains below the curve for longer
than the time defined by parameter 34.20 Underload time.
0 = Disabled
1 = Enabled: Drive trips on a fault when the load remains below the curve for longer than
the time defined by parameter 34.20 Underload time.

188 Parameters
curve.
curve.
curve.
curve.
34.18 Load integ time Integration time used in limit supervision whenever enabled
by parameter 34.01/34.02.
0 … 10000 s Integration time. 1 = 1 s
34.19 Load cool time Defines the cooling time. The output of the overload
integrator is set to zero if the load stays continuously below
the upper boundary of the user load curve.
0 … 10000 s Load cooling time. 1 = 1 s
34.20 Underload time Time for the underload function. See parameter 34.02
Underload func.
0 … 10000 s Underload time. 1 = 1 s
35
35 Process variable Selection and modification of process variables for display as
parameters 04.06 … 04.08.
35.01 Signal1 param Selects a signal to be provided as parameter 04.06 Process
var1.
93).
-

Parameters 189
35.02 Signal1 max Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds
to the maximum display value defined by parameter 35.06
Proc var1 max.
-32768…32768 Real signal value corresponding to maximum process
variable 1 value.
1 = 1
35.03 Signal1 min Defines the real value of the selected signal that corresponds
to the minimum display value defined by parameter 35.07
Proc var1 min. See diagram at parameter 35.02 Signal1 max.
-32768…32768 Real signal value corresponding to minimum process variable
1 value.
1 = 1
35.04 Proc var1 dispf Scaling for process variable 1. This setting also scales the
value for fieldbus.
0 1 = 1 0
1 10 = 1 1
2 100 = 1 2
3 1000 = 1 3
4 10000 = 1 4
5 100000 = 1 5
35.05 Proc var1 unit Specifies the unit for parameter 04.06 Process var1 (process
variable 1).
0 None 0
1 A 1
2 V 2
3 Hz 3
4 % 4
5 s 5
6 h 6
7 rpm 7
8 kh 8
9 C 9
10 lbft 10
11 mA 11
12 mV 12
35.03
35.06
35.07
35.02
04.06 Process var1
Signal selected by
35.01 Signal1 param

190 Parameters
13 kW 13
14 W 14
15 kWh 15
16 F 16
17 hp 17
18 MWh 18
19 m/s 19
20 m3/h 20
21 dm3/h 21
22 bar 22
23 kPa 23
24 GPM 24
25 PSI 25
26 CFM 26
27 ft 27
28 MGD 28
29 inHg 29
30 FPM 30
31 kbits 31
32 kHz 32
33 Ohm 33
34 ppm 34
35 pps 35
36 l/s 36
37 l/min 37
38 l/h 38
39 m3/s 39
40 m3/m 40
41 kg/s 41
42 kg/m 42
43 kg/h 43
44 mbar 44
45 Pa 45
46 GPS 46
47 gal/s 47
48 gal/m 48
49 gal/h 49
50 ft3/s 50
51 ft3/m 51
52 ft3/h 52
53 lb/s 53

Parameters 191
54 lb/m 54
55 lb/h 55
56 FPS 56
57 ft/s 57
58 inH2O 58
59 inwg 59
60 ftwg 60
61 lbsi 61
62 ms 62
63 Mrev 63
64 days 64
65 inWC 65
66 mpmin 66
67 week 67
68 tonne 68
69 m/s^2 66
70 rev 70
71 deg 71
72 m 72
73 inch 73
74 inc 74
75 m/s^3 75
76 kg/m^2 76
77 kg/m^3 77
78 m^3 78
79 [blank] 79
80 u/s 80
81 u/min 81
82 u/h 82
83…84 [blank] 83…84
85 u/s^2 85
86 min-2 86
87 u/h^2 87
88…89 [blank] 88…89
90 Vrms 90
91 bits 91
92 Nm 92
93 p.u. 93
94 1/s 94
95 mH 95
96 mOhm 96

192 Parameters
97 us 97
98 C/W 98
35.06 Proc var1 max Maximum value for process variable 1. See diagram at
parameter 35.02 Signal1 max.
-32768…32768 Maximum value for process variable 1. 1 = 1
35.07 Proc var1 min Minimum value for process variable 1. See diagram at
-32768…32768 Minimum value for process variable 1. 1 = 1
var2.
93).
-
Proc var2 max.
variable 2 value.
1 = 1
35.10
35.13
35.14
35.09
04.07 Process var2
Signal selected by
35.08 Signal2 param

Parameters 193
2 value.
1 = 1
value for fieldbus.
0 1 = 1 0
1 10 = 1 1
2 100 = 1 2
3 1000 = 1 3
4 10000 = 1 4
5 100000 = 1 5
variable 2).
0…98 See parameter 35.05 Proc var1 unit. 1 = 1
var3.
93).
-

194 Parameters
Proc var3 max.
variable 3 value.
1 = 1
3 value.
1 = 1
value for fieldbus.
0 1 = 1 0
1 10 = 1 1
2 100 = 1 2
3 1000 = 1 3
4 10000 = 1 4
5 100000 = 1 5
variable 3).
0…98 See parameter 35.05 Proc var1 unit. 1 = 1
36
36 Timed functions Configuration of timers. See also section Timers on page 77.
36.01 Timers enable Enable/disable control for timers. Whenever the source
selected by this parameter is off, timers are disabled; when
the source is on, timers are enabled.
35.17
35.20
35.21
35.16
04.08 Process var3
Signal selected by
35.15 Signal3 param

Parameters 195
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
bit 5).
1074070019
Pointer
36.02 Timers mode Specifies whether the time periods defined by parameters
36.03 Start time1 … 36.18 Stop day4 are valid daily or
weekly.
36.03 Start time1 Defines the start time for time period 1.
00:00:00 …
24:00:00
Start time for time period 1. 1 = 1 s
(24:00:00 =
86400)
36.04 Stop time1 Defines the stop time for time period 1.
00:00:00 …
24:00:00
Stop time for time period 1. 1 = 1 s
(24:00:00 =
86400)
36.05 Start day1 Defines the week day on which time period 1 begins.
Monday Time period 1 starts on Monday. 1
Tuesday Time period 1 starts on Tuesday. 2
Wednesday Time period 1 starts on Wednesday. 3
Thursday Time period 1 starts on Thursday. 4
Friday Time period 1 starts on Friday. 5
Saturday Time period 1 starts on Saturday. 6
Sunday Time period 1 starts on Sunday. 7
36.06 Stop day1 Defines the week day on which time period 1 ends.
Monday Time period 1 ends on Monday. 1
Tuesday Time period 1 ends on Tuesday. 2
Bit Function
0 Timer1 mode
0 = Daily
1 = Weekly
1 Timer2 mode
0 = Daily
1 = Weekly
2 Timer3 mode
0 = Daily
1 = Weekly
3 Timer4 mode
0 = Daily
1 = Weekly

196 Parameters
Wednesday Time period 1 ends on Wednesday. 3
Thursday Time period 1 ends on Thursday. 4
Friday Time period 1 ends on Friday. 5
Saturday Time period 1 ends on Saturday. 6
Sunday Time period 1 ends on Sunday. 7
00:00:00 …
24:00:00
(24:00:00 =
86400)
00:00:00 …
24:00:00
(24:00:00 =
86400)
00:00:00 …
24:00:00
(24:00:00 =
86400)
00:00:00 …
24:00:00
(24:00:00 =
86400)

Parameters 197
00:00:00 …
24:00:00
(24:00:00 =
86400)
00:00:00 …
24:00:00
(24:00:00 =
86400)
36.19 Boost signal Boosting can be used to extend the timer enable signal for
the time defined by parameter 36.20 Boost time. The boost
time starts when the boost signal changes state from 1 to 0.

198 Parameters
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
bit 5).
1074070019
Pointer
36.20 Boost time Boost time. See parameter 36.19 Boost signal.
00:00:00 …
24:00:00
Boost time. 1 = 1 s
(24:00:00 =
86400)
36.21 Timed func1 Selects which time periods (1…4) are used with timed
function 1. Also determines whether boost is used with timed
function 1.
The parameter is a 16-bit word with each bit corresponding to
a function. Whenever a bit is set to 1, the corresponding
function is in use.
functions:
function 2.
function is in use.
functions:
Bit Function
0 Timer1 ena (Time period 1 enable)
4 Boost ena (Boost enable)
Bit Function

Parameters 199
function 3.
function is in use.
functions:
function 4.
function is in use.
functions:
38
38 Flux ref Flux reference and U/f curve settings. See also section User-
definable U/f curve on page 79.
38.01 Flux ref Sets the flux reference (in percent of parameter 99.08 Mot
nom freq) at field weakening point.
0 … 200% Flux reference at field weakening point. 1 = 1%
38.03 U/f curve func Selects the form of the U/f (voltage/frequency) curve below
the field weakening point.
Linear Linear U/f curve. Recommended for constant-torque
applications.
0
Quadratic Quadratic U/f curve. Recommended for centrifugal pump and
fan applications.
1
User Custom U/f curve. The curve is formed by the points defined
by parameters 38.04…38.13.
2
38.04 U/f curve freq1 Defines the frequency at the 1st point on the custom U/f curve
in percent of parameter 99.08 Mot nom freq.
1 … 500% 1st point, frequency. 1 = 1%
38.05 U/f curve freq2 Defines the frequency at the 2nd point on the custom U/f
curve in percent of parameter 99.08 Mot nom freq.
1 … 500% 2nd point, frequency. 1 = 1%
Bit Function
Bit Function

200 Parameters
38.06 U/f curve freq3 Defines the frequency at the 3rd point on the custom U/f
1 … 500% 3rd point, frequency. 1 = 1%
38.07 U/f curve freq4 Defines the frequency at the 4th point on the custom U/f
1 … 500% 4th point, frequency. 1 = 1%
38.08 U/f curve freq5 Defines the frequency at the 5th point on the custom U/f
1 … 500% 5th point, frequency. 1 = 1%
38.09 U/f curve volt1 Defines the voltage at the 1st point on the custom U/f curve in
percent of parameter 99.07 Mot nom voltage.
0 … 200% 1st point, voltage. 1 = 1%
38.10 U/f curve volt2 Defines the voltage at the 2nd point on the custom U/f curve
in percent of parameter 99.07 Mot nom voltage.
0 … 200% 2nd point, voltage. 1 = 1%
38.11 U/f curve volt3 Defines the voltage at the 3rd point on the custom U/f curve in
0 … 200% 3rd point, voltage. 1 = 1%
38.12 U/f curve volt4 Defines the voltage at the 4th point on the custom U/f curve in
0 … 200% 4th point, voltage. 1 = 1%
38.13 U/f curve volt5 Defines the voltage at the 5th point on the custom U/f curve in
0 … 200% 5th point, voltage. 1 = 1%
40
40 Motor control Motor control settings.
40.01 Motor noise An optimization setting for balancing between control
performance and motor noise level.
Cyclic Maximizes inverter overloadability. 0
Low noise Minimizes motor noise. 1
Default Control performance optimized for long motor cables. 2
40.03 Slip gain Defines the slip gain which is used to improve the estimated
motor slip. 100% means full slip gain; 0% means no slip gain.
The default value is 100%. Other values can be used if a
static speed error is detected despite of the full slip gain.
Example (with nominal load and nominal slip of 40 rpm): A
1000 rpm constant speed reference is given to the drive.
Despite of the full slip gain (= 100%), a manual tachometer
measurement from the motor axis gives a speed value of 998
rpm. The static speed error is 1000 rpm - 998 rpm = 2 rpm. To
compensate the error, the slip gain should be increased. At
the 105% gain value, no static speed error exists (2 rpm / 40
rpm = 5%).
0 … 200% Slip gain. 1 = 1%

Parameters 201
40.04 Voltage reserve Defines the minimum allowed voltage reserve. When the
voltage reserve has decreased to the set value, the drive
enters the field weakening area.
If the intermediate circuit DC voltage Udc = 550 V and the
voltage reserve is 5%, the RMS value of the maximum output
voltage in steady-state operation is
0.95 × 550 V / sqrt(2) = 369 V
The dynamic performance of the motor control in the field
weakening area can be improved by increasing the voltage
reserve value, but the drive enters the field weakening area
earlier.
-4 … 50% Voltage reserve. 1 = 1%
40.06 Force open loop Defines the speed/position information used by the motor
model.
False Motor model uses the speed feedback selected by parameter
19.02 Speed fb sel.
0
True Motor model uses the internal speed estimate (even when
parameter 19.02 Speed fb sel is set to Enc1 speed / Enc2
speed).
1
40.07 IR-compensation Defines the relative output voltage boost at zero speed (IR
compensation). The function is useful in applications with a
high break-away torque where direct torque control (DTC
mode) cannot be applied.
See also section IR compensation for a scalar controlled
drive on page 74.
0.00 … 50.00% Voltage boost at zero speed in percent of nominal motor
voltage.
100 = 1%
42
42 Mech brake ctrl Mechanical brake control configuration. See also section
Mechanical brake control on page 66.
42.01 Brake ctrl Activates the brake control function with or without
supervision.
running.
No Brake control disabled. 0
With ack Brake control enabled with supervision (supervision is
activated by parameter 42.02 Brake acknowl).
1
U /UN
(%)
f (Hz)
Field weakening point
Relative output voltage. No
IR compensation.
Relative output voltage. IR
compensation set to 15%.
15%
100%

202 Parameters
No ack Brake control enabled without supervision. 2
42.02 Brake acknowl Selects the source for the external brake on/off supervision
activation (when parameter 42.01 Brake ctrl is set to With
ack). The use of the external on/off supervision signal is
optional.
1 = The brake is open
0 = The brake is closed
Brake supervision is usually controlled with a digital input. It
can also be controlled with an external control system, e.g.
fieldbus.
When a brake control error is detected, the drive reacts as
defined by parameter 42.12 Brake fault func.
running.
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
bit 5).
1074070019
Pointer
42.03 Open delay Defines the brake open delay (= the delay between the
internal open brake command and the release of the motor
speed control). The delay counter starts when the drive has
magnetised the motor and risen the motor torque to the level
required at the brake release (parameter 42.08 Brake open
torq). Simultaneously with the counter start, the brake
function energises the relay output controlling the brake and
the brake starts opening.
Set the delay the same as the mechanical opening delay of
the brake specified by the brake manufacturer.
0.00 … 5.00 s Brake open delay. 100 = 1 s
42.04 Close delay Defines the brake close delay. The delay counter starts when
the motor actual speed has fallen below the set level
(parameter 42.05 Close speed) after the drive has received
the stop command. Simultaneously with the counter start, the
brake control function de-energises the relay output
controlling the brake and the brake starts closing. During the
delay, the brake function keeps the motor live preventing the
motor speed from falling below zero.
Set the delay time to the same value as the mechanical
make-up time of the brake (= operating delay when closing)
specified by the brake manufacturer.
0.00 … 60.00 s Brake close delay. 100 = 1 s
42.05 Close speed Defines the brake close speed (as an absolute value). See
parameter 42.04 Close delay.
0.0 … 1000.0 rpm Brake close speed. 10 = 1 rpm

Parameters 203
42.06 Close cmd delay Defines a close command delay, i.e. the time between when
brake close conditions are met and when the close command
is given.
0.00 … 10.00 s Brake close command delay. 100 = 1 s
42.07 Reopen delay Defines a reopen delay, i.e. the time between when the close
command is given and when the brake can be reopened.
0.00 … 10.00 s Brake reopen delay. 100 = 1 s
42.08 Brake open torq Defines the motor starting torque at brake release (in percent
of the motor nominal torque) when parameter 42.09 Open
torq src is set to P.42.08.
-1000.0 … 1000.0% Motor starting torque at brake release. 10 = 1%
42.09 Open torq src Selects the source for the “brake open” torque value (motor
starting torque at brake release).
Brk torq mem 03.15 Brake torq mem (see page 101). 1073742607
P.42.08 Parameter 42.08 Brake open torq. 1073752584
93).
-
42.10 Brake close req Selects the source for the brake close/open request.
1 = Brake close request
0 = Brake open request
running.
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
bit 5).
1074070019
Pointer
42.11 Brake hold open Selects the source for the activation of the brake open
command hold.
1 = Hold active
0 = Normal operation
running.

204 Parameters
bit 3).
1073938947
bit 4).
1074004483
bit 5).
1074070019
Pointer
42.12 Brake fault func Defines how the drive reacts in case of mechanical brake
control error. If brake control supervision has not been
activated by parameter 42.01 Brake ctrl, this parameter is
disabled.
Fault The drive trips on fault BRAKE NOT CLOSED / BRAKE NOT
OPEN if the status of the optional external brake
acknowledgement signal does not meet the status presumed
by the brake control function. The drive trips on fault BRAKE
START TORQUE if the required motor starting torque at
brake release is not achieved.
0
Alarm The drive generates alarm BRAKE NOT CLOSED / BRAKE
NOT OPEN if the status of the optional external brake
by the brake control function. The drive generates alarm
BRAKE START TORQUE if the required motor starting torque
at brake release is not achieved.
1
Open flt The drive trips on fault BRAKE NOT CLOSED / BRAKE NOT
OPEN if the status of the optional external brake
by the brake control function during the opening of the brake.
Other brake function errors generate alarm BRAKE NOT
CLOSED / BRAKE NOT OPEN.
2
42.13 Close flt delay Defines a close fault delay, i.e. the time between when the
brake is closed and when a brake close fault is generated.
0.00 … 60.00 s Brake close fault delay. 100 = 1 s

Parameters 205
44
44 Maintenance Maintenance counter configuration. See also section
Maintenance counters on page 65.
44.01 Ontime1 func Configures on-time counter 1. This counter runs whenever
the signal selected by parameter 44.02 Ontime1 src is on.
After the limit set by parameter 44.03 Ontime1 limit is
reached, an alarm specified by parameter 44.04 Ontime1 alm
sel is given, and the counter reset.
The current value of the counter is readable from parameter
04.09 Counter ontime1. Bit 0 of 06.15 Counter status
indicates that the count has exceeded the limit.
44.02 Ontime1 src Selects the signal to be monitored by on-time counter 1. See
parameter 44.01 Ontime1 func.
RO1 Relay output RO1 (as indicated by 02.02 RO status, bit 0). 1073742338
Charged Bit 9 of 06.02 Status word2 (see page 104). 1074333186
Pointer
44.03 Ontime1 limit Sets the alarm limit for on-time counter 1. See parameter
44.01 Ontime1 func.
0…2147483647 s Alarm limit for on-time counter 1.
44.04 Ontime1 alm sel Selects the alarm for on-time counter 1. See parameter 44.01
Ontime1 func.
On-time1 Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 1. 0
Device clean Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 1. 1
Add cool fan Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 1. 2
Cabinet fan Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 1. 3
Dc-capacitor Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 1. 4
Mot bearing Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 1. 5
Bit Function
0 Counter mode
0 = Loop: If alarm is enabled by bit 1, the alarm stays active only for 10 seconds.
1 = Saturate: If alarm is enabled by bit 1, the alarm stays active until reset.
1 Alarm ena (Alarm enable)
0 = Disable: No alarm is given when limit is reached.
1 = Enable: Alarm is given when limit is reached.

206 Parameters
44.05 Ontime2 func Configures on-time counter 2. This counter runs whenever
the signal selected by parameter 44.06 Ontime2 src is on.
After the limit set by parameter 44.07 Ontime2 limit is
reached, an alarm specified by parameter 44.08 Ontime2 alm
sel is given, and the counter reset.
04.10 Counter ontime2. Bit 1 of 06.15 Counter status
indicates that the count has exceeded the limit.
44.06 Ontime2 src Selects the signal to be monitored by on-time counter 2. See
parameter 44.05 Ontime2 func.
Pointer
44.07 Ontime2 limit Sets the alarm limit for on-time counter 2. See parameter
44.05 Ontime2 func.
0 … 2147483647 s Alarm limit for on-time counter 2. 1 = 1 s
44.08 Ontime2 alm sel Selects the alarm for on-time counter 2. See parameter 44.05
Ontime2 func.
On-time2 Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 2. 0
Device clean Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 2. 1
Add cool fan Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 2. 2
Cabinet fan Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 2. 3
Dc-capacitor Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 2. 4
Mot bearing Pre-selectable alarm for on-time counter 2. 5
Bit Function
0 Counter mode

Parameters 207
44.09 Edge count1 func Configures rising edge counter 1. This counter is incremented
every time the signal selected by parameter 44.10 Edge
count1 src switches on (unless a divisor value is applied –
see parameter 44.12 Edge count1 div). After the limit set by
parameter 44.11 Edge count1 lim is reached, an alarm
specified by parameter 44.13 Edg cnt1 alm sel is given, and
the counter reset.
04.11 Counter edge1. Bit 2 of 06.15 Counter status indicates
that the count has exceeded the limit.
44.10 Edge count1 src Selects the signal to be monitored by rising edge counter 1.
See parameter 44.09 Edge count1 func.
Pointer
44.11 Edge count1 lim Sets the alarm limit for rising edge counter 1. See parameter
44.09 Edge count1 func.
0 … 2147483647 Alarm limit for rising edge counter 1. 1 = 1
44.12 Edge count1 div Divisor for rising edge counter 1. Determines how many rising
edges increment the counter by 1.
1 … 2147483647 Divisor for rising edge counter 1. 1 = 1
44.13 Edg cnt1 alm sel Selects the alarm for rising edge counter 1. See parameter
Edge count1 Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 1. 0
Main cntactr Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 1. 1
Output relay Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 1. 2
Motor starts Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 1. 3
Power ups Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 1. 4
Dc-charge Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 1. 5
Bit Function
0 Counter mode

208 Parameters
44.14 Edge count2 func Configures rising edge counter 2. The counter is incremented
every time the signal selected by parameter 44.15 Edge
count2 src switches on (unless a divisor value is applied –
see parameter 44.17 Edge count2 div). After the limit set by
parameter 44.16 Edge count2 lim is reached, an alarm
specified by parameter 44.22 Edg cnt2 alm sel is given and
the counter is reset.
04.12 Counter edge2. Bit 3 of 06.15 Counter status indicates
that the count has exceeded the limit.
44.15 Edge count2 src Selects the signal to be monitored by rising edge counter 2.
See parameter 44.14 Edge count2 func.
Pointer
44.16 Edge count2 lim Sets the alarm limit for rising edge counter 2. See parameter
0 … 2147483647 Alarm limit for rising edge counter 2. 1 = 1
44.17 Edge count2 div Divisor for rising edge counter 2. Determines how many rising
edges increment the counter by 1.
1 … 2147483647 Divisor for rising edge counter 2. 1 = 1
44.18 Edg cnt2 alm sel Selects the alarm for rising edge counter 2. See parameter
Edge count2 Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2. 0
Main cntactr Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2. 1
Output relay Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2. 2
Motor starts Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2. 3
Power ups Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2. 4
Dc-charge Pre-selectable alarm for rising edge counter 2. 5
Bit Function
0 Counter mode

Parameters 209
44.19 Val count1 func Configures value counter 1. This counter measures, by
integration, the area below the signal selected by parameter
44.20 Val count1 src. When the total area exceeds the limit
set by parameter 44.21 Val count1 lim, an alarm is given (if
enabled by bit 1 of this parameter).
The signal is sampled at 1-second intervals. Note that the
scaled (see the “FbEq” column at the signal in question) value
of the signal is used.
04.13 Counter value1. Bit 4 of 06.15 Counter status indicates
that the counter has exceeded the limit.
44.20 Val count1 src Selects the signal to be monitored by value counter 1. See
parameter 44.19 Val count1 func.
93).
-
44.21 Val count1 lim Sets the alarm limit for value counter 1. See parameter 44.19
Val count1 func.
0 … 2147483647 Alarm limit for value counter 1. 1 = 1
44.22 Val count1 div Divisor for value counter 1. The value of the monitored signal
is divided by this value before integration.
1 … 2147483647 Divisor for value counter 1. 1 = 1
44.23 Val cnt1 alm sel Selects the alarm for value counter 1. See parameter 44.19
Val count1 func.
Value1 Pre-selectable alarm for value counter 1. 0
Mot bearing Pre-selectable alarm for value counter 1. 1
Bit Function
0 Counter mode

210 Parameters
44.24 Val count2 func Configures value counter 2. This counter measures, by
integration, the area below the signal selected by parameter
44.25 Val count2 src. When the total area exceeds the limit
set by parameter 44.26 Val count2 lim, an alarm is given (if
enabled by bit 1 of this parameter).
The signal is sampled at 1-second intervals. Note that the
scaled (see the “FbEq” column at the signal in question) value
of the signal is used.
04.14 Counter value2. Bit 5 of 06.15 Counter status indicates
that the counter has exceeded the limit.
44.25 Val count2 src Selects the signal to be monitored by value counter 2. See
parameter 44.24 Val count2 func.
93).
-
44.26 Val count2 lim Sets the alarm limit for value counter 2. See parameter 44.24
Val count2 func.
0 … 2147483647 Alarm limit for value counter 2. 1 = 1
44.27 Val count2 div Divisor for value counter 2. The value of the monitored signal
is divided by this value before integration.
1 … 2147483647 Divisor for value counter 2. 1 = 1
44.28 Val cnt2 alm sel Selects the alarm for value counter 2. See parameter 44.24
Val count2 func.
Value2 Pre-selectable alarm for value counter 2. 0
Mot bearing Pre-selectable alarm for value counter 2. 1
44.29 Fan ontime lim Sets the limit for the cooling fan on-time counter. The counter
monitors signal 01.28 Fan on-time (see page 95). When the
signal reaches the limit, alarm 2056 COOLING FAN (0x5081)
is given.
0.00 …
35791394.11 h
Alarm limit for cooling fan on-time. 1 = 1 min
44.30 Runtime lim Sets the limit for the drive run-time counter. The counter
monitors signal 01.27 Run-time counter (see page 95). When
the signal reaches the limit, the alarm specified by parameter
44.31 Runtime alm sel is given.
0.00 …
35791394.11 h
Alarm limit for the drive run-time counter. 1 = 1 min
44.31 Runtime alm sel Selects the alarm for the drive run time counter.
Device clean Pre-selectable alarm for the drive run time counter. 1
Add cool fan Pre-selectable alarm for the drive run time counter. 2
Cabinet fan Pre-selectable alarm for the drive run time counter. 3
Bit Function
0 Counter mode

Parameters 211
Dc-capacitor Pre-selectable alarm for the drive run time counter. 4
Mot bearing Pre-selectable alarm for the drive run time counter. 5
44.32 kWh inv lim Sets the limit for the energy counter. The counter monitors
signal 01.24 kWh inverter (see page 94). When the signal
reaches the limit, the alarm specified by parameter 44.33
kWh inv alm sel is given.
0 … 2147483647 Alarm limit for the energy counter. 1 = 1 kWh
44.33 kWh inv alm sel Selects the alarm for the energy counter.
Device clean Pre-selectable alarm for the energy counter. 1
Add cool fan Pre-selectable alarm for the energy counter. 2
Cabinet fan Pre-selectable alarm for the energy counter. 3
Dc-capacitor Pre-selectable alarm for the energy counter. 4
Mot bearing Pre-selectable alarm for the energy counter. 5
45
45 Energy optimising Energy optimization settings. See also section Energy
optimizer on page 62.
45.01 Energy optim Enables/disables energy optimization function. The function
optimizes the flux so that total energy consumption and motor
noise level are reduced when the drive operates below the
nominal load. The total efficiency (motor and drive) can be
improved by 1…10% depending on load torque and speed.
Disable Energy optimization disabled. 0
Enable Energy optimization enabled. 1
45.02 Energy tariff1 Price of energy per kWh. Used for reference when savings
are calculated. See parameters 01.35 Saved energy, 01.36
Saved amount and 01.37 Saved CO2.
0.00 …
21474836.47
Price of energy per kWh. 1 = 1
45.06 E tariff unit Specifies the currency used for the savings calculation.
Local The currency is determined by the setting of parameter 99.01
Language.
0
Eur Euro. 1
Usd US dollar. 2
45.08 Pump ref power Motor power when connected directly to supply. Used for
reference when energy savings are calculated. See
parameters 01.35 Saved energy, 01.36 Saved amount and
01.37 Saved CO2.
Note: The accuracy of the energy savings calculation is
directly dependent on the accuracy of this value.
00.0… 1000.0% Motor power in percent of nominal motor power. 1 = 1
45.09 Energy reset Resets the energy counters 01.35 Saved energy, 01.36
Saved amount and 01.37 Saved CO2.
Done Reset not requested (normal operation). 0
Reset Reset energy counters. The value reverts automatically to
Done.
1

212 Parameters
47
47 Voltage ctrl Overvoltage and undervoltage control settings. See also
section DC voltage control on page 59.
47.01 Overvolt ctrl Enables the overvoltage control of the intermediate DC link.
Fast braking of a high inertia load causes the voltage to rise
to the overvoltage control limit. To prevent the DC voltage
from exceeding the limit, the overvoltage controller
automatically decreases the braking torque.
Note: If a brake chopper and resistor or a regenerative supply
section are included in the drive, the controller must be
disabled.
Disable Overvoltage control disabled. 0
Enable Overvoltage control enabled. 1
47.02 Undervolt ctrl Enables the undervoltage control of the intermediate DC link.
If the DC voltage drops due to input power cut off, the
undervoltage controller will automatically decrease the motor
torque in order to keep the voltage above the lower limit. By
decreasing the motor torque, the inertia of the load will cause
regeneration back to the drive, keeping the DC link charged
and preventing an undervoltage trip until the motor coasts to
stop. This will act as a power-loss ride-through functionality in
systems with high inertia, such as a centrifuge or a fan.
Disable Undervoltage control disabled. 0
Enable Undervoltage control enabled. 1
47.03 SupplyVoltAutoId Enables the auto-identification of the supply voltage.
Disable Auto-identification of supply voltage disabled. 0
Enable Auto-identification of supply voltage enabled. 1
47.04 Supply voltage Defines the nominal supply voltage. Used if auto-identification
of the supply voltage is not enabled by parameter 47.03
SupplyVoltAutoId.
0 … 1000 V Nominal supply voltage. 10 = 1 V
48
48 Brake chopper Control of the brake chopper.
48.01 Bc enable Enables the brake chopper control.
Note: Before enabling the brake chopper control, ensure that
a brake resistor is connected and the overvoltage control is
switched off (parameter 47.01 Overvolt ctrl).
Disable Brake chopper control disabled. 0
EnableTherm Brake chopper control enabled with resistor overload
protection.
1
Enable Brake chopper control enabled without resistor overload
protection. This setting can be used, for example, if the
resistor is equipped with a thermal circuit breaker that is wired
to stop the drive if the resistor overheats.
2

Parameters 213
48.02 Bc run-time ena Selects the source for quick run-time brake chopper control.
0 = Brake chopper IGBT pulses are cut off
1 = Normal brake chopper IGBT modulation. The overvoltage
control is automatically switched off
This parameter can be used to program the chopper control
to function only when the drive is operating in the generator
mode.
Pointer
48.03 BrThermTimeConst Defines the thermal time constant of the brake resistor for
overload protection.
0 … 10000 s Brake resistor thermal time constant. 1 = 1 s
48.04 Br power max cnt Defines the maximum continuous braking power which will
raise the resistor temperature to the maximum allowed value.
The value is used in the overload protection.
0.0000 …
10000.0000 kW
Maximum continuous braking power. 10000 =
1 kW
48.05 R br Defines the resistance value of the brake resistor. The value
is used for brake chopper protection.
0.1000 …
1000.0000 ohm
Brake resistor resistance value. 10000 =
1 ohm
48.06 Br temp faultlim Selects the fault limit for the brake resistor temperature
supervision. The value is given in percent of the temperature
the resistor reaches when loaded with the power defined by
parameter 48.04 Br power max cnt.
When the limit is exceeded the drive trips on fault BR
OVERHEAT.
0 … 150% Brake resistor temperature fault limit. 1 = 1%
48.07 Br temp alarmlim Selects the alarm limit for the brake resistor temperature
supervision. The value is given in percent of the temperature
the resistor reaches when loaded with the power defined by
parameter 48.04 Br power max cnt.
When the limit is exceeded, the drive generates a BR
OVERHEAT alarm.
0 … 150% Brake resistor temperature alarm limit. 1 = 1%
49
49 Data storage Data storage parameters reserved for the user. These
parameters can be written to and read from using other
parameters’ pointer settings.
Four 16-bit and four 32-bit storage parameters are available.
49.01 Data storage1 Data storage parameter 1.
-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1 = 1
-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1 = 1
-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1 = 1
-32768 … 32767 16-bit data. 1 = 1

214 Parameters
-2147483647 …
2147483647
32-bit data. 1 = 1
-2147483647 …
2147483647
32-bit data. 1 = 1
-2147483647 …
2147483647
32-bit data. 1 = 1
-2147483647 …
2147483647
32-bit data. 1 = 1
50
50 Fieldbus Settings for configuration of communication via a fieldbus
adapter.
50.01 Fba enable Enables communication between the drive and fieldbus
adapter.
Disable Communication between the drive and fieldbus adapter
disabled.
0
Enable Communication between the drive and fieldbus adapter
enabled.
1
50.02 Comm loss func Selects how the drive reacts in a fieldbus communication
break. The time delay is defined by parameter 50.03 Comm
loss t out.
No Communication break detection disabled. 0
Fault Communication break detection active. Upon a
communication break, the drive trips on fault FIELDBUS
COMM and coasts to stop.
1
Spd ref Safe Communication break detection active. Upon a
communication break, the drive generates alarm FIELDBUS
COMM and sets the speed to the value defined by parameter
30.02 Speed ref safe.
2
Last speed Communication break detection active. The drive generates
alarm FIELDBUS COMM and freezes the speed to the level
the drive was operating at. The speed is determined by the
average speed over the previous 10 seconds.
3
50.03 Comm loss t out Defines the time delay before the action defined by parameter
50.02 Comm loss func is taken. Time count starts when the
link fails to update the message.
0.3 … 6553.5 s Time delay. 10 = 1 s
50.04 Fba ref1 modesel Selects the fieldbus reference FBA REF1 scaling and the
actual value, which is sent to the fieldbus (FBA ACT1).

Parameters 215
Raw data No scaling (i.e. data is transmitted without scaling). Source
for the actual value, which is sent to the fieldbus, is selected
by parameter 50.06 Fba act1 tr src.
0
Torque Fieldbus adapter module uses torque reference scaling.
Torque reference scaling is defined by the used fieldbus
profile (e.g. with ABB Drives Profile integer value 10000
corresponds to 100% torque value). Signal 01.06 Motor
torque is sent to the fieldbus as an actual value. See the
User’s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module.
1
Speed Fieldbus adapter module uses speed reference scaling.
Speed reference scaling is defined by the used fieldbus
profile (e.g. with ABB Drives Profile integer value 20000
corresponds to parameter 19.01 Speed scaling value). Signal
01.01 Motor speed rpm is sent to the fieldbus as an actual
value. See the User’s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus
adapter module.
2
50.05 Fba ref2 modesel Selects the fieldbus reference FBA REF2 scaling.
See parameter 50.04 Fba ref1 modesel.
Raw data See parameter 50.04 Fba ref1 modesel. 0
Torque See parameter 50.04 Fba ref1 modesel. 1
Speed See parameter 50.04 Fba ref1 modesel. 2
50.06 Fba act1 tr src Selects the source for fieldbus actual value 1 when parameter
50.04 Fba ref1 modesel / 50.05 Fba ref2 modesel is set to
Raw data.
93).
-
50.07 Fba act2 tr src Selects the source for fieldbus actual value 2 when parameter
50.04 Fba ref1 modesel / 50.05 Fba ref2 modesel is set to
Raw data.
93).
-
50.08 Fba sw b12 src Selects the source for freely programmable fieldbus status
word bit 28 (02.24 FBA main sw bit 28 SW B28).
Pointer
Pointer
Pointer
Pointer

216 Parameters
51
51 FBA settings Fieldbus adapter-specific settings.
51.01 FBA type Displays the type of the connected fieldbus adapter module.
0 = Fieldbus module is not found, or it is not properly
connected, or parameter 50.01 Fba enable is set to Disable,
1 = FPBA-xx PROFIBUS-DP adapter module, 32 = FCAN-xx
CANopen adapter module, 37 = FDNA-xx DeviceNet adapter
module
51.02 FBA par2 Parameters 51.02…51.26 are adapter module-specific. For
more information, see the User’s Manual of the fieldbus
adapter module. Note that not all of these parameters are
necessarily visible.
-
… … … …
51.26 FBA par26 See parameter 51.02 FBA par2. -
51.27 FBA par refresh Validates any changed adapter module configuration
parameter settings. After refreshing, the value reverts
automatically to Done.
running.
Done Refreshing done. 0
Refresh Refreshing. 1
51.28 Par table ver Displays the parameter table revision of the fieldbus adapter
module mapping file stored in the memory of the drive.
In format xyz, where x = major revision number; y = minor
revision number; z = correction number.
0x0000 … 0xFFFF Parameter table revision. 1 = 1
51.29 Drive type code Displays the drive type code of the fieldbus adapter module
mapping file stored in the memory of the drive.
0 … 65535 Drive type code of fieldbus adapter module mapping file. 1 = 1
51.30 Mapping file ver Displays the fieldbus adapter module mapping file revision
stored in the memory of the drive in decimal format. Example:
1 = revision 1.
0 … 65535 Mapping file revision. 1 = 1
51.31 D2FBA comm sta Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter module
communication.
Idle Adapter is not configured. 0
Exec.init Adapter is initializing. 1
Time out A timeout has occurred in the communication between the
adapter and the drive.
2
Conf.err Adapter configuration error: The major or minor revision code
of the common program revision in the fieldbus adapter
module is not the revision required by the module (see
parameter 51.32 FBA comm sw ver) or mapping file upload
has failed more than three times.
3
Off-line Adapter is off-line. 4
On-line Adapter is on-line. 5
Reset Adapter is performing a hardware reset. 6

Parameters 217
51.32 FBA comm sw ver Displays the common program revision of the adapter module
in format axyz, where a = major revision number, xy = minor
revision numbers. z = correction letter.
Example: 190A = revision 1.90A.
Common program version of adapter module. 1 = 1
51.33 FBA appl sw ver Displays the application program revision of the adapter
module in format axyz, where: a = major revision number, xy
= minor revision numbers, z = correction letter.
Example: 190A = revision 1.90A.
Application program revision of adapter module. 1 = 1
52
52 FBA data in Selection of data to be transferred from drive to fieldbus
controller.
52.01 FBA data in1 Parameters 52.01…52.12 select data to be transferred from
the drive to the fieldbus controller.
4 Status Word (16 bits) 4
5 Actual value 1 (16 bits) 5
14 Status Word (32 bits) 14
101…9999 Parameter index 1 = 1
… … … …
52.12 FBA data in12 See parameter 52.01 FBA data in1.
53
53 FBA data out Selection of data to be transferred from fieldbus controller to
drive.
53.01 FBA data out1 Parameters 53.01…53.12 select data to be transferred from
the fieldbus controller to the drive.
1 Control Word (16 bits) 1
2 Reference REF1 (16 bits) 2
11 Control Word (32 bits) 11
101…9999 Parameter index 1 = 1
… … … …
53.12 FBA data out12 See parameter 53.01 FBA data out1.
56
56 Panel display Selection of signals to be displayed on control panel.
56.01 Signal1 param Selects the first signal to be displayed on the optional control
panel. The default signal is 01.03 Output frequency.
00.00 … 255.255 1st signal to be displayed. -
56.02 Signal2 param Selects the second signal to be displayed on the optional
control panel. The default signal is 01.04 Motor current.
00.00 … 255.255 2nd signal to be displayed. -

218 Parameters
56.03 Signal3 param Selects the third signal to be displayed on the optional control
panel. The default signal is 01.06 Motor torque.
00.00 … 255.255 3rd signal to be displayed. -
56.04 Signal1 mode Defines the way the signal selected by parameter 56.01
Signal1 param is displayed on the optional control panel.
Disabled Signal not displayed. Any other signals that are not disabled
are shown together with their respective signal name.
-1
Normal Shows the signal as a numerical value followed by unit. 0
Bar Shows the signal as a horizontal bar. 1
Drive name Shows the drive name. (The drive name can be set using the
DriveStudio PC tool.)
2
Drive type Shows the drive type. 3
-1
2
-1
2
57
57 D2D
communication
Configuration of drive-to-drive communication. See also
section Drive-to-drive link on page 61.
57.01 Link mode Activates the drive-to-drive connection.
Disabled Drive-to-drive connection disabled. 0
Follower The drive is a follower on the drive-to-drive link. 1
Master The drive is the master on the drive-to-drive link. Only one
drive can be the master at a time.
2
57.02 Comm loss func Selects how the drive acts when an erroneous drive-to-drive
configuration or a communication break is detected.
No Protection not active. 0
Alarm The drive generates an alarm. 1
Fault The drive trips on a fault. 2

Parameters 219
57.03 Node address Sets the node address for a follower drive. Each follower
must have a dedicated node address.
Note: If the drive is set to be the master on the drive-to-drive
link, this parameter has no effect (the master is automatically
assigned node address 0).
1 … 62 Node address. 1 = 1
57.04 Follower mask 1 On the master drive, selects the followers to be polled. If no
response is received from a polled follower, the action
selected by parameter 57.02 Comm loss func is taken.
The least significant bit represents follower with node address
1, while the most significant bit represents follower 31. When
a bit is set to 1, the corresponding node address is polled. For
example, followers 1 and 2 are polled when this parameter is
set to the value of 0x3.
0h00000000 …
0h7FFFFFFF
Follower mask 1. 1 = 1
57.05 Follower mask 2 On the master drive, selects the followers to be polled. If no
response is received from a polled follower, the action
selected by parameter 57.02 Comm loss func is taken.
The least significant bit represents follower with node address
32, while the most significant bit represents follower 62.
When a bit is set to 1, the corresponding node address is
polled. For example, followers 32 and 33 are polled when this
parameter is set to the value of 0x3.
0h00000000 …
0h7FFFFFFF
Follower mask 2. 1 = 1
57.06 Ref 1 src Selects the source of D2D reference 1 sent to the followers.
The parameter is effective on the master drive, as well as
intermediate followers in a multicast message chain (see
parameter 57.11 Ref1 msg type)..
93).
-
57.07 Ref 2 src On the master drive, selects the source of D2D reference 2
broadcast to all followers.
93).
-
57.08 Follower cw src Selects the source of the D2D control word sent to the
followers. The parameter is effective on the master drive, as
well as intermediate followers in a multicast message chain
(see parameter 57.11 Ref1 msg type)..
93).
-
57.11 Ref1 msg type By default, in drive-to-drive communication, the master
broadcasts the drive-to-drive control word and references 1
and 2 to all followers. This parameter enables multicasting,
i.e. sending the drive-to-drive control word and reference 1 to
a certain drive or group of drives. The message can then be
further relayed to another group of drives to form a multicast
chain.
In the master, as well as any intermediate followers (i.e.
followers relaying the message to other followers), the
sources for the control word and reference 1 are selected by
parameters 57.08 Follower cw src and 57.06 Ref 1 src
respectively.
Note: Reference 2 is broadcast to all followers.

220 Parameters
Broadcast The control word and reference 1 are sent by the master to all
followers. If the master has this setting, the parameter has no
effect in the followers.
0
Ref1 MC Grps The drive-to-drive control word and reference 1 are only sent
to the drives in the multicast group specified by parameter
57.13 Next ref1 mc grp. This setting can also used in
intermediate followers to form a multicast chain.
1
57.12 Ref1 mc group Selects the multicast group the drive belongs to. See
parameter 57.11 Ref1 msg type.
0…62 Multicast group. 1 = 1
57.13 Next ref1 mc grp Specifies the next multicast group of drives the multicast
message is relayed to. See parameter 57.11 Ref1 msg type.
This parameter is effective only in the master or intermediate
followers (i.e. followers relaying the message to other
followers).
0 No group selected. 0
1…62 Next multicast group in the chain. 1 = 1
57.14 Nr ref1 mc grps In the master drive, sets the total number of links (followers or
groups of followers) in the multicast message chain. See
parameter 57.11 Ref1 msg type.
Notes:
• This parameter has no effect if the drive is a follower.
• The master counts as a member of the chain if
acknowledgement from the last drive to the master is
desired.
1…62 Number of links in the multicast chain. 1 = 1
57.15 D2D com port Defines the hardware to which the drive-to-drive link is
connected. In special cases (such as harsh operating
conditions), the galvanic isolation provided by the RS-485
interface of the FSCA module may make for more robust
communication than the standard drive-to-drive connection.
on-board Connector X5 on the JCU Control Unit is used. 0
Slot 1 An FSCA module installed in JCU option slot 1 is used. 1
64
64 Load analyzer Peak value and amplitude logger settings. See also section
Load analyzer on page 64.
64.01 PVL signal Selects the signal to be monitored by the peak value logger.
The signal is filtered using the filtering time specified by
parameter 64.02 PVL filt time.
The peak value is stored, along with other pre-selected
signals at the time, into parameters 64.06…64.11.
Parameter 64.03 Reset loggers resets both the peak value
logger and amplitude logger 2. The latest time the loggers
were reset is stored into parameter 64.13.

Parameters 221
93).
-
64.02 PVL filt time Peak value logger filtering time. See parameter 64.01 PVL
signal.
0.00 … 120.00 s Peak value logger filtering time. 100 = 1 s
64.03 Reset loggers Selects the signal to reset the peak value logger and
amplitude logger 2. (Amplitude logger 1 cannot be reset.)
Pointer
64.04 AL signal Selects the signal to be monitored by amplitude logger 2. The
signal is sampled at 200 ms intervals when the drive is
running.
The results are displayed by parameters 64.24…64.33. Each
parameter represents an amplitude range, and shows what
portion of the samples fall within that range.
The signal value corresponding to 100% is defined by
parameter 64.05 AL signal base.
Parameter 64.03 Reset loggers resets both the peak value
logger and amplitude logger 2. The latest time the loggers
were reset is stored into parameter 64.13.
Note: Amplitude logger 1 is fixed to monitor motor current
(01.04 Motor current). The results are displayed by
parameters 64.14…64.23. 100% of the signal value
corresponds to the nominal output current of the drive (see
the appropriate Hardware Manual).
93).
-
64.05 AL signal base Defines the signal value that corresponds to 100% amplitude.
0.00 … 32768.00 Signal value corresponding to 100%. 100 = 1

222 Parameters
64.06 PVL peak value1 Peak value recorded by the peak value logger.
-32768.00 …
32768.00
Peak value. 100 = 1
64.07 Date of peak The date on which the peak value was recorded.
01.01.80 … Peak occurrence date (dd.mm.yy). 1 = 1 d
64.08 Time of peak The time at which the peak value was recorded.
00:00:00 …
23:59:59
Peak occurrence time. 1 = 1 s
64.09 Current at peak Motor current at the moment the peak value was recorded.
-32768.00 …
32768.00 A
Motor current at peak. 100 = 1 A
64.10 Dc volt at peak Voltage in the intermediate DC circuit of the drive at the
moment the peak value was recorded.
0.00 … 2000.00 V DC voltage at peak. 100 = 1 V
64.11 Speed at peak Motor speed at the moment the peak value was recorded.
-32768.00 …
32768.00 rpm
Motor speed at peak. 100 = 1 rpm
64.12 Date of reset The date the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 were
last reset.
01.01.80 … Last reset date of loggers (dd.mm.yy). 1 = 1 d
64.13 Time of reset The time the peak value logger and amplitude logger 2 were
last reset.
00:00:00 …
23:59:59
Last reset time of loggers. 1 = 1 s
64.14 AL1 0 to 10% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that
fall between 0 and 10%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples between 0 and 10%. 100 = 1%

Parameters 223
64.23 AL1 over 90% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 1 that
exceed 90%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 1 samples over 90%. 100 = 1%
64.33 AL2 over 90% Percentage of samples recorded by amplitude logger 2 that
exceed 90%.
0.00 … 100.00% Amplitude logger 2 samples over 90%. 100 = 1%

224 Parameters
90
90 Enc module sel Activation of encoder/resolver interfaces. See also section
Encoder support on page 62.
90.01 Encoder 1 sel Activates the communication to optional encoder/resolver
interface 1.
Note: It is recommended that encoder interface 1 is used
whenever possible since the data received through that
interface is fresher than the data received through interface 2.
On the other hand, when position values used in emulation
are determined by the drive software, the use of encoder
interface 2 is recommended as the values are transmitted
earlier through interface 2 than through interface 1.
None Inactive. 0
FEN-01 TTL+ Communication active. Module type: FEN-01 TTL Encoder
interface. Input: TTL encoder input with commutation support
(X32).
1
FEN-01 TTL Communication active. Module type: FEN-01 TTL Encoder
Interface. Input: TTL encoder input (X31).
2
FEN-11 ABS Communication active. Module type: FEN-11 Absolute
Encoder Interface. Input: Absolute encoder input (X42).
3
FEN-11 TTL Communication active. Module type: FEN-11 Absolute
Encoder Interface. Input: TTL encoder input (X41).
4
FEN-21 RES Communication active. Module type: FEN-21 Resolver
Interface. Input: Resolver input (X52).
5
FEN-21 TTL Communication active. Module type: FEN-21 Resolver
Interface. Input: TTL encoder input (X51).
6
FEN-31 HTL Communication active. Module type: FEN-31 HTL Encoder
Interface. Input: HTL encoder input (X82).
7
90.02 Encoder 2 sel Activates the communication to the optional encoder/resolver
interface 2.
Note: The counting of shaft revolutions is not supported for
encoder 2.
None Inactive. 0
FEN-01 TTL+ See parameter 90.01 Encoder 1 sel. 1
FEN-01 TTL See parameter 90.01 Encoder 1 sel. 2
FEN-11 ABS See parameter 90.01 Encoder 1 sel. 3
FEN-21 RES See parameter 90.01 Encoder 1 sel. 5
FEN-31 HTL See parameter 90.01 Encoder 1 sel. 7
90.04 TTL echo sel Enables and selects the interface for the TTL encoder signal
echo.
Note: If encoder emulation and echo are enabled for the
same FEN-xx TTL output, the emulation overrides the echo.
Disabled No echo interface enabled. 0
FEN-01 TTL+ Module type: FEN-01 TTL Encoder Interface. Echo: TTL
encoder input (X32) pulses are echoed to the TTL output.
1
FEN-01 TTL Module type: FEN-01 TTL Encoder Interface. Echo: TTL
2

Parameters 225
FEN-11 TTL Module type: FEN-11 Absolute Encoder Interface. Echo: TTL
3
FEN-21 TTL Module type: FEN-21 Resolver Interface. Echo: TTL encoder
input (X51) pulses are echoed to the TTL output.
4
FEN-31 HTL Module type: FEN-31 HTL Encoder Interface. Echo: HTL
5
90.05 Enc cable fault Selects the action in case an encoder cable fault is detected
by the FEN-xx encoder interface.
No Cable fault detection inactive. 0
Fault The drive trips on an ENCODER 1/2 CABLE fault. 1
Warning The drive generates an ENCODER 1/2 CABLE warning. This
is the recommended setting if the maximum pulse frequency
of sine/cosine incremental signals exceeds 100 kHz; at high
frequencies, the signals may attenuate enough to invoke the
function. The maximum pulse frequency can be calculated as
follows:
2
90.10 Enc par refresh Setting this parameter to 1 forces a reconfiguration of the
FEN-xx interfaces, which is needed for any parameter
changes in groups 90…93 to take effect.
Note: The parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
Done Reconfiguration done. 0
Configure Reconfigure. The value will automatically revert to Done. 1
91
91 Absol enc conf Absolute encoder configuration. See also section Encoder
support on page 62.
91.01 Sine cosine nr Defines the number of sine/cosine wave cycles within one
revolution.
Note: This parameter does not need to be set when EnDat or
SSI encoders are used in continuous mode. See parameter
91.25 SSI mode / 91.30 Endat mode.
0…65535 Number of sine/cosine wave cycles. 1 = 1
91.02 Abs enc interf Selects the source for the encoder position (zero position).
None Not selected. 0
Commut sig Commutation signals. 1
EnDat Serial interface: EnDat encoder. 2
Hiperface Serial interface: HIPERFACE encoder. 3
SSI Serial interface: SSI encoder. 4
Tamag. 17/33b Serial interface: Tamagawa 17/33-bit encoder. 5
91.03 Rev count bits Defines the number of bits used in revolution count (for
multiturn encoders). Used with serial interfaces, i.e. when
parameter 91.02 Abs enc interf setting is EnDat, Hiperface,
SSI or Tamag. 17/33b.
0…32 Number of bits. For example, 4096 revolutions corresponds
to 12 bits.
1 = 1
Max. pulse frequency
Pulses per rev. Max. speed in rpm×
60
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------=

226 Parameters
91.04 Pos data bits Defines the number of bits used within one revolution. Used
with serial interfaces, i.e. when parameter 91.02 Abs enc
interf setting is EnDat, Hiperface, SSI or Tamag. 17/33b.
0…32 Number of bits. For example, 32768 positions per revolution
corresponds to 15 bits.
1 = 1
91.05 Refmark ena Enables the encoder zero pulse (if used). Zero pulse can be
used for position latching.
Note: With serial interfaces (i.e. when parameter 91.02 Abs
enc interf setting is EnDat, Hiperface, SSI or Tamag. 17/33b),
zero pulse must be disabled.
False Zero pulse disabled. 0
True Zero pulse enabled. 1
91.10 Hiperface parity Defines the use of parity and stop bits for HIPERFACE
encoder (i.e. when parameter 91.02 Abs enc interf setting is
Hiperface). Typically, this parameter does not need to be set.
Odd Odd parity indication bit, one stop bit. 0
Even Even parity indication bit, one stop bit. 1
91.11 Hiperf baudrate Defines the transfer rate of the link for HIPERFACE encoder
(i.e. when parameter 91.02 Abs enc interf setting is
Hiperface). Typically, this parameter does not need to be set.
4800 4800 bit/s 0
9600 9600 bit/s 1
19200 19200 bit/s 2
38400 38400 bit/s 3
91.12 Hiperf node addr Defines the node address for HIPERFACE encoder (i.e. when
parameter 91.02 Abs enc interf setting is Hiperface).
Typically, this parameter does not need to be set.
0…255 HIPERFACE encoder node address. 1 = 1
91.20 SSI clock cycles Defines the length of the SSI message. The length is defined
as the number of clock cycles. The number of cycles can be
calculated by adding 1 to the number of bits in an SSI
message frame.
Used with SSI encoders, i.e. when parameter 91.02 Abs enc
interf setting is SSI.
2…127 Length of SSI message. 1 = 1
91.21 SSI position msb Defines the location of the MSB (most significant bit) of the
position data within an SSI message.
1…126 Location of MSB (bit number) in SSI position data. 1 = 1
91.22 SSI revol msb Defines the location of the MSB (most significant bit) of the
revolution count within an SSI message.
1…126 Location of MSB (bit number) in SSI revolution count. 1 = 1
91.23 SSI data format Selects the data format for SSI encoder (i.e. when parameter
91.02 Abs enc interf setting is SSI).
binary Binary data format. 0
gray Gray data format. 1

Parameters 227
91.24 SSI baud rate Selects the baud rate for SSI encoder (i.e. when parameter
91.02 Abs enc interf setting is SSI).
10 kbit/s 10 kbit/s baud rate. 0
91.25 SSI mode Selects the SSI encoder mode.
Note: This parameter needs to be set only when an SSI
encoder is used in continuous mode, i.e. without incremental
sin/cos signals (supported only as encoder 1). SSI encoder is
selected by setting parameter 91.02 Abs enc interf to SSI.
Initial pos. Single position transfer mode (initial position). 0
Continuous Continuous position transfer mode. 1
91.26 SSI transmit cyc Selects the transmission cycle for SSI encoder.
Note: This parameter needs to be set only when an SSI
sin/cos signals (supported only as encoder 1). SSI encoder is
selected by setting parameter 91.02 Abs enc interf to SSI.
50 µs 50 µs transmission cycle. 0
1 ms 1 ms transmission cycle. 4
2 ms 2 ms transmission cycle. 5
91.27 SSI zero phase Defines the phase angle within one sine/cosine signal period
that corresponds to the value of zero on the SSI serial link
data. The parameter is used to adjust the synchronization of
the SSI position data and the position based on sine/cosine
incremental signals. Incorrect synchronization may cause an
error of ±1 incremental period.
Note: This parameter needs only be set when an SSI
encoder with sine/cosine incremental signals is used in initial
position mode.
315-45 deg 315…45° phase angle. 0
45-135 deg 45…135° phase angle. 1
135-225 deg 135…225° phase angle. 2
225-315 deg 225…315° phase angle. 3
91.30 Endat mode Selects the EnDat encoder mode.
Note: This parameter needs to be set only when an EnDat
sin/cos signals (supported only as encoder 1). EnDat encoder
is selected by setting parameter 91.02 Abs enc interf to
EnDat.
Initial pos. Single position data transfer (initial position). 0
Continuous Continuous position data transfer mode. 1

228 Parameters
91.31 Endat max calc Selects the maximum encoder calculation time for EnDat
encoder.
Note: This parameter needs to be set only when an EnDat
sin/cos signals (supported only as encoder 1). EnDat encoder
is selected by setting parameter 91.02 Abs enc interf to
EnDat.
10 µs 10 µs maximum calculation time. 0
100 µs 100 µs maximum calculation time. 1
1 ms 1 ms maximum calculation time. 2
50 ms 50 ms maximum calculation time. 3
92
92 Resolver conf Resolver configuration.
92.01 Resolv polepairs Selects the number of pole pairs.
1 … 32 Number of pole pairs. 1 = 1
92.02 Exc signal ampl Defines the amplitude of the excitation signal.
4.0 … 12.0 Vrms Amplitude of excitation signal. 10 = 1 Vrms
92.03 Exc signal freq Defines the frequency of the excitation signal.
1 … 20 kHz Frequency of excitation signal. 1 = 1 kHz
93
93 Pulse enc conf Pulse encoder configuration.
93.01 Enc1 pulse nr Defines the pulse number per revolution for encoder 1.
0 … 65535 Number of pulses for encoder 1. 1 = 1
93.02 Enc1 type Selects the type of the encoder 1.
Quadrature Quadrature encoder (has two channels, A and B) 0
Single track Single track encoder (has one channel, A) 1
93.03 Enc1 sp CalcMode Selects the speed calculation mode for encoder 1.
A&B all Channels A and B: Rising and falling edges are used for
speed calculation. Channel B: Defines the direction of
rotation.
Notes:
• When single track mode has been selected by parameter
93.02 Enc1 type, this setting acts like the setting A all.
• When single track mode has been selected by parameter
93.02 Enc1 type, the speed is always positive.
0
A all Channel A: Rising and falling edges are used for speed
calculation. Channel B: Defines the direction of rotation.
Note: When single track mode has been selected by
parameter 93.02 Enc1 type, the speed is always positive.
1
A rising Channel A: Rising edges are used for speed calculation.
Channel B: Defines the direction of rotation.
2
A falling Channel A: Falling edges are used for speed calculation.
Channel B: Defines the direction of rotation.
3

Parameters 229
Auto rising One of the above modes is selected automatically depending
on the pulse frequency as follows:
4
Auto falling One of the above modes is selected automatically depending
on the pulse frequency as follows:
5
93.11 Enc2 pulse nr Defines the pulse number per revolution for encoder 2.
0 … 65535 Number of pulses for encoder 2. 1 = 1
93.12 Enc2 type Selects the type of the encoder 2.
Quadrature Quadrature encoder (has two channels, A and B) 0
Single track Single track encoder (has one channel, A) 1
93.13 Enc2 sp CalcMode Selects the speed calculation mode for encoder 2.
A&B all See parameter 93.03 Enc1 sp CalcMode. 0
A all See parameter 93.03 Enc1 sp CalcMode. 1
A rising See parameter 93.03 Enc1 sp CalcMode. 2
A falling See parameter 93.03 Enc1 sp CalcMode. 3
Auto rising See parameter 93.03 Enc1 sp CalcMode. 4
Auto falling See parameter 93.03 Enc1 sp CalcMode. 5
94
94 Ext IO conf I/O extension configuration.
94.01 Ext IO1 sel Activates an I/O extension installed into Slot 1.
None No extension installed into Slot 1. 0
FIO-01 FIO-01 extension installed into Slot 1. 1
94.02 Ext IO2 sel Activates an I/O extension installed into Slot 2.
None No 2nd extension installed into Slot 2. 0
95
95 Hw configuration Diverse hardware-related settings.
95.01 Ctrl boardSupply Selects how the drive control unit is powered.
Internal 24V The drive control unit is powered from the drive power unit it
is mounted on. This is the default setting.
0
External 24V The drive control unit is powered from an external power
supply.
1
Pulse frequency of the channel(s) Mode used
< 2442 Hz A&B all
2442…4884 Hz A all
> 4884 Hz A rising
Pulse frequency of the channel(s) Mode used
< 2442 Hz A&B all
2442…4884 Hz A all
> 4884 Hz A falling

230 Parameters
95.03 Temp inu ambient Defines the maximum ambient temperature. The value is
used by the drive cooling diagnostics.
0 … 55 °C Drive ambient temperature. 1 = 1 °C
97
97 User motor par Motor values supplied by the user that are used in the motor
model.
97.01 Use given params Activates the motor model parameters 97.02…97.14 and the
rotor angle offset parameter 97.20.
Notes:
• Parameter value is automatically set to zero when ID run is
selected by parameter 99.13 IDrun mode. The values of
parameters 97.02…97.20 are updated according to the
motor characteristics identified during the ID run.
• This parameter cannot be changed while the drive is
running.
NoUserPars Parameters 97.02…97.20 inactive. 0
UserMotPars The values of parameters 97.02…97.14 are used in the motor
model.
1
UserPosOffs The value of parameter 97.20 is used as the rotor angle
offset. Parameters 97.02…97.14 are inactive.
2
AllUserPars The values of parameters 97.02…97.14 are used in the motor
model, and the value of parameter 97.20 is used as the rotor
angle offset.
3
97.02 Rs user Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model.
0.00000 … 0.50000
p.u.
Stator resistance in per unit. 100000 =
1 p.u.
97.03 Rr user Defines the rotor resistance RR of the motor model.
Note: This parameter is valid only for asynchronous motors.
0.00000 … 0.50000
p.u.
Rotor resistance in per unit. 100000 =
1 p.u.
97.04 Lm user Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model.
0.00000 …
10.00000 p.u.
Main inductance in per unit. 100000 =
1 p.u.
97.05 SigmaL user Defines the leakage inductance σLS.
0.00000 … 1.00000
p.u.
Leakage inductance in per unit. 100000 =
1 p.u.
97.06 Ld user Defines the direct axis (synchronous) inductance.
Note: This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet
motors.
0.00000 …
10.00000 p.u
Direct axis inductance in per unit. 100000 =
1 p.u.
97.07 Lq user Defines the quadrature axis (synchronous) inductance.
motors.
0.00000 …
10.00000 p.u
Quadrature axis inductance in per unit. 100000 =
1 p.u.

Parameters 231
97.08 Pm flux user Defines the permanent magnet flux.
motors.
0.00000 … 2.00000
p.u
Permanent magnet flux in per unit. 100000 =
1 p.u.
97.09 Rs user SI Defines the stator resistance RS of the motor model.
0.00000 …
100.00000 ohm
Stator resistance. 100000 =
1 ohm
97.10 Rr user SI Defines the rotor resistance RR of the motor model.
0.00000 …
100.00000 ohm
Rotor resistance. 100000 =
1 ohm
97.11 Lm user SI Defines the main inductance LM of the motor model.
0.00 …100000.00
mH
Main inductance. 100 = 1 mH
97.12 SigL user SI Defines the leakage inductance σLS.
0.00 …100000.00
mH
Leakage inductance. 100 = 1 mH
97.13 Ld user SI Defines the direct axis (synchronous) inductance.
motors.
0.00 …100000.00
mH
Direct axis inductance. 100 = 1 mH
97.14 Lq user SI Defines the quadrature axis (synchronous) inductance.
motors.
0.00 …100000.00
mH
Quadrature axis inductance. 100 = 1 mH
97.20 PM angle offset Defines an angle offset between the zero position of the
synchronous motor and the zero position of the position
sensor.
Notes:
• The value is in electrical degrees. The electrical angle
equals the mechanical angle multiplied by the number of
motor pole pairs.
• This parameter is valid only for permanent magnet motors.
0…360° Angle offset. 1 = 1°
99
99 Start-up data Language selection, motor configuration and ID run settings.
99.01 Language Selects the language of the control panel displays.
Note: Not all languages listed below are necessarily
supported.
English English.
Español Spanish.
Deutsch German.
Italiano Italian.
Suomi Finnish.

232 Parameters
Svenska Swedish.
Türkçe Turkish.
99.04 Motor type Selects the motor type.
running.
AM Asynchronous motor. Three-phase AC induction motor with
squirrel cage rotor.
0
PMSM Permanent magnet motor. Three-phase AC synchronous
motor with permanent magnet rotor and sinusoidal BackEMF
voltage.
1
99.05 Motor ctrl mode Selects the motor control mode.
DTC Direct torque control. This mode is suitable for most
applications.
Note: Instead of direct torque control, use scalar control
• with multimotor applications 1) if the load is not equally
shared between the motors, 2) if the motors are of different
sizes, or 3) if the motors are going to be changed after the
motor identification (ID run),
• if the nominal current of the motor is less than 1/6 of the
nominal output current of the drive,
• if the drive is used with no motor connected (for example,
for test purposes),
• if the drive runs a medium-voltage motor through a step-up
transformer.
0
Scalar Scalar control. This mode is suitable in special cases where
DTC cannot be applied. In scalar control, the drive is
controlled with a frequency reference. The outstanding motor
control accuracy of DTC cannot be achieved in scalar control.
Some standard features are disabled in scalar control mode.
Note: Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current
of the motor does not exceed 90% of the nominal current of
the inverter.
See also section Scalar motor control on page 74.
1
99.06 Mot nom current Defines the nominal motor current. Must be equal to the value
on the motor rating plate. If multiple motors are connected to
the drive, enter the total current of the motors.
Notes:
• Correct motor run requires that the magnetizing current of
the motor does not exceed 90% of the nominal current of
the drive.
running.
0.0 … 6400.0 A Nominal current of the motor. The allowable range is 1/6…2 ×
I2N of the drive (0…2 × I2N with scalar control mode).
10 = 1 A

Parameters 233
99.07 Mot nom voltage Defines the nominal motor voltage as fundamental phase-to-
phase rms voltage supplied to the motor at the nominal
operating point. This setting must match the value on the
rating plate of the motor.
Notes:
• With permanent magnet motors, the nominal voltage is the
BackEMF voltage at nominal speed of the motor. If the
voltage is given as voltage per rpm, e.g. 60 V per 1000
rpm, the voltage for a nominal speed of 3000 rpm is
3 × 60 V = 180 V. Note that the nominal voltage is not
equal to the equivalent DC motor voltage (EDCM)
specified by some motor manufacturers. The nominal
voltage can be calculated by dividing the EDCM voltage by
1.7 (or square root of 3).
• The stress on the motor insulation is always dependent on
the drive supply voltage. This also applies to the case
where the motor voltage rating is lower than that of the
drive and the supply.
running.
1/6 … 2 × UN Nominal voltage of the motor. 10 = 1 V
99.08 Mot nom freq Defines the nominal motor frequency.
running.
5.0 … 500.0 Hz Nominal frequency of the motor. 10 = 1 V
99.09 Mot nom speed Defines the nominal motor speed. The setting must match the
value on the rating plate of the motor.
running.
0 … 10000 rpm Nominal speed of the motor. 1 = 1 rpm
99.10 Mot nom power Defines the nominal motor power. The setting must match the
value on the rating plate of the motor. If multiple motors are
connected to the drive, enter the total power of the motors.
The unit is selected by parameter 16.17 Power unit.
running.
0.00 … 10000.00
kW
Nominal power of the motor. 100 = 1 kW
99.11 Mot nom cosfii Defines the cosphi of the motor for a more accurate motor
model. (Not applicable to permanent magnet motors.) Not
obligatory; if set, should match the value on the rating plate of
the motor.
running.
0.00 … 1.00 Cosphi of the motor. 100 = 1
99.12 Mot nom torque Defines the nominal motor shaft torque for a more accurate
motor model. Not obligatory.
running.
0 … 2147483.647
Nm
Nominal motor torque. 1000 = 1 N•m

234 Parameters
99.13 IDrun mode Selects the type of the motor identification performed at the
next start of the drive (for Direct Torque Control). During the
identification, the drive will identify the characteristics of the
motor for optimum motor control. After the ID run, the drive is
stopped. Note: This parameter cannot be changed while the
drive is running.
Once the ID run is activated, it can be cancelled by stopping
the drive: If ID run has already been performed once,
parameter is automatically set to NO. If no ID run has been
performed yet, parameter is automatically set to Standstill. In
this case, the ID run must be performed.
Notes:
• ID run can only be performed in local control (i.e. when
drive is controlled via PC tool or control panel).
• ID run cannot be performed if parameter 99.05 Motor ctrl
mode is set to Scalar.
• ID run must be performed every time any of the motor
parameters (99.04, 99.06…99.12) have been changed.
Parameter is automatically set to Standstill after the motor
parameters have been set.
With permanent magnet motor, the motor shaft must NOT
be locked and the load torque must be < 10% during the ID
run (Normal/Reduced/Standstill).
• Ensure that possible Safe Torque Off and emergency stop
circuits are closed during ID run.
• Mechanical brake is not opened by the logic for the ID run.
No No motor ID run is requested. This mode can be selected
only if the ID run (Normal/Reduced/Standstill) has already
been performed once.
0
Normal Normal ID run. Guarantees the best possible control
accuracy. The ID run takes about 90 seconds. This mode
should be selected whenever it is possible.
Notes:
• The driven machinery must be de-coupled from the motor
with Normal ID run, if the load torque is higher than 20%,
or if the machinery is not able to withstand the nominal
torque transient during the ID run.
• Check the direction of rotation of the motor before starting
the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the
forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to
approximately 50…100% of the nominal speed
during the ID run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO
RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE
ID RUN!
1

Parameters 235
Reduced Reduced ID Run. This mode should be selected instead of
the Normal ID Run if
• mechanical losses are higher than 20% (i.e. the motor
cannot be de-coupled from the driven equipment), or if
• flux reduction is not allowed while the motor is running (i.e.
in case of a motor with an integrated brake supplied from
the motor terminals).
With Reduced ID run, the control in the field weakening area
or at high torques is not necessarily as accurate as with the
Normal ID run. Reduced ID run is completed faster than the
Normal ID Run (< 90 seconds).
Note: Check the direction of rotation of the motor before
starting the ID run. During the run, the motor will rotate in the
forward direction.
WARNING! The motor will run at up to
approximately 50…100% of the nominal speed
during the ID run. ENSURE THAT IT IS SAFE TO
RUN THE MOTOR BEFORE PERFORMING THE
ID RUN!
2
Standstill Standstill ID run. The motor is injected with DC current. With
an asynchronous motor, the motor shaft is not rotating (with
permanent magnet motor the shaft can rotate < 0.5
revolution).
Note: This mode should be selected only if the Normal or
Reduced ID run is not possible due to the restrictions caused
by the connected mechanics (e.g. with lift or crane
applications).
3
Autophasing During autophasing, the start angle of the motor is
determined. Note that other motor model values are not
updated. See also parameter 11.07 Autophasing mode.
Notes:
• Autophasing can only be selected after the Normal/
Reduced/Standstill ID run has been performed once.
Autophasing is used when an absolute encoder has been
added/changed to a permanent magnet motor and there is
no need to perform the Normal/Reduced/Standstill ID run
again.
• During Autophasing, the motor shaft must NOT be locked
and the load torque must be < 5%.
4
Cur meas cal Current offset and gain measurement calibration. The
calibration will be performed at next start.
5

Additional parameter data 237
7
Additional parameter data
This chapter lists the parameters with some additional data. For parameter
descriptions, see chapter Parameters on page 93.
Terms and abbreviations
Term Definition
Actual signal Signal measured or calculated by the drive. Can be monitored by the user.
No user setting is possible.
Bit pointer Bit pointer. A bit pointer can point to a single bit in the value of another
parameter, or be fixed to 0 (C.FALSE) or 1 (C.TRUE).
enum Enumerated list, i.e. selection list.
FbEq Fieldbus equivalent: The scaling between the value shown on the panel
and the integer used in serial communication.
INT32 32-bit integer value (31 bits + sign).
No. Parameter number.
Pb Packed boolean.
REAL
REAL24
16-bit value 16-bit value (31 bits + sign)
= integer value = fractional value
8-bit value 24-bit value (31 bits + sign)
= integer value = fractional value

238 Additional parameter data
Fieldbus addresses
Refer to the User’s Manual of the fieldbus adapter.
Pointer parameter format in fieldbus communication
Value and bit pointer parameters are transferred between the fieldbus adapter and
drive as 32-bit integer values.
32-bit integer value pointers
When a value pointer parameter is connected to the value of another parameter, the
format is as follows:
When a value pointer parameter is connected to a solution program, the format is as
follows:
Note: Value pointer parameters connected to a solution program are read-only via
fieldbus.
Type Data type. See enum, INT32, Bit pointer, Val pointer, Pb, REAL, REAL24,
UINT32.
UINT32 32-bit unsigned integer value.
Val pointer Value pointer. Points to the value of another parameter.
Bit
30…31 16…29 8…15 0…7
Name Source type Group Index
Value 1 - 1…255 1…255
Description Value pointer is
connected to
parameter
- Group of source
parameter
Index of source
parameter
Bit
30…31 24…29 0…23
Name Source type Not in use Address
Value 2 - 0…223
Description Value pointer is
connected to solution
program.
- Relative address of
solution program
variable

32-bit integer bit pointers
When a bit pointer parameter is connected to value 0 or 1, the format is as follows:
When a bit pointer parameter is connected to a bit value of another parameter, the
format is as follows:
When a bit pointer parameter is connected to a solution program, the format is as
follows:
Note: Bit pointer parameters connected to a solution program are read-only via
fieldbus.
Bit
30…31 16…29 0
Name Source type Not in use Value
Value 0 - 0…1
Description Bit pointer is connected
to 0/1.
- 0 = False, 1 = True
Bit
30…31 24…29 16…23 8…15 0…7
Name Source type Not in use Bit sel Group Index
Value 1 - 0…31 2…255 1…255
Description Bit pointer is
connected to
signal bit
value.
- Bit selection Group of
source
parameter
Index of
source
parameter
Bit
30…31 24…29 0…23
Name Source type Bit sel Address
Value 2 0…31 0…223
Description Bit pointer is connected
to solution program.
Bit selection Relative address of
solution program
variable

Parameter groups 1…9
No. Name Type
Data
length
Range Unit
Update
time
Notes
01 Actual values
01.01 Motor speed rpm REAL 32 -30000…30000 rpm 250 µs
01.02 Motor speed % REAL 32 -1000…1000 % 2 ms
01.03 Output frequency REAL 32 -30000…30000 Hz 2 ms
01.04 Motor current REAL 32 0…30000 A 10 ms
01.05 Motor current % REAL 16 0…1000 % 2 ms
01.06 Motor torque REAL 16 -1600…1600 % 2 ms
01.07 Dc-voltage REAL 32 0…2000 V 2 ms
01.08 Encoder1 speed REAL 32 -32768…32768 rpm 250 µs
01.09 Encoder1 pos REAL24 32 0…1 rev 250 µs
01.10 Encoder2 speed REAL 32 -32768…32768 rpm 250 µs
01.11 Encoder2 pos REAL24 32 0…1 rev 250 µs
01.12 Pos act REAL 32 -32768…32768 rev 2 ms
01.13 Pos 2nd enc REAL 32 -32768…32768 rev 2 ms
01.14 Motor speed est REAL 32 -30000…30000 rpm 2 ms
01.15 Temp inverter REAL24 16 -10…100 % 2 ms
01.16 Temp brk chopper REAL24 16 0…100 % 2 ms
01.17 Motor temp1 REAL 16 -10…250 °C 10 ms
01.18 Motor temp2 REAL 16 -10…250 °C 10 ms
01.19 Used supply volt REAL 16 0…1000 V 10 ms
01.20 Brake res load REAL24 16 0…1000 % 50 ms
01.21 Cpu usage UINT32 16 0…100 % -
01.22 Power inu out REAL 32 -32768…32768 kW or
hp
10 ms
01.23 Motor power REAL 32 -32768…32768 kW or
hp
2 ms
01.24 kWh inverter INT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms
01.25 kWh supply INT32 32 -2147483647 …
2147483647
kWh 10 ms
01.26 On-time counter INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms
01.27 Run-time counter INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms
01.28 Fan on-time INT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 10 ms
01.29 Torq nom scale INT32 32 0…2147483.647 Nm -
01.30 Polepairs INT32 16 0…1000 - -
01.31 Mech time const REAL 32 0…32767 s 10 ms
01.32 Temp phase A REAL24 16 0…100 % 2 ms
01.33 Temp phase B REAL24 16 0…100 % 2 ms
01.34 Temp phase C REAL24 16 0…100 % 2 ms
01.35 Saved energy INT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 10 ms
01.36 Saved amount INT32 32 0…2147483647 - 10 ms
01.37 Saved CO2 INT32 32 0…2147483647 t 10 ms
02 I/O values
02.01 DI status Pb 16 0b00000000 …
0b11111111
- 2 ms
02.02 RO status Pb 16 0b0000000 …
0b1111111
- 2 ms
02.03 DIO status Pb 16 0b0000000000 …
0b1111111111
- 2 ms
02.04 AI1 REAL 16 -11…11 V or
-22…22 mA
V or mA 2 ms
02.05 AI1 scaled REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms

02.06 AI2 REAL 16 -11…11 V or
-22…22 mA
V or mA 2 ms
02.07 AI2 scaled REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms
02.08 AI3 REAL 16 -22…22 mA 2 ms
02.09 AI3 scaled REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms
02.10 AI4 REAL 16 -22…22 mA 2 ms
02.11 AI4 scaled REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms
02.12 AI5 REAL 16 -22…22 mA 2 ms
02.13 AI5 scaled REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms
02.14 AI6 REAL 16 -22…22 mA 2 ms
02.15 AI6 scaled REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms
02.16 AO1 REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 2 ms
02.17 AO2 REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 2 ms
02.18 AO3 REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 2 ms
02.19 AO4 REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 2 ms
02.20 Freq in REAL 32 0…32767 Hz 250 µs
02.21 Freq out REAL 32 0…32767 Hz 250 µs
02.22 FBA main cw Pb 32 0x00000000 …
0xFFFFFFFF
- 500 µs
02.24 FBA main sw Pb 32 0x00000000 …
0xFFFFFFFF
- -
02.26 FBA main ref1 INT32 32 -2147483647 …
2147483647
- 500 µs
02.27 FBA main ref2 INT32 32 -2147483647 …
2147483647
- 500 µs
02.30 D2D main cw Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 500 µs
02.31 D2D follower cw Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 2 ms
02.32 D2D ref1 REAL 32 -2147483647 …
2147483647
- 500 µs
02.33 D2D ref2 REAL 32 -2147483647 …
2147483647
- 2 ms
02.34 Panel ref REAL 32 -32768…32768 rpm 10 ms
02.35 FEN DI status Pb 16 0…0x33 - 500 µs
03 Control values
03.03 SpeedRef unramp REAL 32 -30000…30000 rpm 250 µs
03.05 SpeedRef ramped REAL 32 -30000…30000 rpm 250 µs
03.06 SpeedRef used REAL 32 -30000…30000 rpm 250 µs
03.07 Speed error filt REAL 32 -30000…30000 rpm 250 µs
03.08 Acc comp torq REAL 16 -1600…1600 % 250 µs
03.09 Torq ref sp ctrl REAL 16 -1600…1600 % 250 µs
03.11 Torq ref ramped REAL 16 -1000…1000 % 250 µs
03.12 Torq ref sp lim REAL 16 -1000…1000 % 250 µs
03.13 Torq ref to TC REAL 16 -1600…1600 % 250 µs
03.14 Torq ref used REAL 16 -1600…1600 % 250 µs
03.15 Brake torq mem REAL 16 -1000…1000 % 2 ms
03.16 Brake command enum 16 0…1 - 2 ms
03.17 Flux ref used REAL24 16 0…200 % 2 ms
03.18 Speed ref pot REAL 32 -30000…30000 rpm 10 ms
04 Appl values
04.01 Process act1 REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms
04.02 Process act2 REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms
04.03 Process act REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms
No. Name Type
Data
length
Range Unit
Update
time
Notes

04.04 Process PID err REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms
04.05 Process PID out REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 2 ms
04.06 Process var1 REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 10 ms
04.09 Counter ontime1 UINT32 32 0…2147483647 s 10 ms
04.10 Counter ontime2 UINT32 32 0…2147483647 s 10 ms
04.11 Counter edge1 UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 10 ms
04.12 Counter edge2 UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 10 ms
04.13 Counter value1 UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 10 ms
04.14 Counter value2 UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 10 ms
06 Drive status
06.01 Status word1 Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 2 ms
06.02 Status word2 Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 2 ms
06.03 Speed ctrl stat Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 250 µs
06.05 Limit word1 Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 250 µs
06.07 Torq lim status Pb 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 250 µs
06.12 Op mode ack enum 16 0…11 - 2 ms
06.13 Superv status Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 2 ms
06.14 Timed func stat Pb 16 0b0000…0b1111 - 10 ms
06.15 Counter status Pb 16 0b000000…0b111111 - 10 ms
08 Alarms & faults
08.01 Active fault enum 16 0…65535 - -
08.02 Last fault enum 16 0…2147483647 - -
08.03 Fault time hi INT32 32 -231
…231
- 1 (date) -
08.04 Fault time lo INT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 (time) -
08.05 Alarm word1 UINT32 16 0x0000…0xFFFF - 2 ms
09 System info
09.01 Drive type INT32 16 0…65535 - -
09.02 Drive rating ID INT32 16 0…65535 - -
09.03 Firmware ID Pb 16 - - -
09.04 Firmware ver Pb 16 - - -
09.05 Firmware patch Pb 16 - - -
09.10 Int logic ver Pb 32 - - -
09.20 Option slot1 INT32 16 0…21 - -
09.21 Option slot2 INT32 16 0…21 - -
09.22 Option slot3 INT32 16 0…21 - -
No. Name Type
Data
length
Range Unit
Update
time
Notes

Parameter groups 10…99
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)
10 Start/stop
10.01 Ext1 start func enum 16 0…6 - In1
10.02 Ext1 start in1 Bit pointer 32 - - DI1
10.03 Ext1 start in2 Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
10.04 Ext2 start func enum 16 0…6 - Not sel
10.07 Jog1 start Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
10.08 Jog2 start Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
10.09 Jog enable Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
10.10 Fault reset sel Bit pointer 32 - - DI3
10.11 Run enable Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE
10.13 Em stop off3 Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE
10.15 Em stop off1 Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE
10.17 Start enable Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE
10.19 Start inhibit enum 16 0…1 - Disabled
10.20 Start interl func enum 16 0…1 - Off2 stop
11 Start/stop mode
11.01 Start mode enum 16 0…2 - Automatic
11.02 Dc-magn time UINT32 16 0…10000 ms 500 ms
11.03 Stop mode enum 16 1…2 - Coast
11.04 Dc hold speed REAL 16 0…1000 rpm 5.0 rpm
11.05 Dc hold curr ref UINT32 16 0…100 % 30%
11.06 Dc hold enum 16 0…1 - Disabled
11.07 Autophasing mode enum 16 0…2 - Turning
12 Operating mode
12.01 Ext1/Ext2 sel Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
12.03 Ext1 ctrl mode enum 16 1…5 - Speed
12.05 Ext2 ctrl mode enum 16 1…5 - Speed
13 Analogue inputs
13.01 AI1 filt time REAL 16 0…30 s 0.100 s
13.02 AI1 max REAL 16 -22…22 mA or -11…11 V mA or V 10.000 V
13.03 AI1 min REAL 16 -22…22 mA or -11…11 V mA or V -10.000 V
13.04 AI1 max scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 1500.000
13.05 AI1 min scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -1500.000
13.07 AI2 max REAL 16 -22…22 mA or -11…11 V mA or V 10.000 V
13.08 AI2 min REAL 16 -22…22 mA or -11…11 V mA or V -10.000 V
13.09 AI2 max scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 100.000

13.10 AI2 min scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -100.000
13.12 AI3 max REAL 16 -22…22 mA or -11…11 V mA or V 22.000 mA
13.13 AI3 min REAL 16 -22…22 mA or -11…11 V mA or V 4.000 mA
13.14 AI3 max scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 1500.000
13.15 AI3 min scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000
13.19 AI4 max scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 1500.000
13.20 AI4 min scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000
13.24 AI5 max scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 1500.000
13.25 AI5 min scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000
13.29 AI6 max scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 1500.000
13.30 AI6 min scale REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000
13.31 AI tune enum 16 0…4 - No action
13.32 AI superv func enum 16 0…3 - No
13.33 AI superv cw UINT32 32 0b0000…0b1111 - 0b0000
14 Digital I/O
14.01 DI invert mask Pb 16 0b00000000 … 0b111111111 - 0b00000000
14.02 DIO1 conf enum 16 0…1 - Output
14.03 DIO1 out src Bit pointer 32 - - Ready relay
14.04 DIO1 Ton UINT32 16 0…3000 s 0.0 s
14.05 DIO1 Toff UINT32 16 0…3000 s 0.0 s
14.07 DIO2 out src Bit pointer 32 - - RunningRelay
14.08 DIO2 Ton UINT32 16 0…3000 s 0.0 s
14.09 DIO2 Toff UINT32 16 0…3000 s 0.0 s
14.11 DIO3 out src Bit pointer 32 - - Fault(-1)
14.15 DIO4 out src Bit pointer 32 - - Ready relay
14.19 DIO5 out src Bit pointer 32 - - Ref running
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

14.23 DIO6 out src Bit pointer 32 - - Fault
14.27 DIO7 out src Bit pointer 32 - - Alarm
14.31 DIO8 out src Bit pointer 32 - - Ext2 active
14.35 DIO9 out src Bit pointer 32 - - At setpoint
14.39 DIO10 out src Bit pointer 32 - - Zero speed
14.42 RO1 src Bit pointer 32 - - Ready relay
14.43 RO1 Ton UINT32 16 0…3000 s 0.0 s
14.44 RO1 Toff UINT32 16 0…3000 s 0.0 s
14.45 RO2 src Bit pointer 32 - - RunningRelay
14.48 RO3 src Bit pointer 32 - - Fault(-1)
14.51 RO4 src Bit pointer 32 - - P.06.02.02
14.54 RO5 src Bit pointer 32 - - P.06.02.04
14.57 Freq in max REAL 16 3…32768 Hz 1000 Hz
14.58 Freq in min REAL 16 3…32768 Hz 3 Hz
14.59 Freq in max scal REAL 16 -32768…32768 - 1500
14.60 Freq in min scal REAL 16 -32768… 32768 - 0
14.61 Freq out src Val pointer 32 - - P.01.01
14.62 Freq out max src REAL 16 0…32768 - 1500
14.63 Freq out min src REAL 16 0…32768 - 0
14.64 Freq out max sca REAL 16 3…32768 Hz 1000 Hz
14.65 Freq out min sca REAL 16 3…32768 Hz 3 Hz
14.67 RO6 src Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
14.70 RO7 src Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
15 Analogue outputs
15.01 AO1 src Val pointer 32 - - Current %
15.02 AO1 filt time REAL 16 0…30 s 0.100 s
15.03 AO1 out max REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 20.000 mA
15.04 AO1 out min REAL 16 0 … 22.7 mA 4.000 mA
15.05 AO1 src max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 100.000
15.06 AO1 src min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000
15.07 AO2 src Val pointer 32 - - Speed %
15.11 AO2 src max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 100.000
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

15.12 AO2 src min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -100.000
15.13 AO3 src Val pointer 32 - - Frequency
15.17 AO3 src max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 50.000
15.18 AO3 src min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000
15.19 AO4 src Val pointer 32 - - Frequency
15.23 AO4 src max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 50.000
15.24 AO4 src min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.000
15.25 AO ctrl word UINT32 32 0b0000…0b1111 - 0b0000
16 System
16.01 Local lock Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
16.02 Parameter lock enum 16 0…2 - Open
16.03 Pass code INT32 32 0…2147483647 - 0
16.04 Param restore enum 16 0…2 - Done
16.07 Param save enum 16 0…1 - Done
16.09 User set sel enum 32 1…10 - No request
16.10 User set log Pb 32 0…1024 - N/A
16.11 User IO sel lo Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
16.12 User IO sel hi Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
16.14 Reset ChgParLog enum 16 0…1 - Done
16.15 Menu set sel enum 16 0…2 - No request
16.16 Menu set active enum 16 0…2 - Short menu
16.17 Power unit enum 16 0…1 - kW
19 Speed calculation
19.01 Speed scaling REAL 16 0…30000 rpm 1500 rpm
19.02 Speed fb sel enum 16 0…2 - Estimated
19.03 MotorSpeed filt REAL 32 0…10000 ms 8.000 ms
19.06 Zero speed limit REAL 32 0…30000 rpm 30.00 rpm
19.07 Zero speed delay UINT32 16 0…30000 ms 0 ms
19.08 Above speed lim REAL 16 0…30000 rpm 0 rpm
19.09 Speed TripMargin REAL 32 0…10000 rpm 500.0 rpm
19.10 Speed window REAL 16 0…30000 rpm 100 rpm
20 Limits
20.01 Maximum speed REAL 32 0…30000 rpm 1500 rpm
20.02 Minimum speed REAL 32 -30000…0 rpm -1500 rpm
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

20.03 Pos speed ena Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE
20.04 Neg speed ena Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE
20.05 Maximum current REAL 32 0…30000 A 0.00 A
20.06 Torq lim sel Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
20.07 Maximum torque1 REAL 16 0…1600 % 300.0%
20.08 Minimum torque1 REAL 16 -1600…0 % -300.0%
20.09 Maximum torque2 REAL 16 - - Max torque1
20.10 Minimum torque2 REAL 16 - - Min torque1
20.12 P motoring lim REAL 16 0…1600 % 300.0%
20.13 P generating lim REAL 16 0…1600 % 300.0%
21 Speed ref
21.01 Speed ref1 sel Val pointer 32 - - AI1 scaled
21.02 Speed ref2 sel Val pointer 32 - - Zero
21.03 Speed ref1 func enum 16 0…5 - Ref1
21.04 Speed ref1/2 sel Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
21.05 Speed share REAL 16 -8…8 - 1.000
21.07 Speed ref jog1 REAL 16 -30000…30000 rpm 0 rpm
21.08 Speed ref jog2 REAL 16 -30000…30000 rpm 0 rpm
21.09 SpeedRef min abs REAL 16 0…30000 rpm 0 rpm
21.10 Mot pot func enum 16 0…1 - Reset
21.11 Mot pot up Bit pointer 32 - - DI5
21.12 Mot pot down Bit pointer 32 - - DI6
22 Speed ref ramp
22.01 Acc/Dec sel Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
22.02 Acc time1 REAL 32 0…1800 s 20.000 s
22.03 Dec time1 REAL 32 0…1800 s 20.000 s
22.04 Acc time2 REAL 32 0…1800 s 60.000 s
22.05 Dec time2 REAL 32 0…1800 s 60.000 s
22.06 Shape time acc1 REAL 32 0…1000 s 0.100 s
22.07 Shape time acc2 REAL 32 0…1000 s 0.100 s
22.08 Shape time dec1 REAL 32 0…1000 s 0.100 s
22.09 Shape time dec2 REAL 32 0…1000 s 0.100 s
22.10 Acc time jogging REAL 32 0…1800 s 0.000 s
22.11 Dec time jogging REAL 32 0…1800 s 0.000 s
22.12 Em stop time REAL 32 0…1800 s 3.000 s
23 Speed ctrl
23.01 Proport gain REAL 16 0…200 - 10.00
23.02 Integration time REAL 32 0…600 s 0.500 s
23.03 Derivation time REAL 16 0…10 s 0.000 s
23.04 Deriv filt time REAL 16 0…1000 ms 8.0 ms
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

23.05 Acc comp DerTime REAL 32 0…600 s 0.00 s
23.06 Acc comp Ftime REAL 16 0…1000 ms 8.0 ms
23.07 Speed err Ftime REAL 16 0…1000 ms 0.0 ms
23.08 Speed additive Val pointer 32 - - Zero
23.09 Max torq sp ctrl REAL 16 -1600…1600 % 300.0%
23.10 Min torq sp ctrl REAL 16 -1600…1600 % -300.0%
23.11 SpeedErr winFunc enum 16 0…2 - Disabled
23.12 SpeedErr win hi REAL 16 0…3000 rpm 0 rpm
23.13 SpeedErr win lo REAL 16 0…3000 rpm 0 rpm
23.14 Drooping rate REAL 16 0…100 % 0.00%
23.15 PI adapt max sp REAL 16 0…30000 rpm 0 rpm
23.16 PI adapt min sp REAL 16 0…30000 rpm 0 rpm
23.17 Pcoef at min sp REAL 16 0…10 - 1.000
23.18 Icoef at min sp REAL 16 0…10 - 1.000
23.20 PI tune mode enum 16 0…4 - Done
23.21 Tune bandwidth REAL 16 0…2000 Hz 100.00 Hz
23.22 Tune damping REAL 16 0…200 - 1.5
24 Torque ref
24.01 Torq ref1 sel Val pointer 32 - - AI2 scaled
24.02 Torq ref add sel Val pointer 32 - - Zero
24.03 Maximum torq ref REAL 16 0…1000 % 300.0%
24.04 Minimum torq ref REAL 16 -1000…0 % -300.0%
24.05 Load share REAL 16 -8…8 - 1.000
24.06 Torq ramp up UINT32 32 0…60 s 0.000 s
24.07 Torq ramp down UINT32 32 0…60 s 0.000 s
25 Critical speed
25.01 Crit speed sel enum 16 0…1 - Disable
25.02 Crit speed1 lo REAL 16 -30000…30000 rpm 0 rpm
25.03 Crit speed1 hi REAL 16 -30000…30000 rpm 0 rpm
26 Constant speeds
26.01 Const speed func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b00
26.02 Const speed sel1 Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
26.06 Const speed1 REAL 16 -30000…30000 rpm 0 rpm
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

27 Process PID
27.01 PID setpoint sel Val pointer 32 - - AI1 scaled
27.02 PID fbk func enum 16 0…8 - Act1
27.03 PID fbk1 src Val pointer 32 - - AI2 scaled
27.04 PID fbk2 src Val pointer 32 - - AI2 scaled
27.05 PID fbk1 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 100.00
27.06 PID fbk1 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -100.00
27.07 PID fbk2 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 100.00
27.08 PID fbk2 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -100.00
27.09 PID fbk gain REAL 16 -32.768 … 32.767 - 1.000
27.10 PID fbk ftime REAL 16 0…30 s 0.040 s
27.12 PID gain REAL 16 0…100 - 1.00
27.13 PID integ time REAL 16 0…320 s 60.00 s
27.14 PID deriv time REAL 16 0…10 s 0.00 s
27.15 PID deriv filter REAL 16 0…10 s 1.00 s
27.16 PID error inv Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
27.17 PID mode enum 16 0…2 - Direct
27.18 PID maximum REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 100.0
27.19 PID minimum REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -100.0
27.22 Sleep mode enum 16 0…2 - No
27.23 Sleep level REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.0
27.24 Sleep delay UINT32 32 0…360 s 0.0 s
27.25 Wake up level REAL 32 0…32768 - 0.0
27.26 Wake up delay UINT32 32 0…360 s 0.0 s
27.27 Sleep ena Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
30 Fault functions
30.01 External fault Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE
30.02 Speed ref safe REAL 16 -30000…30000 rpm 0 rpm
30.03 Local ctrl loss enum 16 0…3 - Fault
30.04 Mot phase loss enum 16 0…1 - Fault
30.05 Earth fault enum 16 0…2 - Fault
30.06 Suppl phs loss enum 16 0…1 - Fault
30.07 Sto diagnostic enum 16 1…3 - Fault
30.08 Cross connection enum 16 0…1 - Fault
30.09 Stall function Pb 16 0b000…0b111 - 0b111
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

30.10 Stall curr lim REAL 16 0…1600 % 300.0%
30.11 Stall freq hi REAL 16 0.5 … 1000 Hz 20.0 Hz
30.12 Stall time UINT32 16 0…3600 s 20 s
31 Mot therm prot
31.01 Mot temp1 prot enum 16 0…2 - No
31.02 Mot temp1 src enum 16 0…12 - Estimated
31.03 Mot temp1 almLim INT32 16 0…200 °C 90 °C
31.04 Mot temp1 fltLim INT32 16 0…200 °C 110 °C
31.05 Mot temp2 prot enum 16 0…2 - No
31.06 Mot temp2 src enum 16 0…12 - Estimated
31.07 Mot temp2 almLim INT32 16 0…200 °C 90 °C
31.08 Mot temp2 fltLim INT32 16 0…200 °C 110 °C
31.09 Mot ambient temp INT32 16 -60…100 °C 20 °C
31.10 Mot load curve INT32 16 50…150 % 100%
31.11 Zero speed load INT32 16 50…150 % 100%
31.12 Break point INT32 16 0.01…500 Hz 45.00 Hz
31.13 Mot nom tempRise INT32 16 0…300 °C 80 °C
31.14 Mot therm time INT32 16 100…10000 s 256 s
32 Automatic reset
32.01 Autoreset sel Pb 16 0b000000…0b111111 - 0b000000
32.02 Number of trials UINT32 16 0…5 - 0
32.03 Trial time UINT32 16 1…600 s 30.0 s
32.04 Delay time UINT32 16 0…120 s 0.0 s
33 Supervision
33.01 Superv1 func enum 16 0…4 - Disabled
33.02 Superv1 act Val pointer 32 - - Speed rpm
33.03 Superv1 hi REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.00
33.04 Superv1 lo REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.00
33.06 Superv2 act Val pointer 32 - - Current
33.07 Superv2 hi REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.00
33.08 Superv2 lo REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.00
33.10 Superv3 act Val pointer 32 - - Torque
33.11 Superv3 hi REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.00
33.12 Superv3 lo REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 0.00
34 User load curve
34.01 Overload func Pb 16 0b000000…0b111111 - 0b000000
34.02 Underload func Pb 16 0b0000…0b1111 - 0b0000
34.03 Load freq1 REAL 16 1…500 Hz 5 Hz
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

34.08 Load low lim1 REAL 16 0…1600 % 10%
34.09 Load low lim2 REAL 16 0…1600 % 15%
34.10 Load low lim3 REAL 16 0…1600 % 25%
34.11 Load low lim4 REAL 16 0…1600 % 30%
34.12 Load low lim5 REAL 16 0…1600 % 30%
34.13 Load high lim1 REAL 16 0…1600 % 300%
34.18 Load integ time UINT32 16 0…10000 s 100 s
34.19 Load cool time UINT32 16 0…10000 s 20 s
34.20 Underload time UINT32 16 0…10000 s 10 s
35 Process variable
35.01 Signal1 param Val pointer 32 - - Speed %
35.02 Signal1 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 300.000
35.03 Signal1 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -300.000
35.04 Proc var1 dispf enum 16 0…5 - 3
35.05 Proc var1 unit enum 16 0…98 - 4
35.06 Proc var1 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 300.000
35.07 Proc var1 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -300.000
35.08 Signal2 param Val pointer 32 - - Current %
35.09 Signal2 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 300.000
35.10 Signal2 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -300.000
35.13 Proc var2 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 300.000
35.14 Proc var2 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -300.000
35.15 Signal3 param Val pointer 32 - - Torque
35.16 Signal3 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 300.000
35.17 Signal3 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -300.000
35.20 Proc var3 max REAL 32 -32768…32768 - 300.000
35.21 Proc var3 min REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -300.000
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

36 Timed functions
36.01 Timers enable Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
36.02 Timers mode Pb 16 0b0000…0b1111 - 0b0000
36.03 Start time1 UINT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 - 00:00:00
36.04 Stop time1 UINT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 - 00:00:00
36.05 Start day1 enum 16 1…7 - Monday
36.06 Stop day1 enum 16 1…7 - Monday
36.07 Start time2 UINT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 - 00:00:00
36.08 Stop time2 UINT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 - 00:00:00
36.11 Start time3 UINT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 - 00:00:00
36.12 Stop time3 UINT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 - 00:00:00
36.15 Start time4 UINT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 - 00:00:00
36.16 Stop time4 UINT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 - 00:00:00
36.19 Boost signal Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
36.20 Boost time UINT32 32 00:00:00 … 24:00:00 - 00:00:00
36.21 Timed func1 Pb 16 0b00000…0b11111 - 0b00000
36.22 Timed func2 Pb 16 0b00000…0b11111 - 0b00000
36.23 Timed func3 Pb 16 0b00000…0b11111 - 0b00000
36.24 Timed func4 Pb 16 0b00000…0b11111 - 0b00000
38 Flux ref
38.01 Flux ref REAL 16 0…200 % 100%
38.03 U/f curve func enum 16 0…2 - Linear
38.04 U/f curve freq1 REAL 16 1…500 % 10%
38.09 U/f curve volt1 REAL 16 0…200 % 20%
40 Motor control
40.01 Motor noise enum 16 0…2 - Cyclic
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

40.03 Slip gain REAL24 32 0…200 % 100%
40.04 Voltage reserve REAL24 32 -4…50 % -1%
40.06 Force open loop enum 16 0…1 - False
40.07 IR-compensation REAL24 32 0…50 % 0.00%
42 Mech brake ctrl
42.01 Brake ctrl enum 16 0…2 - No
42.02 Brake acknowl Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
42.03 Open delay UINT32 16 0…5 s 0.00 s
42.04 Close delay UINT32 16 0…60 s 0.00 s
42.05 Close speed REAL 16 0…1000 rpm 100.0 rpm
42.06 Close cmd delay UINT32 16 0…10 s 0.00 s
42.07 Reopen delay UINT32 16 0…10 s 0.00 s
42.08 Brake open torq REAL 16 -1000…1000 % 0.0%
42.09 Open torq src Val pointer 32 - - P.42.08
42.10 Brake close req Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
42.11 Brake hold open Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
42.12 Brake fault func enum 16 0…2 - Fault
42.13 Close flt delay UINT32 16 0…60 s 0.00 s
44 Maintenance
44.01 Ontime1 func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b01
44.02 Ontime1 src Bit pointer 32 - - Running
44.03 Ontime1 limit UINT32 32 0…2147483647 s 36000000 s
44.04 Ontime1 alm sel enum 16 0…6 - Mot bearing
44.05 Ontime2 func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b01
44.06 Ontime2 src Bit pointer 32 - - Charged
44.07 Ontime2 limit UINT32 32 0…2147483647 s 15768000 s
44.08 Ontime2 alm sel enum 16 0…6 - Device clean
44.09 Edge count1 func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b01
44.10 Edge count1 src Bit pointer 32 - - Charged
44.11 Edge count1 lim UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 5000
44.12 Edge count1 div UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 1
44.13 Edg cnt1 alm sel enum 16 0…5 - Dc-charge
44.14 Edge count2 func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b01
44.15 Edge count2 src Bit pointer 32 - - RO1
44.16 Edge count2 lim UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 10000
44.17 Edge count2 div UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 1
44.18 Edg cnt2 alm sel enum 16 0…5 - Output relay
44.19 Val count1 func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b01
44.20 Val count1 src Val pointer 32 - - Speed rpm
44.21 Val count1 lim UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 13140000
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

44.22 Val count1 div UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 60
44.23 Val cnt1 alm sel enum 16 0…1 - Mot bearing
44.24 Val count2 func Pb 16 0b00…0b11 - 0b01
44.25 Val count2 src Val pointer 32 - - Speed rpm
44.26 Val count2 lim UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 6570000
44.27 Val count2 div UINT32 32 0…2147483647 - 60
44.28 Val cnt2 alm sel enum 16 0…1 - Value2
44.29 Fan ontime lim UINT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 0.00 h
44.30 Runtime lim UINT32 32 0…35791394.1 h 0.00 h
44.31 Runtime alm sel enum 16 1…5 - Device clean
44.32 kWh inv lim UINT32 32 0…2147483647 kWh 0 kWh
44.33 kWh inv alm sel enum 16 1…5 - Device clean
45 Energy optimising
45.01 Energy optim enum 16 0…1 - Disable
45.02 Energy tariff1 UINT32 32 0…21474836.47 - 0.65
45.06 E tariff unit enum 16 0…2 - 0
45.08 Pump ref power REAL 16 0…1000 % 100.0%
45.09 Energy reset enum 16 0…1 - Done
47 Voltage ctrl
47.01 Overvolt ctrl enum 16 0…1 - Enable
47.02 Undervolt ctrl enum 16 0…1 - Enable
47.03 SupplyVoltAutoId enum 16 0…1 - Enable
47.04 Supply voltage REAL 16 0…1000.0 V 400.0 V
48 Brake chopper
48.01 Bc enable enum 16 0…2 - Disable
48.02 Bc run-time ena Bit pointer 32 - - C.TRUE
48.03 BrThermTimeConst REAL24 32 0…10000 s 0 s
48.04 Br power max cnt REAL24 32 0…10000 kW 0.0000 kW
48.05 R br REAL24 32 0.1…1000 ohm 0.0000 Ohm
48.06 Br temp faultlim REAL24 16 0…150 % 105%
48.07 Br temp alarmlim REAL24 16 0…150 % 95%
49 Data storage
49.01 Data storage1 UINT32 16 -32768…32768 - 0
49.05 Data storage5 UINT32 32 -2147483647 … 2147483647 - 0
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

50 Fieldbus
50.01 Fba enable enum 16 0…1 - Disable
50.02 Comm loss func enum 16 0…3 - No
50.03 Comm loss t out UINT32 16 0.3…6553.5 s 0.3 s
50.04 Fba ref1 modesel enum 16 0…2 - Speed
50.05 Fba ref2 modesel enum 16 0…2 - Torque
50.06 Fba act1 tr src Val pointer 32 - - P.01.01
50.07 Fba act2 tr src Val pointer 32 - - P.01.06
50.08 Fba sw b12 src Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
51 FBA settings
51.01 FBA type UINT32 16 0…65536 - 0
51.02 FBA par2 UINT32 16 0…65536 - 0
… … … …. … … …
51.26 FBA par26 UINT32 16 0…65536 - 0
51.27 FBA par refresh enum 16 0…1 - Done
51.28 Par table ver UINT32 16 0…65536 - -
51.29 Drive type code UINT32 16 0…65536 - -
51.30 Mapping file ver UINT32 16 0…65536 - -
51.31 D2FBA comm sta enum 16 0…6 - Idle
51.32 FBA comm sw ver UINT32 16 0…65536 - -
51.33 FBA appl sw ver UINT32 16 0…65536 - -
52 FBA data in
52.01 FBA data in1 UINT32 16 0…9999 - 0
… … … … … … …
52.12 FBA data in12 UINT32 16 0…9999 - 0
53 FBA data out
53.01 FBA data out1 UINT32 16 0…9999 - 0
… … … … … … …
53.12 FBA data out12 UINT32 16 0…9999 - 0
56 Panel display
56.01 Signal1 param UINT32 00.00 … 255.255 - 01.03
56.04 Signal1 mode INT32 -1…3 - Normal
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

57 D2D communication
57.01 Link mode enum 16 0…2 - Disabled
57.02 Comm loss func enum 16 0…2 - Alarm
57.03 Node address UINT32 16 1…62 - 1
57.04 Follower mask 1 UINT32 32 0h00000000 … 0h7FFFFFFF - 0h00000000
57.05 Follower mask 2 UINT32 32 0h00000000 … 0h7FFFFFFF - 0h00000000
57.06 Ref 1 src Val pointer 32 - - P.03.05
57.07 Ref 2 src Val pointer 32 - - P.03.13
57.08 Follower cw src Val pointer 32 - - P.02.31
57.11 Ref1 msg type enum 16 0…1 - Broadcast
57.12 Ref1 mc group UINT32 16 0…62 - 0
57.13 Next ref1 mc grp UINT32 16 0…62 - 0
57.14 Nr ref1 mc grps UINT32 16 1…62 - 1
57.15 D2D com port enum 16 0…3 - on-board
64 Load analyzer
64.01 PVL signal Val pointer 32 - - Power inu
64.02 PVL filt time REAL 16 0…120 s 2.00 s
64.03 Reset loggers Bit pointer 32 - - C.FALSE
64.04 AL signal Val pointer 32 - - Power motor
64.05 AL signal base REAL 32 0…32768 - 100.00
64.06 PVL peak value1 REAL 32 -32768…32768 - -
64.07 Date of peak UINT32 32 01.01.80… d -
64.08 Time of peak UINT32 32 00:00:00…23:59:59 s -
64.09 Current at peak REAL 32 -32768…32768 A -
64.10 Dc volt at peak REAL 32 0…2000 V -
64.11 Speed at peak REAL 32 -32768…32768 rpm -
64.12 Date of reset UINT32 32 01.01.80… d -
64.13 Time of reset UINT32 32 00:00:00…23:59:59 s -
64.14 AL1 0 to 10% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.15 AL1 10 to 20% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.16 AL1 20 to 30% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.17 AL1 30 to 40% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.18 AL1 40 to 50% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.19 AL1 50 to 60% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.20 AL1 60 to 70% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.21 AL1 70 to 80% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.22 AL1 80 to 90% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.23 AL1 over 90% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.24 AL2 0 to 10% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.25 AL2 10 to 20% REAL 16 0…100 % -
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

64.26 AL2 20 to 30% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.27 AL2 30 to 40% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.28 AL2 40 to 50% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.29 AL2 50 to 60% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.30 AL2 60 to 70% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.31 AL2 70 to 80% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.32 AL2 80 to 90% REAL 16 0…100 % -
64.33 AL2 over 90% REAL 16 0…100 % -
90 Enc module sel
90.01 Encoder 1 sel enum 16 0…7 - None
90.02 Encoder 2 sel enum 16 0…7 - None
90.04 TTL echo sel enum 16 0…5 - Disabled
90.05 Enc cable fault enum 16 0…2 - Fault
90.10 Enc par refresh enum 16 0…1 - Done
91 Absol enc conf
91.01 Sine cosine nr UINT32 16 0…65535 - 0
91.02 Abs enc interf enum 16 0…5 - None
91.03 Rev count bits UINT32 16 0…32 - 0
91.04 Pos data bits UINT32 16 0…32 - 0
91.05 Refmark ena enum 16 0…1 - False
91.10 Hiperface parity enum 16 0…1 - Odd
91.11 Hiperf baudrate enum 16 0…3 - 9600
91.12 Hiperf node addr UINT32 16 0…255 - 64
91.20 SSI clock cycles UINT32 16 2…127 - 2
91.21 SSI position msb UINT32 16 1…126 - 1
91.22 SSI revol msb UINT32 16 1…126 - 1
91.23 SSI data format enum 16 0…1 - binary
91.24 SSI baud rate enum 16 0…5 - 100 kbit/s
91.25 SSI mode enum 16 0…1 - Initial pos.
91.26 SSI transmit cyc enum 16 0…5 - 100 µs
91.27 SSI zero phase enum 16 0…3 - 315-45 deg
91.30 Endat mode enum 16 0…1 - Initial pos.
91.31 Endat max calc enum 16 0…3 - 50 ms
92 Resolver conf
92.01 Resolv polepairs UINT32 16 1…32 - 1
92.02 Exc signal ampl UINT32 16 4…12 Vrms 4.0 Vrms
92.03 Exc signal freq UINT32 16 1…20 kHz 1 kHz
93 Pulse enc conf
93.01 Enc1 pulse nr UINT32 16 0…65535 - 0
93.02 Enc1 type enum 16 0…1 - Quadrature
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

93.03 Enc1 sp CalcMode enum 16 0….5 - Auto rising
93.11 Enc2 pulse nr UINT32 16 0…65535 - 0
93.12 Enc2 type enum 16 0…1 - Quadrature
93.13 Enc2 sp CalcMode enum 16 0….5 - Auto rising
94 Ext IO conf
94.01 Ext IO1 sel UINT32 16 0…3 - None
94.02 Ext IO2 sel UINT32 16 0…3 - None
95 Hw configuration
95.01 Ctrl boardSupply enum 16 0…1 - Internal 24V
95.03 Temp inu ambient INT32 16 0…55 °C 40 °C
97 User motor par
97.01 Use given params enum 16 0…3 - NoUserPars
97.02 Rs user REAL24 32 0…0.5 p.u. 0.00000 p.u.
97.03 Rr user REAL24 32 0…0.5 p.u. 0.00000 p.u.
97.04 Lm user REAL24 32 0…10 p.u. 0.00000 p.u.
97.05 SigmaL user REAL24 32 0…1 p.u. 0.00000 p.u.
97.06 Ld user REAL24 32 0…10 p.u. 0.00000 p.u.
97.07 Lq user REAL24 32 0…10 p.u. 0.00000 p.u.
97.08 Pm flux user REAL24 32 0…2 p.u. 0.00000 p.u.
97.09 Rs user SI REAL24 32 0…100 ohm 0.00000 Ohm
97.10 Rr user SI REAL24 32 0…100 ohm 0.00000 Ohm
97.11 Lm user SI REAL24 32 0…100000 mH 0.00 mH
97.12 SigL user SI REAL24 32 0…100000 mH 0.00 mH
97.13 Ld user SI REAL24 32 0…100000 mH 0.00 mH
97.14 Lq user SI REAL24 32 0…100000 mH 0.00 mH
97.20 PM angle offset REAL 32 0…360 ° (el.) 0°
99 Start-up data
99.01 Language enum 16 - - English
99.04 Motor type enum 16 0…1 - AM
99.05 Motor ctrl mode enum 16 0…1 - DTC
99.06 Mot nom current REAL 32 0…6400 A 0.0 A
99.07 Mot nom voltage REAL 32 1/6 … 2 × UN V 0.0 V
99.08 Mot nom freq REAL 32 5…500 Hz 0.0 Hz
99.09 Mot nom speed REAL 32 0…10000 rpm 0 rpm
99.10 Mot nom power REAL 32 0…10000 kW or hp 0.00 kW
99.11 Mot nom cosfii REAL24 32 0…1 - 0.00
99.12 Mot nom torque INT32 32 0…2147483.647 Nm 0.000 Nm
99.13 IDrun mode enum 16 0…5 - No
No. Name Type
Data
len.
Range Unit
Default
(Factory macro)

Fault tracing 259
8
Fault tracing
The chapter lists the alarm (warning) and fault messages including possible causes
and corrective actions.
Safety
WARNING! Only qualified electricians are allowed to maintain the drive. The
Safety Instructions on the first pages of the appropriate hardware manual
must be read before you start working with the drive.
Alarm and fault indications
An alarm or a fault message indicates abnormal drive status. Most alarm and fault
causes can be identified and corrected using this information. If not, an ABB
representative should be contacted.
The four-digit code number in brackets after the message is for the fieldbus
communication.
The alarm/fault code is displayed on the 7-segment display of the drive. The following
table describes the indications given by the 7-segment display.
Display Meaning
“E-” followed by error code System error. See appropriate drive hardware manual.
“A-” followed by error code Alarm. See section Alarm messages generated by the drive on page 260.
“F-” followed by error code Fault. See section Fault messages generated by the drive on page 268.

260 Fault tracing
How to reset
The drive can be reset either by pressing the RESET key on the control panel or PC
tool, or by switching the supply voltage off for a while. When the fault has been
removed, the motor can be restarted.
A fault can also be reset from an external source selected by parameter 10.10 Fault
reset sel.
Fault history
When fault is detected, it is stored in the fault logger with a time stamp. The fault
history stores information on the 16 latest faults of the drive. Three of the latest faults
are stored at the beginning of a power switch off.
Parameters 08.01 Active fault and 08.02 Last fault store the fault codes of the most
recent faults.
Alarms can be monitored via alarm words 08.05 Alarm word1 … 08.08 Alarm word4.
Alarm information is lost at power switch off or fault reset.
Alarm messages generated by the drive
Code Alarm
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do
2000 BRAKE START
TORQUE
(0x7185)
Programmable fault:
Mechanical brake alarm. Alarm
is activated if required motor
starting torque (42.08 Brake
open torq) is not achieved.
Check brake open torque setting,
parameter 42.08.
Check drive torque and current limits.
See parameter group 20 Limits.
2001 BRAKE NOT
CLOSED
(0x7186)
Programmable fault:
alarm. Alarm is activated e.g. if
brake acknowledgement is not
as expected during brake
closing.
Check mechanical brake connection.
Check mechanical brake settings in
parameter group 42 Mech brake ctrl.
To determine whether problem is with
acknowledgement signal or brake, check
if brake is closed or open.
2002 BRAKE NOT OPEN
(0x7187)
Programmable fault:
alarm. Alarm is activated e.g. if
brake acknowledgement is not
as expected during brake
opening.
2003 SAFE TORQUE OFF
(0xFF7A)
Programmable fault:
30.07 Sto diagnostic
Safe Torque Off function is
active, i.e. safety circuit
signal(s) connected to
connector X6 is lost while drive
is stopped and parameter
30.07 Sto diagnostic is set to
Alarm.
Check safety circuit connections. For
more information, see appropriate drive
hardware manual.
2004 STO MODE CHANGE
(0xFF7A)
Error in changing Safe Torque
Off supervision, i.e. parameter
30.07 Sto diagnostic setting
could not be changed to value
Alarm.
Contact your local ABB representative.

Fault tracing 261
2005 MOTOR
TEMPERATURE
(0x4310)
Programmable fault:
31.01 Mot temp1 prot
Estimated motor temperature
(based on motor thermal
model) has exceeded alarm
limit defined by parameter
Check motor ratings and load.
Let motor cool down. Ensure proper
motor cooling: Check cooling fan, clean
cooling surfaces, etc.
Check value of alarm limit.
Check motor thermal model settings
(parameters 31.09…31.14).
Measured motor temperature
has exceeded alarm limit
defined by parameter 31.03
Mot temp1 almLim.
Check that actual number of sensors
corresponds to value set by parameter
31.02 Mot temp1 src.
2006 EMERGENCY OFF
(0xF083)
Drive has received emergency
OFF2 command.
To restart drive, activate run enable
signal (source selected by parameter
10.11 Run enable) and start drive.
2007 RUN ENABLE
(0xFF54)
No run enable signal is
received.
Check setting of parameter 10.11 Run
enable. Switch signal on (e.g. in the
fieldbus Control Word) or check wiring of
selected source.
2008 ID-RUN
(0xFF84)
Motor identification run is on. This alarm belongs to normal start-up
procedure. Wait until drive indicates that
motor identification is completed.
Motor identification is required. This alarm belongs to normal start-up
procedure.
Select how motor identification should be
performed, parameter 99.13 IDrun mode.
Start identification routines by pressing
Start key.
2009 EMERGENCY STOP
(0xF081)
Drive has received emergency
stop command (OFF1/OFF3).
Check that it is safe to continue
operation.
Return emergency stop push button to
normal position (or adjust the fieldbus
Control Word accordingly).
Restart drive.
2011 BR OVERHEAT
(0x7112)
Brake resistor temperature has
exceeded alarm limit defined
by parameter 48.07 Br temp
alarmlim.
Stop drive. Let resistor cool down.
Check resistor overload protection
function settings (parameters
48.01…48.05).
Check alarm limit setting, parameter
48.07 Br temp alarmlim.
Check that braking cycle meets allowed
limits.
2012 BC OVERHEAT
(0x7181)
Brake chopper IGBT
temperature has exceeded
internal alarm limit.
Let chopper cool down.
48.01…48.05).
limits.
Check that drive supply AC voltage is not
excessive.
Code Alarm
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

262 Fault tracing
2013 DEVICE OVERTEMP
(0x4210)
Measured drive temperature
has exceeded internal alarm
limit.
Check ambient conditions.
Check air flow and fan operation.
Check heatsink fins for dust pick-up.
Check motor power against unit power.
2014 INTBOARD
OVERTEMP
(0x7182)
Interface board (between
power unit and control unit)
Let drive cool down.
2015 BC MOD OVERTEMP
(0x7183)
Input bridge or brake chopper
2016 IGBT OVERTEMP
(0x7184)
Drive temperature based on
thermal model has exceeded
2017 FIELDBUS COMM
(0x7510)
Programmable fault:
50.02 Comm loss func
Cyclical communication
between drive and fieldbus
adapter module or between
PLC and fieldbus adapter
module is lost.
Check status of fieldbus communication.
See appropriate User’s Manual of
fieldbus adapter module.
Check settings of parameter group 50
Fieldbus.
Check cable connections.
Check if communication master is able to
communicate.
2018 LOCAL CTRL LOSS
(0x5300)
Programmable fault:
30.03 Local ctrl loss
selected as active control
location for drive has ceased
communicating.
Check PC tool or control panel
connection.
Check control panel connector.
Replace control panel in mounting
platform.
2019 AI SUPERVISION
(0x8110)
Programmable fault:
13.32 AI superv func
An analogue input has reached
13.33 AI superv cw.
Check analogue input source and
connections.
Check analogue input minimum and
maximum limit settings.
2020 FB PAR CONF
(0x6320)
The drive does not have a
functionality requested by
PLC, or requested functionality
has not been activated.
Check PLC programming.
Fieldbus.
2021 NO MOTOR DATA
(0x6381)
Parameters in group 99 have
not been set.
Check that all the required parameters in
group 99 have been set.
Note: It is normal for this alarm to appear
during the start-up until the motor data is
entered.
2022 ENCODER 1
FAILURE (0x7301)
Encoder 1 has been activated
by parameter but the encoder
interface (FEN-xx) cannot be
found.
Check parameter 90.01 Encoder 1 sel
setting corresponds to actual encoder
interface 1 (FEN-xx) installed in drive
Slot 1/2 (parameter 09.20 Option slot1 /
09.21 Option slot2).
Note: The new setting will only take
effect after parameter 90.10 Enc par
refresh is used or after the JCU Control
Unit is powered up the next time.
Code Alarm
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

Fault tracing 263
2023 ENCODER 2
FAILURE (0x7381)
Encoder 2 has been activated
by parameter but the encoder
interface (FEN-xx) cannot be
found.
Check parameter 90.02 Encoder 2 sel
setting corresponds to actual encoder
interface 1 (FEN-xx) installed in drive
Slot 1/2 (parameter 09.20 Option slot1 /
09.21 Option slot2).
Note: The new setting will only take
effect after parameter 90.10 Enc par
refresh is used or after the JCU Control
Unit is powered up the next time.
2027 FEN TEMP MEAS
FAILURE
(0x7385)
Error in temperature
measurement when
temperature sensor (KTY or
PTC) connected to encoder
interface FEN-xx is used.
Check that parameter 31.02 Mot temp1
src / 31.06 Mot temp2 src setting
corresponds to actual encoder interface
installation (09.20 Option slot1 / 09.21
Option slot2):
If one FEN-xx module is used:
- Parameter 31.02 Mot temp1 src / 31.06
Mot temp2 src must be set either to KTY
1st FEN or PTC 1st FEN. The FEN-xx
module can be in either Slot 1 or Slot 2.
If two FEN-xx modules are used:
- When parameter 31.02 Mot temp1 src /
31.06 Mot temp2 src is set to KTY 1st
FEN or PTC 1st FEN, the encoder
installed in drive Slot 1 is used.
- When parameter 31.02 Mot temp1 src /
31.06 Mot temp2 src is set to KTY 2nd
FEN or PTC 2nd FEN, the encoder
installed in drive Slot 2 is used.
Error in temperature
measurement when KTY
sensor connected to encoder
interface FEN-01 is used.
FEN-01 does not support temperature
measurement with KTY sensor. Use PTC
sensor or other encoder interface
module.
2030 RESOLVER
AUTOTUNE ERR
(0x7388)
Resolver autotuning routines,
which are automatically started
when resolver input is
activated for the first time,
have failed.
Check cable between resolver and
resolver interface module (FEN-21) and
order of connector signal wires at both
ends of cable.
Check resolver parameter settings.
For resolver parameters and information,
see parameter group 92 Resolver conf.
Note: Resolver autotuning routines
should always be performed after
resolver cable connection has been
modified. Autotuning routines can be
activated by setting parameter 92.02 Exc
signal ampl or 92.03 Exc signal freq, and
then setting parameter 90.10 Enc par
refresh to Configure.
2031 ENCODER 1 CABLE
(0x7389)
Encoder 1 cable fault detected. Check cable between FEN-xx interface
and encoder 1. After any modifications in
cabling, re-configure interface by
switching drive power off and on, or by
activating parameter 90.10 Enc par
refresh.
Code Alarm
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

264 Fault tracing
(0x738A)
refresh.
2033 D2D
COMMUNICATION
(0x7520)
Programmable fault:
On the master drive: The drive
has not been replied to by an
activated follower for five
consecutive polling cycles.
Check that all drives that are polled
(parameters 57.04 Follower mask 1 and
57.05 Follower mask 2) on the drive-to-
drive link are powered, properly
connected to the link, and have the
correct node address.
Check the drive-to-drive link wiring.
On a follower drive: The drive
has not received new
reference 1 and/or 2 for five
consecutive reference
handling cycles.
Check the settings of parameters 57.06
Ref 1 src and 57.07 Ref 2 src) on the
master drive.
2034 D2D BUFFER
OVERLOAD
(0x7520)
Programmable fault:
Transmission of drive-to-drive
references failed because of
message buffer overflow.
2035 PS COMM
(0x5480)
Communication errors
detected between the JCU
Control Unit and the power unit
of the drive.
Check the connections between the JCU
Control Unit and the power unit.
2036 RESTORE
(0x6300)
Restoration of backed-up
parameters failed.
2037 CUR MEAS
CALIBRATION
(0x2280)
Current measurement
calibration will occur at next
start.
Informative alarm.
2038 AUTOPHASING
(0x3187)
Autophasing will occur at next
start.
Informative alarm.
2039 EARTH FAULT
(0x2330)
Programmable fault:
30.05 Earth fault
Drive has detected load
unbalance typically due to
earth fault in motor or motor
cable.
Check there are no power factor
correction capacitors or surge absorbers
in motor cable.
Check for an earth fault in motor or motor
cables by measuring the insulation
resistances of motor and motor cable.
If no earth fault can be detected, contact
your local ABB representative.
2040 AUTORESET
(0x6080)
A fault is to be autoreset. Informative alarm. See parameter group
32 Automatic reset.
2041 MOTOR NOM VALUE
(0x6383)
The motor configuration
parameters are set incorrectly.
Check the settings of the motor
configuration parameters in group 99.
The drive is not dimensioned
correctly.
Check that the drive is sized correctly for
the motor.
2042 D2D CONFIG
(0x7583)
The settings of drive-to-drive
link configuration parameters
(group 57) are incompatible.
Check the settings of the parameters in
group 57 D2D communication.
Code Alarm
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

Fault tracing 265
2043 STALL
(0x7121)
Programmable fault:
30.09 Stall function
Motor is operating in stall
region because of e.g.
excessive load or insufficient
motor power.
Check motor load and drive ratings.
Check fault function parameters.
2044 LCURVE
(0x2312)
Programmable fault:
34.01 Overload func /
34.02 Underload func
Overload or underload limit
has been exceeded.
group 34 User load curve.
2045 LCURVE PAR
(0x6320)
The load curve has been
incorrectly or inconsistently
defined.
2046 FLUX REF PAR
(0x6320)
The U/f (voltage/frequency)
curve has been incorrectly or
inconsistently defined.
group 38 Flux ref.
2047 SPEED FEEDBACK
(0x8480)
No speed feedback is
received.
group 19 Speed calculation.
Check encoder installation. See the
description of fault 0039 for more
information.
2048 OPTION COMM
LOSS
(0x7000)
Communication between drive
and option module (FEN-xx
and/or FIO-xx) is lost.
Check that option modules are properly
connected to Slot 1 and (or) Slot 2.
Check that option modules or Slot 1/2
connectors are not damaged. To
determine whether module or connector
is damaged: Test each module
individually in Slot 1 and Slot 2.
2049 MOTTEMPAL2
(0x4313)
Programmable fault:
model) has exceeded alarm
has exceeded alarm limit
Mot temp2 almLim.
2050 IGBTOLALARM
(0x5482)
Excessive IGBT junction to
case temperature. This alarm
protects the IGBT(s) and can
be activated by a short circuit
in the motor cable.
Check motor cable.
2051 IGBTTEMPALARM
(0x4210)
Drive IGBT temperature is
excessive.
Check motor power against drive power.
Code Alarm
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

266 Fault tracing
2052 COOLALARM
(0x4290)
Drive module temperature is
excessive.
Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds
40 °C (104 °F), ensure that load current
does not exceed derated load capacity of
drive. See appropriate Hardware Manual.
Check drive module cooling air flow and
fan operation.
Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of
drive module for dust pick-up. Clean
whenever necessary.
2053 MENU CHG
PASSWORD REQ
(0x6F81)
Loading a parameter listing
requires a password.
Enter password at parameter 16.03 Pass
code.
2054 MENU CHANGED
(0x6F82)
A different parameter listing is
being loaded.
Informative alarm.
2055 DEVICE CLEAN
(0x5080)
Maintenance alarm. See parameter group 44 Maintenance.
2056 COOLING FAN
(0x5081)
2057 ADD COOLING
(0x5082)
2058 CABINET FAN
(0x5083)
2059 DC CAPACITOR
(0x5084)
2060 MOTOR BEARING
(0x738C)
2061 MAIN CONTACTOR
(0x548D)
2062 RELAY OUTPUT SW
(0x548E)
2063 MOTOR START
COUNT
(0x6180)
2064 POWER UP COUNT
(0x6181)
2065 DC CHARGE COUNT
(0x6182)
2066 ONTIME1 ALARM
(0x5280)
2067 ONTIME2 ALARM
(0x5281)
2068 EDGE1 ALARM
(0x5282)
2069 EDGE2 ALARM
(0x5283)
2070 VALUE1 ALARM
(0x5284)
2071 VALUE2 ALARM
(0x5285)
Code Alarm
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

Fault tracing 267
2073 AUTOTUNE FAILED
(0x8481)
Speed controller autotune
routine did not finish
successfully.
See parameter 23.20 PI tune mode.
2074 START INTERLOCK
(0xF082)
No Start interlock signal
received.
Check circuit connected to DIIL input.
Code Alarm
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

268 Fault tracing
Fault messages generated by the drive
Code Fault
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do
0001 OVERCURRENT
(0x2310)
Output current has exceeded
internal fault limit.
Check motor load.
Check acceleration times in parameter
group 22 Speed ref ramp.
Check motor and motor cable (including
phasing and delta/star connection).
Check that the start-up data in parameter
group 99 corresponds to the motor rating
plate.
Check that there are no power factor
in motor cable.
Check encoder cable (including
phasing).
0002 DC OVERVOLTAGE
(0x3210)
Excessive intermediate circuit
DC voltage
Check that overvoltage controller is on,
parameter 47.01 Overvolt ctrl.
Check mains for static or transient
overvoltage.
Check brake chopper and resistor (if
used).
Check deceleration time.
Use coast-to-stop function (if applicable).
Retrofit frequency converter with brake
chopper and brake resistor.
0004 SHORT CIRCUIT
(0x2340)
Short-circuit in motor cable(s)
or motor
Check motor and motor cable.
in motor cable.
0005 DC UNDERVOLTAGE
(0x3220)
Intermediate circuit DC voltage
is not sufficient due to missing
mains phase, blown fuse or
rectifier bridge internal fault.
Check mains supply and fuses.
0006 EARTH FAULT
(0x2330)
Programmable fault:
30.05 Earth fault
Drive has detected load
unbalance typically due to
earth fault in motor or motor
cable.
in motor cable.
Check that there is no earth fault in motor
or motor cables:
- measure insulation resistances of motor
and motor cable.
If no earth fault can be detected, contact
your local ABB representative.
0007 FAN FAULT
(0xFF83)
Fan is not able to rotate freely
or fan is disconnected. Fan
operation is monitored by
measuring fan current.
Check fan operation and connection.
0008 IGBT OVERTEMP
(0x7184)
Drive temperature based on
thermal model has exceeded
0009 BC WIRING
(0x7111)
Brake resistor short circuit or
brake chopper control fault
Check brake chopper and brake resistor
connection.
Ensure brake resistor is not damaged.

Fault tracing 269
0010 BC SHORT CIRCUIT
(0x7113)
Short circuit in brake chopper
IGBT
Replace brake chopper.
Ensure brake resistor is connected and
not damaged.
0011 BC OVERHEAT
(0x7181)
Brake chopper IGBT
Let chopper cool down.
48.01…48.05).
limits.
Check that drive supply AC voltage is not
excessive.
0012 BR OVERHEAT
(0x7112)
Brake resistor temperature has
exceeded fault limit defined by
parameter 48.06 Br temp
faultlim.
Stop drive. Let resistor cool down.
48.01…48.05).
Check fault limit setting, parameter 48.06
Br temp faultlim.
limits.
0013 CURR MEAS GAIN
(0x3183)
Difference between output
phase U2 and W2 current
measurement gain is too great.
0014 CABLE CROSS CON
(0x3181)
Programmable fault:
30.08 Cross
connection
Incorrect input power and
motor cable connection (i.e.
input power cable is connected
to drive motor connection).
Check input power connections.
0015 SUPPLY PHASE
(0x3130)
Programmable fault:
30.06 Suppl phs loss
Intermediate circuit DC voltage
is oscillating due to missing
input power line phase or
blown fuse.
Check input power line fuses.
Check for input power supply imbalance.
0016 MOTOR PHASE
(0x3182)
Programmable fault:
30.04 Mot phase loss
Motor circuit fault due to
missing motor connection (all
three phases are not
connected).
Connect motor cable.
0017 ID-RUN FAULT
(0xFF84)
Motor ID Run is not completed
successfully.
Check motor settings (parameters
99.04…99.13).
Check that no limits prevent ID run. The
following must apply:
20.05 Maximum current > 99.06 Mot nom
current
For Reduced and Normal ID run:
– 20.01 Maximum speed > 55% of 99.09
Mot nom speed
– 20.02 Minimum speed < 0
– Supply voltage > 65% of 99.07 Mot
nom voltage
– Maximum torque (selected by 20.06
Torq lim sel) > 100% (only for Normal ID
run).
Retry.
Code Fault
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

270 Fault tracing
0018 CURR U2 MEAS
(0x3184)
Measured offset error of U2
output phase current
measurement is too great.
(Offset value is updated during
current calibration.)
0019 CURR V2 MEAS
(0x3185)
Measured offset error of V2
0020 CURR W2 MEAS
(0x3186)
Measured offset error of W2
0021 STO1 LOST
(0x8182)
active, i.e. safety circuit signal
1 connected between X6:1 and
X6:3 is lost while drive is at
stopped state and parameter
Alarm or No.
hardware manual.
0022 STO2 LOST
(0x8183)
active, i.e. safety circuit signal
2 connected between X6:2 and
X6:4 is lost while drive is at
stopped state and parameter
Alarm or No.
hardware manual.
0023 STO MODE CHANGE
(0xFF7A)
Error in changing Safe Torque
Off supervision, i.e. parameter
30.07 Sto diagnostic setting
could not be changed to value
Fault.
0024 INTBOARD
OVERTEMP
(0x7182)
Interface board (between
power unit and control unit)
0025 BC MOD OVERTEMP
(0x7183)
Input bridge or brake chopper
0026 AUTOPHASING
(0x3187)
Autophasing routine (see
section Autophasing on page
58) failed.
Try other autophasing modes (see
parameter 11.07 Autophasing mode) if
possible.
0027 PU LOST
(0x5400)
Connection between the JCU
of the drive is lost.
0028 PS COMM
(0x5480)
Communication errors
detected between the JCU
of the drive.
0029 IN CHOKE TEMP
(0xFF81)
Temperature of internal AC
choke excessive.
Check cooling fan.
Code Fault
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

Fault tracing 271
0030 EXTERNAL
(0x9000)
Fault in external device. (This
information is configured
through one of programmable
digital inputs.)
Check external devices for faults.
Check parameter 30.01 External fault
setting.
0031 SAFE TORQUE OFF
(0xFF7A)
Programmable fault:
Programmable fault:
30.07 Sto diagnostic
active, i.e. safety circuit
signal(s) connected to
connector X6 is lost during
start or run, or while drive is
stopped and parameter 30.07
Sto diagnostic is set to Fault.
hardware manual.
0032 OVERSPEED
(0x7310)
Motor is turning faster than
highest allowed speed due to
incorrectly set minimum/
maximum speed, insufficient
braking torque or changes in
load when using torque
reference.
Check minimum/maximum speed
settings, parameters 20.01 Maximum
speed and 20.02 Minimum speed.
Check adequacy of motor braking torque.
Check applicability of torque control.
Check need for brake chopper and
resistor(s).
0033 BRAKE START
TORQUE
(0x7185)
Programmable fault:
Mechanical brake fault. Fault is
activated if required motor
starting torque (42.08 Brake
open torq) is not achieved.
Check brake open torque setting,
parameter 42.08.
Check drive torque and current limits.
See parameter group 20 Limits.
0034 BRAKE NOT
CLOSED
(0x7186)
Programmable fault:
Mechanical brake control fault.
Activated e.g. if brake
acknowledgement is not as
expected during brake closing.
0035 BRAKE NOT OPEN
(0x7187)
Programmable fault:
Mechanical brake control fault.
Activated e.g. if brake
acknowledgement is not as
expected during brake
opening.
0036 LOCAL CTRL LOSS
(0x5300)
Programmable fault:
30.03 Local ctrl loss
selected as active control
location for drive has ceased
communicating.
Check PC tool or control panel
connection.
Check control panel connector.
Replace control panel in mounting
platform.
0037 NVMEM
CORRUPTED
(0x6320)
Drive internal fault
Note: This fault cannot be
reset.
0038 OPTIONCOMM LOSS
(0x7000)
Communication between drive
and option module (FEN-xx
and/or FIO-xx) is lost.
Check that option modules are properly
connected to Slot 1 and (or) Slot 2.
Check that option modules or Slot 1/2
connectors are not damaged. To
determine whether module or connector
is damaged: Test each module
individually in Slot 1 and Slot 2.
Code Fault
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

272 Fault tracing
0039 ENCODER1
(0x7301)
Encoder 1 feedback fault If fault appears during first start-up before
encoder feedback is used:
- Check cable between encoder and
encoder interface module (FEN-xx) and
order of connector signal wires at both
ends of cable.
If fault appears after encoder feedback
has already been used or during drive
run:
- Check that encoder connection wiring
or encoder is not damaged.
- Check that encoder interface module
(FEN-xx) connection or module is not
damaged.
- Check earthings (when disturbances
are detected in communication between
encoder interface module and encoder).
For more information on encoders, see
parameter groups 90 Enc module sel, 92
Resolver conf and 93 Pulse enc conf.
0040 ENCODER 2
(0x7381)
Encoder 2 feedback fault. See fault 0039.
0045 FIELDBUS COMM
(0x7510)
Programmable fault:
Cyclical communication
between drive and fieldbus
adapter module or between
PLC and fieldbus adapter
module is lost.
Check status of fieldbus communication.
See appropriate User’s Manual of
fieldbus adapter module.
Fieldbus.
Check cable connections.
Check if communication master is able to
communicate.
0046 FB MAPPING FILE
(0x6306)
Drive internal fault Contact your local ABB representative.
0047 MOTOR OVERTEMP
(0x4310)
Programmable fault:
model) has exceeded fault limit
Mot temp1 fltLim.
Check value of fault limit.
has exceeded fault limit
Mot temp1 fltLim.
Check value of fault limit.
0049 AI SUPERVISION
(0x8110)
Programmable fault:
13.32 AI superv func
An analogue input has reached
13.33 AI superv cw.
Check analogue input source and
connections.
Check analogue input minimum and
maximum limit settings.
Code Fault
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

Fault tracing 273
(0x7389)
Programmable fault:
90.05 Enc cable fault
refresh.
(0x738A)
Programmable fault:
refresh.
0052 D2D CONFIG
(0x7583)
Configuration of the drive-to-
drive link has failed for a
reason other than those
indicated by alarm A-2042, for
example start inhibition is
requested but not granted.
0053 D2D COMM
(0x7520)
Programmable fault:
On the master drive: The drive
has not been replied to by an
activated follower for five
consecutive polling cycles.
Check that all drives that are polled
(parameters 57.04 Follower mask 1 and
57.05 Follower mask 2) on the drive-to-
drive link are powered, properly
connected to the link, and have the
correct node address.
On a follower drive: The drive
has not received new
reference 1 and/or 2 for five
consecutive reference
handling cycles.
Ref 1 src and 57.07 Ref 2 src) on the
master drive.
0054 D2D BUF OVLOAD
(0x7520)
Programmable fault:
Transmission of drive-to-drive
references failed because of
message buffer overflow.
0055 TECH LIB
(0x6382)
Resettable fault generated by
a technology library.
Refer to the documentation of the
technology library.
0056 TECH LIB CRITICAL
(0x6382)
Permanent fault generated by
a technology library.
Refer to the documentation of the
technology library.
0057 FORCED TRIP
(0xFF90)
Generic Drive Communication
Profile trip command.
Check PLC status.
0058 FB PAR ERROR
(0x6320)
The drive does not have a
functionality requested by
PLC, or requested functionality
has not been activated.
Check PLC programming.
Fieldbus.
0059 STALL
(0x7121)
Programmable fault:
30.09 Stall function
Motor is operating in stall
region because of e.g.
excessive load or insufficient
motor power.
Check motor load and drive ratings.
Check fault function parameters.
0060 LOAD CURVE
(0x2312)
Programmable fault:
34.01 Overload func /
34.02 Underload func
Overload or underload limit
has been exceeded.
Code Fault
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

274 Fault tracing
0061 SPEED FEEDBACK
(0x8480)
No speed feedback is
received.
group 19 Speed calculation.
Check encoder installation. See the
description of fault 0039 (ENCODER1)
for more information.
0062 D2D SLOT COMM
(0x7584)
Drive-to-drive link is set to use
an FSCA module for
communication, but no module
is detected in specified slot.
and 57.15. Ensure that the FSCA module
has been detected by checking
parameters 09.20…09.22.
Check that the FSCA module is correctly
wired.
Try installing the FSCA module into
another slot. If the problem persists,
contact your local ABB representative.
0063 MOTOR TEMP2
(0x4313)
Programmable fault:
model) has exceeded fault limit
Mot temp2 fltLim.
has exceeded fault limit
Mot temp2 fltLim.
0064 IGBT OVERLOAD
(0x5482)
Excessive IGBT junction to
case temperature. This fault
protects the IGBT(s) and can
be activated by a short circuit
in the motor cable.
Check motor cable.
0065 IGBT TEMP
(0x4210)
Drive IGBT temperature is
excessive.
Check motor power against drive power.
0066 COOLING
(0x4290)
Drive module temperature is
excessive.
Check ambient temperature. If it exceeds
40 °C (104 °F), ensure that load current
does not exceed derated load capacity of
drive. See appropriate Hardware Manual.
Check drive module cooling air flow and
fan operation.
Check inside of cabinet and heatsink of
drive module for dust pick-up. Clean
whenever necessary.
0201 T2 OVERLOAD
(0x0201)
Firmware time level 2 overload
reset.
0202 T3 OVERLOAD
(0x6100)
reset.
Code Fault
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

Fault tracing 275
0203 T4 OVERLOAD
(0x6100)
reset.
0204 T5 OVERLOAD
(0x6100)
reset.
0205 A1 OVERLOAD
(0x6100)
Application time level 1 fault
reset.
0206 A2 OVERLOAD
(0x6100)
Application time level 2 fault
reset.
0207 A1 INIT FAULT
(0x6100)
Application task creation fault
reset.
0208 A2 INIT FAULT
(0x6100)
Application task creation fault
reset.
0209 STACK ERROR
(0x6100)
reset.
0210 FPGA ERROR
(0xFF61)
reset.
0301 UFF FILE READ
(0x6300)
File read error
reset.
0302 APPL DIR CREATION
(0x6100)
reset.
0303 FPGA CONFIG DIR
(0x6100)
reset.
0304 PU RATING ID
(0x5483)
reset.
0305 RATING DATABASE
(0x6100)
reset.
0306 LICENSING
(0x6100)
reset.
0307 DEFAULT FILE
(0x6100)
reset.
0308 APPLFILE PAR
(0x6300)
Corrupted application file
reset.
Reload application.
If fault is still active, contact your local
ABB representative.
Code Fault
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

276 Fault tracing
0309 APPL LOADING
(0x6300)
Corrupted application file
reset.
Reload application.
If fault is still active, contact your local
ABB representative.
0310 USERSET LOAD
(0xFF69)
Loading of user set is not
successfully completed
because:
- requested user set does not
exist
- user set is not compatible
with drive program
- drive has been switched off
during loading.
Reload.
0311 USERSET SAVE
(0xFF69)
User set is not saved because
of memory corruption.
Check the setting of parameter 95.01 Ctrl
boardSupply.
If the fault still occurs, contact your local
ABB representative.
0312 UFF OVERSIZE
(0x6300)
UFF file is too big. Contact your local ABB representative.
0313 UFF EOF
(0x6300)
UFF file structure failure Delete faulty file or contact your local
ABB representative.
0314 TECH LIB
INTERFACE
(0x6100)
Incompatible firmware
interface
reset.
0315 RESTORE FILE
(0x630D)
Restoration of backed-up
parameters failed.
0316 DAPS MISMATCH
(0x5484)
Mismatch between JCU
Control Unit firmware and
power unit logic versions.
0317 SOLUTION FAULT
(0x6200)
Fault generated by function
block SOLUTION_FAULT in
the solution program.
Check the usage of the
SOLUTION_FAULT block in the solution
program.
0318 MENU HIDING
(0x6200)
Menu hiding file missing or
corrupted.
Reload application.
Code Fault
(fieldbus code)
Cause What to do

Fieldbus control 277
9
Fieldbus control
The chapter describes how the drive can be controlled by external devices over a
communication network (fieldbus).

278 Fieldbus control
System overview
The drive can be connected to a fieldbus controller via a fieldbus adapter module.
The adapter module is installed into drive Slot 3.
The drive can be set to receive all of its control information through the fieldbus
interface, or the control can be distributed between the fieldbus interface and other
available sources, for example digital and analogue inputs.
Fieldbus adapters are available for various serial communication protocols, for
example
• PROFIBUS DP (FPBA-xx adapter)
• CANopen (FCAN-xx adapter)
• DeviceNet (FDNA-xx adapter)
• LONWORKS® (FLON-xx adapter).
Data Flow
Process I/O (cyclic)
Process I/O (cyclic) or
Service messages (acyclic)
Control Word (CW)
References
Fieldbus
controller
Parameter R/W requests/responses
Status Word (SW)
Actual values
Fieldbus
Other
devices
ACS850
Type Fxxx fieldbus
adapter in Slot 3

Setting up communication through a fieldbus adapter
module
Before configuring the drive for fieldbus control, the adapter module must be
mechanically and electrically installed according to the instructions given in the
User’s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module.
The communication between the drive and the fieldbus adapter module is activated
by setting parameter 50.01 Fba enable to Enable. The adapter-specific parameters
must also be set. See the table below.
Parameter Setting for
fieldbus control
Function/Information
COMMUNICATION INITIALISATION AND SUPERVISION (see also page 214)
50.01 Fba enable (1) Enable Initialises communication between drive
and fieldbus adapter module.
50.02 Comm loss
func
(0) No
(1) Fault
(2) Spd ref Safe
(3) Last speed
Selects how the drive reacts upon a fieldbus
50.03 Comm loss t
out
0.3…6553.5 s Defines the time between communication
break detection and the action selected with
parameter 50.02 Comm loss func.
50.04 Fba ref1
modesel and 50.05
Fba ref2 modesel
(0) Raw data
(1) Torque
(2) Speed
Defines the fieldbus reference scaling.
When Raw data is selected, see also
ADAPTER MODULE CONFIGURATION (see also page 216)
51.01 FBA type – Displays the type of the fieldbus adapter
module.
51.02 FBA par2 These parameters are adapter module-specific. For more
information, see the User’s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module.
Note that not all of these parameters are necessarily used.
• • •
51.26 FBA par26
51.27 FBA par
refresh
(0) Done
(1) Refresh
Validates any changed adapter module
configuration parameter settings.
51.28 Par table ver – Displays the parameter table revision of the
fieldbus adapter module mapping file stored
in the memory of the drive.
51.29 Drive type
code
– Displays the drive type code of the fieldbus
adapter module mapping file stored in the
memory of the drive.

After the module configuration parameters have been set, the drive control
parameters (see section Drive control parameters below) must be checked and
adjusted when necessary.
The new settings will take effect when the drive is powered up the next time (before
powering off the drive, wait at least 1 minute), or when parameter 51.27 FBA par
refresh is activated.
51.30 Mapping file
ver
– Displays the fieldbus adapter module
mapping file revision stored in the memory
of the drive.
51.31 D2FBA comm
sta
– Displays the status of the fieldbus adapter
module communication.
51.32 FBA comm
sw ver
– Displays the common program revision of
the adapter module.
51.33 FBA appl sw
ver
– Displays the application program revision of
the adapter module.
Note: In the User’s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module, the parameter group number is 1
or A for parameters 51.01…51.26.
TRANSMITTED DATA SELECTION (see also page 217)
52.01 FBA data in1
… 52.12 FBA data
in12
4…6
14…16
101…9999
Defines the data transmitted from drive to
fieldbus controller.
Note: If the selected data is 32 bits long,
two parameters are reserved for the
transmission.
53.01 FBA data out1
… 53.12 FBA data
out12
1…3
11…13
1001…9999
Defines the data transmitted from fieldbus
controller to drive.
Note: If the selected data is 32 bits long,
two parameters are reserved for the
transmission.
Note: In the User’s Manual of the fieldbus adapter module, the parameter group number is 3
or C for parameters 52.01…52.12 and 2 or B for parameters 53.01…53.12.
fieldbus control

Drive control parameters
The Setting for fieldbus control column gives the value to use when the fieldbus
interface is the desired source or destination for that particular signal. The Function/
Information column gives a description of the parameter.
fieldbus control
CONTROL COMMAND SOURCE SELECTION
10.01 Ext1 start func (3) FBA Selects fieldbus as the source for the start
and stop commands when EXT1 is selected
as the active control location.
10.04 Ext2 start func (3) FBA Selects fieldbus as the source for the start
and stop commands when EXT2 is selected
as the active control location.
21.01 Speed ref1
sel
(3) FBA ref1
(4) FBA ref2
Fieldbus reference REF1 or REF2 is used
as speed reference 1.
21.02 Speed ref2
sel
(3) FBA ref1
(4) FBA ref2
as speed reference 2.
24.01 Torq ref1 sel (3) FBA ref1
(4) FBA ref2
as torque reference 1.
24.02 Torq ref add
sel
(3) FBA ref1
(4) FBA ref2
as torque reference addition.
SYSTEM CONTROL INPUTS
16.07 Param save (0) Done
(1) Save
Saves parameter value changes (including
those made through fieldbus control) to
permanent memory.

The fieldbus control interface
The cyclic communication between a fieldbus system and the drive consists of 16/32-
bit input and output data words. The drive supports at the maximum the use of 12
data words (16 bits) in each direction.
Data transmitted from the drive to the fieldbus controller is defined by parameters
52.01 FBA data in1 … 52.12 FBA data in12. The data transmitted from the fieldbus
controller to the drive is defined by parameters 53.01 FBA data out1 … 53.12 FBA
data out12.
DATA
OUT 2)
4)
1
2
3
…
12
DATA
IN 2)
5)
1
2
3
…
12
FBA MAIN SW
FBA ACT1
FBA ACT2
Par. 01.01…99.99
FBA MAIN CW
FBA REF1
FBA REF2
Par. 10.01…99.99
1) See also other parameters which can be controlled by the fieldbus.
2) The maximum number of used data words is protocol-dependent.
3) Profile/instance selection parameters. Fieldbus module specific parameters. For more
information, see the User’s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module.
4) With DeviceNet, the control part is transmitted directly.
5) With DeviceNet, the actual value part is transmitted directly.
3)
3)
Parameter
table
4)
5)
1)
Fieldbus network
Fieldbus adapter
Fieldbus-specificinterface
Profile
selection
Profile
selection
DATA OUT
selection
Group 53
DATA IN
selection
Group 52
FBA Profile
EXT1/2
Start func
10.01
10.04
Speed/Torque
REF1 sel
21.01 / 24.01
/ 24.02
Speed/Torque
REF2 sel
21.02 / 24.01
/ 24.02
Cyclic communication
Acyclic communication
See the manual of the fieldbus
adapter module.

The Control Word and the Status Word
The Control Word (CW) is the principal means of controlling the drive from a fieldbus
system. The Control Word is sent by the fieldbus controller to the drive. The drive
switches between its states according to the bit-coded instructions of the Control
Word.
The Status Word (SW) is a word containing status information, sent by the drive to the
fieldbus controller.
Actual values
Actual values (ACT) are 16/32-bit words containing information on selected
operations of the drive.
FBA communication profile
The FBA communication profile is a state machine model which describes the
general states and state transitions of the drive. The State diagram on page 285
presents the most important states (including the FBA profile state names). The FBA
Control Word (parameter 02.24 – see page 99) commands the transitions between
these states and the FBA Status Word (parameter 02.26 – see page 100) indicates
the status of the drive.
Fieldbus adapter module profile (selected by adapter module parameter) defines how
the control word and status word are transmitted in a system which consists of
fieldbus controller, fieldbus adapter module and drive. With transparent modes,
control word and status word are transmitted without any conversion between the
fieldbus controller and the drive. With other profiles (e.g. PROFIdrive for FPBA-01,
AC/DC drive for FDNA-01, DS-402 for FCAN-01 and ABB Drives profile for all
fieldbus adapter modules) fieldbus adapter module converts the fieldbus-specific
control word to the FBA communication profile and status word from FBA
communication profile to the fieldbus-specific status word.
For descriptions of other profiles, see the User’s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus
adapter module.

Fieldbus references
References (FBA REF) are 16/32-bit signed integers. A negative reference
(indicating reversed direction of rotation) is formed by calculating the two’s
complement from the corresponding positive reference value. The contents of each
reference word can be used as torque or speed reference.
When torque or speed reference scaling is selected (by parameter 50.04 Fba ref1
modesel / 50.05 Fba ref2 modesel), the fieldbus references are 32-bit integers. The
value consists of a 16-bit integer value and a 16-bit fractional value. The
speed/torque reference scaling is as follows:
Reference Scaling Notes
Speed reference FBA REF / 65536
(value in rpm)
Final reference is limited by parameters
20.01 Maximum speed, 20.02 Minimum
speed and 21.09 SpeedRef min abs.
Torque reference FBA REF / 65536
(value in %)
Final reference is limited by torque limit

State diagram
The following presents the state diagram for the FBA communication profile. For
other profiles, see the User’s Manual of the appropriate fieldbus adapter module.
MAINS OFF
Power ON
from any state
FBA
Communication
Profile
(FBA SW Bit 0 = 1)
n(f)=0 / I=0
(FBA SW Bit 6 = 1)
(FBA CW Bit 16 = 1)
(FBA CW Bit 0 = 1)
OFF1 (FBA CW Bit 4 = 1
OFF1
ACTIVE
C D
(FBA CW Bit 13 = 0)
RUNNING (FBA SW Bit 3 = 1)
(FBA SW Bit 5 = 1)
from any state
from any state
Emergency stop
n(f)=0 / I=0
OFF3
ACTIVE
Emergency OFF
(FBA SW Bit 4 = 1)
OFF2
ACTIVE
RFG: OUTPUT
ENABLED
RFG: ACCELERATOR
ENABLED
B
B C D
(FBA CW Bit 12 = 0)
D
(FBA CW Bit 14 = 0)
A
C
FBA CW = Fieldbus Control Word
FBA SW = Fieldbus Status Word
n = Speed
I = Input Current
(FBA SW Bit 8 = 1)
RFG = Ramp Function Generator
f = Frequency
D
from any state
Fault
(FBA SW Bit 16 = 1)
(FBA CW Bit 8 = 1)
START
INHIBITED
(FBA CW Bits 7 = 1)
READY TO
START
from any state
and FBA CW Bit 0 = 1)
RUN
DISABLE
FAULT
OPERATING
(FBA SW Bit 1 = 0)
(FBA CW Bit 7 = 0)
(FBA CW = xxxx xxxx xxxx xxx0 xxxx 1xxx 1xxx xx10)
(FBA CW = xxxx xxxx xxxx xxx0 xxx0 1xxx 1xxx xx10)
(FBA CW = xxxx xxxx xxxx xxx0 xx00 1xxx 1xxx xx10)
(FBA CW = xxxx xxxx xxxx xxx0 x000 1xxx 1xxx xx10)
E
E
Par. 10.19 = 1
Par. 10.19 = 0

Control block diagrams 287
10
Control block diagrams
The chapter contains a graphical representation of the control program.

288 Control block diagrams
19.03Motorspeedfilt
19.02Speedfbsel06.03bit1Zerospeed
19.06Zerospeedlimit
006.03bit0Speedactneg
19.08Abovespeedlimit06.03bit2Abovelimit
06.03bit3Atsetpoint
19.10Speedwindow
t
19.07Zerospeeddelay
01.01Motorspeedrpm
01.08Encoder1speed
01.10Encoder2speed
01.14Motorspeedest
03.04SpeedRefunramp
a
b
a>b
a<b
a
b
a>b
a<b
a
b
a>b
a<b
a
b
a>b
a<b
ABS
ABS
ABS
+
Speedfeedback

21.04Speedref1/2sel
21.05Speedshare
Constantspeedcommand
21.07Speedref1jog
21.08Speedrefjog2
10.08Jog2start
10.07Jog1start
20.03Posspeedenable
0
20.02Minimumspeed
20.04Negspeedenable
0
06.02bit12Rampinzero
06.01bit11Localpanel
30.02Speedrefsafe
Safespeedcommand
06.01bit9localfb
0
20.01Maximumspeed
Constantspeedreference
02.26FBAmainref1
21.09SpeedRefminabs
21.02Speed
ref2sel
Zero
AI1scaled
AI2scaled
FBref1
FBref2
D2Dref1
D2dref2
Panel
Motpot
PIDout
Pointer
Criticalspeeds1-3
19.01Speedscaling
22.01Acc/decsel
22.06Shapetimeacc1
22.07Shapetimeacc2
22.08Sshapetimedec1
22.09Shapetimedec2
22.11Dectimejogging
22.12EMstoptime
22.10Acctimejogging
06.01bit5EMstop
06.02bit5Jogging
RAMP&SHAPE
22.02Acctime1
22.03Dectime1
22.04Acctime2
22.05Dectime20
06.02bit14Rampoutzero
06.02bit13Ramphold
Criticalspeedenable
03.03Speedrefunramped
03.04Speedreframpin
03.05SpeedReframped
Ref1
Add
Sub
Mul
Min
Max
21.03Speedref1func
21.01Speed
ref1sel
Zero
AI1scaled
AI2scaled
FBref1
FBref2
D2Dref1
D2dref2
Panel
Motpot
PIDout
Pointer
x
02.34Panelref
Speedreferencemodificationandramping

23.08Speedadditive
23.07SpeederrFtime
20.01Maximumspeed
20.02Minimumspeed0
TAccCom
23.05AcccompDerTime
23.06AcccompFtime
d
dt
03.05SpeedReframped
03.08Acccomptorq
03.07Speederrorfilt
01.01Motorspeedrpm
23.03Derivationtime
23.04Derivfilttime
23.01Proportgain
23.14Droopingrate
23.02Integrationtime
23.09Maxtorqspcontrol
23.10Mintorqspcontrol
03.09Torqrefspctrl
PID
23.11SpeedErrwinFunc
23.12SpeedErrwinhi
23.13SpeedErrwinlo
03.06SpeedRefused
23.15PIadaptmaxsp
23.16PIadaptminsp
23.17Pcoefatminsp
23.18Icoefatminsp
x
++
+
Speederrorhandling

24.05Loadshare
24.03Maximumtorqref
24.04Minimumtorqref
24.06Torqrampup
24.07Torqrampdown
24.01Torqref1sel
Speed
limitation
01.01Motorspeedrpm
20.02Minimumspeed
03.11Torqreframped
24.02Torqrefaddsel
99.05Motorctrlmode
12.05Ext2ctrlmode
06.02bit5Jogging
06.01bit9Localfb
12.01Ext1/Ext2sel
12.03Ext1ctrlmode
SPEED
TORQUE
MIN
MAX
ADD
SPEED
TORQUE
MIN
MAX
ADD
ZERO
AI1
AI2
FBREF1
FBREF2
D2DREF1
D2DREF2
03.09Torqrefspctrl
03.12Torqrefsplim
03.13TorqreftoTC
SPEED
SCALAR
06.01bit11Panellocal
SPEED
20.01Maximumspeed
0
SPEED
Safespeedcommand
SPEED
Lastspeedcommand
SPEED
Torqueref
Speedref
Max
Min
Add
x
+
Torquereferencemodification,operatingmodeselection

27.01PID
setpointsel
Zero
AI1scaled
AI2scaled
FBref1
FBref2
D2Dref1
D2Dref2
27.03PID
fbksrc1
Zero
AI1scaled
AI2scaled
FBref1
FBref2
D2Dref1
D2Dref2
27.04PID
fbksrc2
Zero
AI1scaled
AI2scaled
FBref1
FBref2
D2Dref1
D2Dref2
Act1
Add
Sub
Mul
div
Max
Min
Sqrtsub
Sqrtadd
27.02PIDfbkfunc
Process
PID
27.05PIDfbk1max
27.06PIDfbk1min
27.07PIDfbk2max
27.08PIDfbk2min
27.22Sleepmode
27.23Sleeplevel
27.24Sleepdelay
27.25Wakeuplevel
27.26Wakeupdelay
27.27Sleepena
27.09PIDfbkgain
x
27.13PIDintegtime
27.14PIDderivtime
27.10PIDfbktime
27.12PIDgain
27.17PIDmode
27.15PIDderivfilter
27.16PIDerrorinv
27.09PIDfbkgain
04.05ProcessPIDout
04.04ProcessPIDerr
27.18PIDmaximum
27.19PIDminimum
ProcessPID

01.04Motorcurrent
01.05Motorcurrent%
01.06Motortorque
01.07Dc-voltage
01.14Motorspeedest
03.17Fluxrefused
Gatesignals
03.13TorqreftoTC03.14Torqrefused
01.23Motorpower
20.07Maximumtorque1
20.08Minimumtorque1
20.09Maximumtorque2
20.10Minimumtorque2
20.06Torqlimsel
20.12PMotoringlim
20.13PGeneratinglim
U/F-curveFlux
optimisation
FluxbrakingField
weakening
DCvoltage
limiter
PowerlimiterTorquelimiter
Startcontrol
AUTO
FAST
CONSTTIME
11.01Startmode
11.02DC-Magntime
38.01Fluxref
38.03U/Fcurvefunc
38.04U/Fcurvefreq1
38.05U/Fcurvefreq2
38.06U/Fcurvefreq3
38.07U/Fcurvefreq4
38.08U/Fcurvefreq5
38.09U/Fcurvevolt1
38.10U/Fcurvevolt2
38.11U/Fcurvevolt3
38.12U/Fcurvevolt4
38.13U/Fcurvevolt5
45.01Energyoptim
20.05Maximumcurrent
Motormodel
Estimateandcalculate
11.07Autophasingmode
99.13Id-runmode
01.22Powerinuout40.06Forceopenloop
40.03Slipgain
97Usermotorpar
99Motnompar
47.01Overvoltagectrl
47.02Undervoltctrl
01.01Motorspeedrpm
99.05Motorctrlmode
06.07Torqlimstatus
M
40.07IR-compensation
40.04Voltagereserve
01.29Torqnomscale
01.30Polepairs
DTCcore
Directtorquecontrol

Further information
Product and service inquiries
Address any inquiries about the product to your local ABB representative, quoting the
type designation and serial number of the unit in question. A listing of ABB sales,
support and service contacts can be found by navigating to www.abb.com/drives and
selecting Sales, Support and Service network.
Product training
For information on ABB product training, navigate to www.abb.com/drives and select
Training courses.
Providing feedback on ABB Drives manuals
Your comments on our manuals are welcome. Go to www.abb.com/drives and select
Document Library – Manuals feedback form (LV AC drives).
Document library on the Internet
You can find manuals and other product documents in PDF format on the Internet. Go
to www.abb.com/drives and select Document Library. You can browse the library or
enter selection criteria, for example a document code, in the search field.

3AUA0000045497RevC/EN
EFFECTIVE:2009-07-20
ABB Oy
AC Drives
P.O. Box 184
FI-00381 HELSINKI
FINLAND
Telephone +358 10 22 11
Fax +358 10 22 22681
Internet http://www.abb.com
ABB Inc.
Automation Technologies
Drives & Motors
16250 West Glendale Drive
New Berlin, WI 53151 USA
Telephone 262 785-3200
800-HELP-365
Fax 262 780-5135
ABB Beijing Drive Systems Co. Ltd.
No. 1, Block D, A-10 Jiuxianqiao Beilu
Chaoyang District
Beijing, P.R. China, 100015
Telephone +86 10 5821 7788
Fax +86 10 5821 7618
Internet http://www.abb.com

Abb acs850-04-firmware-manual

More Related Content

What's hot (20)

Viewers also liked (18)

Similar to Abb acs850-04-firmware-manual (20)

More from Toàn Huỳnh (17)

Recently uploaded (20)

Abb acs850-04-firmware-manual